HomeMy WebLinkAboutVol 2 SpecsPhase III – Worship Space
St. Christopher’s
Episcopal Church
1402 West Main Street
Carmel, Indiana 46032
Project Manual
Construction Documents
Volume 2 Division 15 - 33
September 19, 2008
600 Kentucky Avenue Suite 101
Indianapolis, Indiana 46225
(317) 632-7484 (317) 687-2064 Fax
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER:
1850 West 15th Street
Indianapolis, Indiana 46202
(317) 681-1000, FAX (317) 684-9694
VS ENGINEERING, INC.
4275 N. HIGH SCHOOL ROAD
INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46254
(317)293-3542 FAX 293-4737
LAWSON ELSER INC.
ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
650 E. CARMEL DRIVE, SUITE 150
CARMEL, IN 46032
317 574-9409 FAX 574-9431
R.E. Dimond
and Associates, Inc.
Consulting Engineers
732 North Capitol Avenue,
Indianapolis, Indiana 46204
(317) 634-4672 Fax 638-8725
Copyright 2008 Woollen, Molzan & Partners, Inc. All Rights Reserved
PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 2 DIVISION 15-33 - CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Phase # 3 Addition to
ST. CHRISTOPHER’S EPISCOPAL CHURCH
OWNER: St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church
1402 West Main Street
Carmel, Indiana 46032
(317) 846-8716
ARCHITECT: Woollen, Molzan and Partners, Inc.
600 Kentucky Avenue, Suite 101
Indianapolis, Indiana 46225
(317) 632-7484, Fax (317) 687-2064
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL R. E. Dimond & Associates, Inc
ENGINEER: Consulting Engineers.
732 North Capitol Avenue
Indianapolis, Indiana 46204
(317) 634-4672, Fax (317) 638-8725
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Lawson Elser Inc..
650 East Carmel Drive
Carmel , Indiana 46032
(317) 574-9409, Fax (317) 574-9431
CIVIL ENGINEER: VS Engineering, Inc.
4275 N. High School Road
Indianapolis, Indiana 46254
(317 293-3542, Fax (317) 293-4737
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: PEPPER CONSTRUCTION
COMPANY OF INDIANA, LLC
1850 West 15
th
Street
Indianapolis, Indiana 46202
(317) 681-1000, FAX (317) 684-9694
DATE: September 19, 2008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME 1:
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
Section 00 43 33 - Subcontractors and Product List
Remainder By Pepper Construction.
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work
Section 01 11 10 - Project Code Summary
Section 01 12 16 - Sequence Work
Section 01 19 00 - Miscellaneous General Requirements
Section 01 21 00 - Allowances
Section 01 23 00 - Alternates
Section 01 29 00 - Application for Payment
Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings
Section 01 32 13 - Construction Schedules
Section 01 33 00 - Submittals
Section 01 45 24 - Testing Agency Services (By Contractor)
Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities
Section 01 52 13 - Field Offices and Sheds
Section 01 56 00 - Barriers
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
Section 01 62 00 - Products Options and Substitutions
Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering
Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching
Section 01 74 23 - Cleaning
Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout
Section 01 79 00 - Systems Demonstration
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
Section 02 32 00 - Geotechnical Investigations
Section 02 41 19 - Selective Demolition
Section 02 71 00 - Foundation Drainage
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section 03 30 00 - Cast in Place Concrete
Section 03 41 00 - Precast Structural Concrete
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry
Section 04 43 10 - Limestone
Section 04 43 12 - Limestone Rubble Veneer
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel
Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joists
Section 05 31 00 - Steel Deck
Section 05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
Section 05 51 13 - Metal Pan Stairs
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
Section 06 40 00 - Finish Carpentry and Millwork
Section 06 61 16 - Solid Polymer Fabrications
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 14 00 - Waterproofing Fluid-applied
Section 07 21 00 - Building Insulation
Section 07 22 00 - Nail-base Roof Insulation
Section 07 26 00 - Plastic Sheet Vapor Barriers and Retarders
Section 07 27 00 - Air Barrier/Weather Resistant Barrier
Section 07 31 13 - Fiberglass Reinforced Asphalt Shingles
Section 07 62 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping
Section 07 86 00 - Smokestopping
Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants
Section 07 95 00 - Expansion Control
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors & Frames
Section 08 14 33 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors
Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors
Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum Framing and Entrances
Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows
Section 08 52 13 - Aluminum Clad Wood Windows & Doors
Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware
Section 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing
Section 08 90 00 - Louvers
DIVISION 9 – FINISH
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Wallboard
Section 09 24 13 - Cement Lathing & Plastering (Stucco)
Section 09 27 13 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Fabrications (GFRG)
Section 09 30 13 - Ceramic Tile
Section 09 51 10 - Acoustical Ceiling Systems
Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring and Base
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08
Section 09 68 13 - Carpet Tile
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Finishing
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 10 28 13 - Toilet and Miscellaneous Accessories
Section 10 44 00 - Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (NONE)
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
Section 12 32 16 - Manufactured Cabinets and Casework (Plastic Laminate)
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NONE)
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Section 14 24 25 - Hydraulic Elevator (Holeless)
VOLUME 2:
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
Section 15000 - Mechanical Index
Section 15010 - General Provisions
Section 15050 - Basic Materials & Methods
Section 15060 - Pipe, Valves and Fittings
Section 15180 - Insulation
Section 15183 - HVAC Water Treatment
Section 15400 - Plumbing
Section 15410 - Drainage Products
Section 15420 - Plumbing Equipment and Devices
Section 15500 - Fire Protection
Section 15700 - Liquid Heat Transfer
Section 15800 - Air Distribution
Section 15900 – Temperature Controls
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
Section 16000 - Electrical Index
Section 16010 - General Provisions
Section 16040 - Labeling and Identification
Section 16042 - Testing and Proof of Performance
Section 16110 - Electrical Raceways
Section 16120 - Electrical Wiring
Section 16130 - Electrical Outlet & Junction Boxes
Section 16140 - Electrical Wiring Devices and Contactors
Section 16160 - Electrical Motor Starters
Section 16170 - Electrical Safety Switches
Section 16180 - Overcurrent Protection
Section 16450 - Grounding
Section 16470 - Branch Circuit Panelboards
Section 16472 - Distribution Panelboards
Section 16510 - Electrical Light Fixtures
Section 16551 - Electrical Lamps
Section 16552 - Electrical Ballasts
Section 16670 – Lightning Protection System
Section 16740 – Telephone and Data Conduit System
Section 16921 – Temperature Control and Interlocking
Section 16930 – Lighting Control Equipment
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
Section 31 11 00 - Site Preparation
Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork
Section 31 23 33 - Trenching
Section 31 31 16 - Soil Treatment
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 32 12 17 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving (Inside Indiana)
Section 32 13 00 - Concrete Walks, Ramps, Steps and Curbing
Section 32 92 19 - Topsoiling and Seeding
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
Section 33 49 00 - Drainage Structures, Pipes and Fitting
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
D&A#07103 15000-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15000
MECHANICAL INDEX
INDEX TO MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION TITLE.............................................................................................................PAGE
15000 Mechanical Index ..............................................................................................1-1
15010 General Provisions ..........................................................................................1-16
15050 Basic Materials & Methods...............................................................................1-16
15060 Pipe, Valves and Fittings..................................................................................1-38
15180 Insulation ..........................................................................................................1-20
15183 HVAC Water Treatment......................................................................................1-5
15400 Plumbing ............................................................................................................1-6
15410 Drainage Products..............................................................................................1-3
15420 Plumbing Equipment and Devices......................................................................1-5
15500 Fire Protection ....................................................................................................1-9
15700 Liquid Heat Transfer.........................................................................................1-14
15800 Air Distribution ..................................................................................................1-13
15900 Temperature Controls ......................................................................................1-14
END OF MECHANICAL INDEX
D&A#07103 15010-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this and all Sections of
Division 15.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for
mechanical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are
included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1:
1.2.1.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies.
1.2.1.2 Abbreviations contained in Specifications.
1.2.1.3 Shop Drawings.
1.2.1.4 Record Drawings.
1.2.1.5 Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.2.1.6 Drawings.
1.2.1.7 Work and Workmanship.
1.2.1.8 Coordination between Contractors.
1.2.1.9 Assignment of Miscellaneous Work.
1.2.1.10 Material Storage.
1.2.1.11 Product and Material Approval.
1.2.1.12 Protection and Treatment of Property.
1.2.1.13 Demolition and Removal of Equipment.
1.2.1.14 Electrical Connections to Equipment and Control Wiring.
1.2.1.15 Attaching to Building Construction.
1.2.1.16 Rough-ins.
1.2.1.17 Mechanical Installations.
1.2.1.18 Cleaning and Touch-up.
1.2.1.19 General Completion Startup.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
1.3.1 All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications,
local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations.
1.3.2 In case of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, local
ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and Contract Documents,
the most stringent shall govern. Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer in writing of
any such difference.
1.3.3 Non-compliance: should Contractor perform any work that does not comply with
requirements of applicable building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry
standards and utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting
the deficiencies.
D&A#07103 15010-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.3.4 Applicable codes and standards shall include all state laws, local ordinances, utility
company regulations and applicable requirements of the most recent editions of the
following nationally accepted codes and standards:
1.3.4.1 The Indiana Building Code. (IBC)
1.3.4.2 The Indiana Electric Code.
1.3.4.3 The Indiana Mechanical Code. (IMC)
1.3.4.4 The Indiana Plumbing Code. (UPC)
1.3.4.5 The Indiana Elevator Code.
1.3.4.6 The Indiana Handicapped Accessibility Code.
1.3.4.7 National Fire Protection Associates (NFPA) codes and regulations.
1.3.4.8 Regulations of the Indiana State Board of Health.
1.3.4.9 Regulations of the Insurance Bureau of Indiana.
1.3.4.10 Requirements of Factory Mutual (FM).
1.3.4.11 Regulations of the Indiana Department of Fire Prevention and Building Services.
1.3.4.12 The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1.3.4.13 All local and municipal codes and/or regulations.
1.3.5 Except as otherwise specified herein, all piping work and materials are to conform to the
American Standards Association Code for Pressure Piping.
1.3.6 All fired and unfired pressure vessels furnished and installed under this contract are to
conform to all requirements of current edition of State of Indiana Rules and Regulations
for Boilers and Unfired Pressure Vessels. Copies of all certificates of tests and
construction as required by this code to be turned over to Owner.
1.3.7 Permits: Contractor shall pay for all building permits required by work and permits for
opening streets and for connection to various utilities, including fees for water meter
installation and any other requirements necessary to carry out his work. Where streets
or sidewalks are cut, same must be repaired to at least as good a condition as they
were before, all at expense of this Contractor. Permits shall be posted in prominent
place at building site properly protected from weather and physical damage.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS CONTAINED IN SPECIFICATIONS
1.4.1 AABC Associated Air Balance Council
1.4.2 AASHTO American Assn. of State Highway and Transportation Officials
1.4.3 ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (formerly Anti-
Friction Bearing Manufacturers Associates)
1.4.4 ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association
1.4.5 ACI American Concrete Institute
1.4.6 ACIL The Association of Independent Scientific, Engineering, and Testing
Firms
1.4.7 ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association
1.4.8 ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
1.4.9 ADC Air Diffusion Council
1.4.10 AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (see ABMA)
1.4.11 AGA American Gas Association
1.4.12 AIA American Insurance Association
1.4.13 AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association
1.4.14 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
1.4.15 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
D&A#07103 15010-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.4.16 AMA Air Moving & Conditioning Association
1.4.17 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
1.4.18 ANSI American National Standards Institute
1.4.19 API American Petroleum Institute
1.4.20 AREA American Railway Engineering Association
1.4.21 ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
1.4.22 ASA American Standards Association
1.4.23 ASA Acoustical Society of America
1.4.24 ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council
1.4.25 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air-Conditioning Engineers
1.4.26 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
1.4.27 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
1.4.28 ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
1.4.29 AWS American Welding Society
1.4.30 AWWA American Water Works Association
1.4.31 AABC Associated Air Balance Council
1.4.32 CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute
1.4.33 CE Corps of Engineers (U.S. Department of the Army)
1.4.34 CGA Compressed Gas Association
1.4.35 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
1.4.36 CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
1.4.37 CTI Cooling Tower Institute
1.4.38 DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association
1.4.39 DOT Department of Transportation
1.4.40 EPA Environmental Protection Agency
1.4.41 FAA Federal Aviation Administration
1.4.42 FCC Federal Communications Commission
1.4.43 FDA Food and Drug Administration
1.4.44 FIA Factory Insurance Association
1.4.45 FCI Fluid Controls Institute
1.4.46 FM Factory Mutual System
1.4.47 HEI Heat Exchange Institute
1.4.48 HI Hydraulic Institute
1.4.49 HI Hydronics Institute (Division of Gas Appliance Manufacturers
Association)
1.4.50 INCE Institute of Noise Control Engineering
1.4.51 IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
1.4.52 IRI Industrial Risk Insurance
1.4.53 ISA International Society for Measurement and Control
1.4.54 ITS Intertek Testing Services (Formerly Inchcape Testing Services)
1.4.55 MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America
1.4.56 MSS Manufacturing Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
1.4.57 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
1.4.58 NBS National Bureau of Standards
1.4.59 NCAC National Council of Acoustical Consultants
1.4.60 NCCA National Coil Coaters Association
1.4.61 NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute
1.4.62 NCSPA National Corrugated Steel Pipe Association
1.4.63 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
1.4.64 NEC National Electric Code
1.4.65 NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
1.4.66 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
D&A#07103 15010-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.4.67 NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association
1.4.68 NFPA National Fire Protection Association
1.4.69 NIA National Insulation Association (Formerly National Insulation and
Abatement)
1.4.70 NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (U.S. Department of
Commerce)
1.4.71 NUSIG National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines
1.4.72 OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor)
1.4.73 PCA Portland Cement Association
1.4.74 PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
1.4.75 PPFA Plastic Pipe and Fittings Association
1.4.76 PPI Plastics Pipe Institute
1.4.77 RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association
1.4.78 SAE SAE International
1.4.79 SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
1.4.80 SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association
1.4.81 STI Steel Tank Institute
1.4.82 SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association
1.4.83 UL Underwriters Laboratories
1.4.84 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
1.4.85 WSC Water Systems Council
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
1.5.1 Review of Shop Drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for correct
ordering of material and equipment.
1.5.2 Contractor review should insure that equipment will fit into available space.
1.5.3 Shop Drawings shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Division 1
“Submittals”.
1.5.4 Include all significant data on Shop Drawing Submittals shown in Specifications and
Equipment Schedule. Including, but not limited to the following:
1.5.4.1 Name each piece of equipment by scheduled name, noted as: “Mark No.” as
indicated on drawings, i.e., FC-A, CSAC-A, etc.
1.5.4.2 Pressure drops at design flow.
1.5.4.3 Electrical characteristics.
1.5.4.4 Description of construction and material types and gauge of materials used.
1.5.4.5 Entering and leaving air and or water temperature at design conditions.
1.5.4.6 Performance characteristics/efficiency.
1.5.4.7 Dimensional drawing showing locations of all field connections including piping,
control, power and sheet metal as well as equipment configuration.
1.5.4.8 Electrical schematics indicating any control interlocks.
D&A#07103 15010-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.5.4.9 Note any special tools required for equipment service.
1.5.5 Items Requiring Submittals:
1.5.5.1 15050: Basic Materials
1.5.5.1.1 Thermometers
1.5.5.1.2 Pressure Gauges
1.5.5.1.3 Pete’s Plugs
1.5.5.1.4 Pre-manufactured Sleeves
1.5.5.1.5 Pipe Identification
1.5.5.1.6 Test and Balancing Reports
1.5.5.2 15180: Insulation
1.5.5.2.1 Chilled Water
1.5.5.2.2 Domestic Hot and Cold Water
1.5.5.2.3 Ductwork
1.5.5.2.4 Heating Water
1.5.5.3 15400: Plumbing
1.5.5.3.1 Domestic Water Board of Health Sample Results
1.5.5.3.2 Lavatories (LAV)
1.5.5.3.3 Mop Sinks (MS)
1.5.5.3.4 Sewage Ejector (SE)
1.5.5.3.5 Sinks (SK)
1.5.5.3.6 Sump Pump (SP)
1.5.5.3.7 Urinals (UR)
1.5.5.3.8 Water Closets (WC)
1.5.5.3.9 Water Heater (WH)
1.5.5.4 15410: Drainage Products
1.5.5.4.1 Cleanouts (CO)
1.5.5.4.2 Floor Drains (FD), (TD)
1.5.5.5 15420: Plumbing Equipment and Devices
1.5.5.5.1 Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer (RPBP)
1.5.5.5.2 Thermal Expansion Tank (T)
1.5.5.5.3 Thermostatic Mixing Valves (TMV)
1.5.5.5.4 Water Hammer Arrester (WHA)
1.5.5.5.5 Thermostatic Mixing Valves (TMV)
1.5.5.6 15500: Fire Protection
1.5.5.6.1 Calculations
1.5.5.6.2 Fabrication Design
1.5.5.6.3 Pipe
1.5.5.6.4 Sprinkler Heads
D&A#07103 15010-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.5.5.6.5 Supervisory Devices
1.5.5.6.6 Valves
1.5.5.7 15700: Liquid Heat Transfer
1.5.5.7.1 Air Separators (AS)
1.5.5.7.2 Balance Valves
1.5.5.7.3 Boilers
1.5.5.7.4 Cabinet Unit Heaters (CUH)
1.5.5.7.5 Central Station Air Conditioner (AHU)
1.5.5.7.6 Chilled Water Pumps (CHWP)
1.5.5.7.7 Expansion Tanks (EXP)
1.5.5.7.8 Fan Coil Unit (FCU)
1.5.5.7.9 Finned Tube Radiation (FTR)
1.5.5.7.10 Heating Water Pumps (HWP)
1.5.5.7.11 Pressure Reducing Valves (PRV)
1.5.5.7.12 Propeller Unit Heaters (PUH)
1.5.5.7.13 Strainers
1.5.5.7.14 System Fill Valves
1.5.5.8 15800: Air Distribution
1.5.5.8.1 Exhaust Fans (EF)
1.5.5.8.2 Filters
1.5.5.8.3 Fire Dampers
1.5.5.8.4 Grilles, Registers and Diffusers
1.5.5.8.5 Sheet Metal Fabrication Drawings
1.5.5.8.6 Smoke/Fire Dampers
1.5.5.8.7 Variable Air Volume Boxes (VAV)
1.5.5.9 15975: Temperature Controls and Instrumentation
1.5.5.9.1 Control Cut Sheets
1.5.5.9.2 Control Damper Schedule
1.5.5.9.3 Control Panels
1.5.5.9.4 Control Schematics
1.5.5.9.5 Control Valve Schedule
1.5.5.9.6 Control Wiring Diagram
1.5.5.9.7 Sequence of Operation
1.5.5.9.8 Thermostats
1.5.5.10 Any "Products" in Sections 15050, 15060, 15180, 15400, 15700, 15800 and 15975
not otherwise listed herein.
1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS
1.6.1 Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing to Engineer a complete, accurate and neat
set of marked-up blueline drawings in accordance with Division 1. This set shall contain
all deviations between actual construction and Contract Drawings.
D&A#07103 15010-7 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.6.2 Contractor shall maintain a mark-up set of as-built drawings on the project site and shall
keep all drawings up-to-date as construction progresses. This marked-up set shall be
returned to Contractor, as many times as necessary, in order to obtain desired results.
1.6.3 Engineer's employees shall inspect Drawings regularly on project site for accuracy and
omissions. Pay request will not be approved if marked-up record drawings are not
onsite and up to date.
1.6.4 Refer to Division 1 “CONTRACT CLOSEOUT” for further instructions.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1.7.1 Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals including the following information for
equipment items:
1.7.1.1 Complete index identifying contents of manual. Also provide a comprehensive list of
manufacturers, suppliers, subcontractors, etc., with name of contact person,
address and phone number for each manufacturer, supplier and subcontractor.
1.7.1.2 Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,
performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and
exploded drawing of devices with names and part numbers of replacement parts.
1.7.1.3 Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown,
and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
1.7.1.4 Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
1.7.1.5 Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
1.7.1.6 Warranty letter from contractor stating general warranty and any extended warranty
items included in this contract.
1.7.1.7 Refer to Division 1 “Contract Closeout” for additional instructions.
1.8 DRAWINGS
1.8.1 Mechanical Drawings show general arrangement of all piping, equipment and
appurtenances. They shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and
work of other trades will permit. Mechanical work shall conform to requirements shown
on all Drawings. General and Structural Drawings shall take precedence over
Mechanical Drawings. Because of small scale of Mechanical Drawings, it is not possible
to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories, which may be required. Contractor shall
investigate structural and finish conditions affecting work and shall arrange his work
accordingly, providing such fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet
such conditions.
1.8.2 For purpose of clarity and legibility, Drawings are essentially diagrammatic, although
size and location of equipment and piping are drawn to scale wherever possible. Verify
Contract Document information at site.
D&A#07103 15010-8 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.8.3 Drawings indicate required sizes and points of termination of pipes and ducts and
suggested routes. It is not the intention of Drawings to indicate all necessary offsets.
Install work in manner to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom
and keep openings and passageways clear. Do not scale from Drawings.
1.8.4 In case of a conflict in construction documents, Contractor shall receive clarification,
prior to bidding, in the form of an addendum or include in his price, the greater amount
of work of the conflicts shown, i.e., if two pipe sizes are indicated for the same pipe, the
Contractor shall price the larger of the two pipes.
1.9 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
1.9.1 Provide all required labor, materials, equipment and Contractor's services necessary for
complete installation of systems required in full conformity with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction; and as indicated on Drawings and herein specified.
1.9.2 Finished job shall be functional and complete in every detail, including any and all such
items required for a complete system, whether or not these items are specified or shown
on drawings.
1.9.3 Any apparatus, material or work not shown on Contract Drawings but mentioned in the
Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or minor details not shown
but necessary to make the work complete in all respects and ready for operation, even if
not particularly specified, shall be provided without additional expense to the Owner.
1.9.4 Special attention shall be given to accessibility of working parts and controlling parts.
Adjustable parts shall be within easy reach. Removable parts shall have space for
removal.
1.9.5 Each Contractor shall acquaint himself with details of all work to be performed by other
trades and take necessary steps to integrate and coordinate his work with other trades.
1.9.6 It is assumed the Mechanical Contractor is familiar with standard first class installation
procedures. Therefore, these Specifications do not attempt to include every detail or
operation necessary for the complete installation.
1.9.7 It should be particularly noted that the terms "furnish" and "provide" are interchangeable
and that each of these terms means to provide, install and connect, unless otherwise
stated.
1.9.8 Whenever tables or schedules show quantities of materials, they shall not be used as a
guide to Contractor. Each Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all materials
noted on Drawings and as specified.
1.9.9 Craftsman trained in each respective trade shall install work in that trade.
1.10 COORDINATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS
1.10.1 Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall study all Drawings applicable to this work so
complete coordination between trades will be effected. Special attention shall be given
D&A#07103 15010-9 St. Christopher Church Phase III
to points where ducts cross other ducts or piping, where lights fit into ceilings and where
pipe, ducts and conduit pass through walls and columns.
1.10.2 It is responsibility of each Contractor and Subcontractor to leave necessary room for
other trades. No extra compensation will be allowed to cover cost of removing piping,
conduit, ducts or equipment found encroaching on space required by others.
1.11 ASSIGNMENT OF MISCELLANEOUS WORK
1.11.1 Lintels required by Mechanical Contractor shall be furnished by Mechanical Contractor.
Contractor shall notify General Contractor of correct size and locations for all lintels prior
to wall construction.
1.11.2 Painting: Mechanical Contractor will provide prime painting on all ferrous metals such
as supporting steel or hangers for mechanical piping and equipment. Piping itself is not
to be primed. Any finish painting required, including painting of all mechanical items
exposed to outside environment will be painted by General Contractor.
1.11.3 Roof Openings: required by Mechanical Contractor shall be cut by Mechanical
Contractor. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for correct size and location of same.
1.11.4 Roof Curbs and Bases: for roof mounted mechanical equipment shall be furnished by
Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.5 Flashing: for roof curbs and bases shall be furnished by Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.6 Counter flashing for roof curbs and bases shall be furnished by General Contractor.
1.11.7 Louvers: furnished by General Contractor. Size and location verified by General
Contractor.
1.11.8 Pads and Foundations: for mechanical equipment shall be formed and poured by
Mechanical Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall verify pad sizes, locations and
all anchoring devices.
1.11.9 Platforms and Supporting Stands: for mechanical equipment shall be furnished by
Mechanical Contractor unless noted otherwise.
1.11.10 Penetrations: holes required for piping or ductwork shall be cut in field at expense of
Mechanical Contractor. Engineer shall give approval prior to any cutting.
1.11.11 Penetrations through Structure: holes required for piping or ductwork shall be cut as
walls are erected at the expense of the Mechanical Contractor unless indicated by
others as detailed on structural drawings. Mechanical Contractor to coordinate location
and size of all openings prior to building erection or he will assume all costs for
providing openings. Engineer shall give approval prior to cutting.
1.11.12 Excavating and Backfilling: for mechanical work shall be by Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.13 Outside Downspouts: shall be by General Contractor. Downspouts shoe shall be by
General Contractor.
D&A#07103 15010-10 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.11.14 Chemical Treatment of closed loop systems by Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.15 Caulking of all plumbing fixtures shall be by Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.16 All fire stopping of mechanical penetrations by Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.17 All caulking of mechanical penetrations through interior partitions by Mechanical
Contractor. All sleeve seals for mechanical penetrations through exterior below grade
penetrations by Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.18 Dust Protection:
1.11.18.1 Temporary partitions or barriers required to protect existing building or facilities
specifically in areas requiring primarily mechanical work; i.e., cross country pipe,
etc., shall be provided by Mechanical Contractor. Mechanical Contractor shall
coordinate necessity and location of such protection with Owner.
1.11.18.2 Temporary filters for protection of new and existing ductwork and equipment as
required during construction is to be by the Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.19 Pipe identification shall be by Mechanical Contractor as specified in Section 15050.
1.11.20 Temporary Use of Equipment: should it become necessary or desirable to operate any
equipment before final acceptance, Owner shall be allowed to do so, ONLY after proper
adjustments and trial operation by Contractor specified. Mechanical Contractor shall be
responsible for instructing Owner, or his Representative, as to proper operation and
care of equipment so used. If equipment is used prior to final acceptance of job, date of
first usage will begin warrantee period.
1.11.21 All electrical control wiring between mechanical equipment (i.e., air cooled chiller and
condensing unit, etc.) shall be by Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.22 Cutting and Patching: Mechanical Contractor shall cut and patch finished areas as
required by Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.23 Wall Sleeves in new construction for Mechanical systems shall be provided by the
Mechanical Contractor and coordinated by Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.24 Wall Sleeves in existing construction shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor.
1.11.25 Ceiling and Wall Access Panels: shall be furnished by Mechanical Contractor and
installed by General Contractor.
1.12 MATERIAL STORAGE
1.12.1 Provide suitable protection from weather and vandalism for all materials and equipment
to be installed. Storage shall be dry, clean and safe. Any materials or equipment
damaged, deteriorated, rusted or defaced due to improper storage shall be fully
repaired, refinished or replaced, as directed by Engineer at no additional cost.
2 PRODUCT AND MATERIAL APPROVAL
D&A#07103 15010-11 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1 A Specification followed by one or more manufacturers is limited to those manufacturers.
Names of other manufacturers may be submitted for approval, to the Engineer, a minimum
of ten calendar days prior to receiving bids. Approval will be issued by Addendum if
approval is granted.
2.2 The mechanical equipment shall be new, listed by UL and shall confirm to NEMA
requirements.
2.3 If changes in pipe, ductwork, conduit, wiring, structural support and ceiling space, etc. are
required as a result of the contractor’s decision to purchase equipment with a different
arrangement than shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for including
all associated costs in their bid. Note that manufacturers listed as equals may have
physical characteristics, which require more coordination, piping, wiring, and/or general
construction changes. The Mechanical Contractor will be responsible for all additional costs
associated with the installation of this equipment.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION AND TREATMENT OF PROPERTY
3.1.1 Repair and replace all property damaged in installation of underground lines to meet
approval of Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.1.2 Repair streets, which are part of State Highway System to satisfaction of State Highway
Department.
3.1.3 Replace base and wearing surfaces of streets with same kind and thickness of material
as existing. Replace brick, concrete and asphalt surface to width 6" wider than
disturbed area. Replace entire surface if more than 30% has been disturbed.
3.1.4 Replace sidewalks, curbs, gutters, driveways, with same kind and thickness of material.
Replace entire section of concrete walks or driveways.
3.1.5 Re-grade and replant lawn areas.
3.1.6 Protect existing utilities. Cap existing utilities that are abandoned.
3.1.7 All property in existing facilities that is damaged/removed, by contractor operations shall
be repaired/replaced to previous operating and appearance condition.
3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL WIRING
3.2.1 All electrical work shall be done in accordance with the latest edition of the National
Electric Code.
3.2.2 All above ground wiring shall be installed in metallic conduit with a minimum conduit size
of ¾ inch. All wiring shall be concealed, except in equipment rooms, crawl spaces,
tunnels and mechanical or electrical closets. Conduit shall be fastened securely at
regular intervals and shall be run parallel to the building lines.
3.2.3 At Contractor’s option, all wiring above accessible lay-in ceiling may be run with plenum
rated cable, as permitted by code, properly supported from the building structure. If this
D&A#07103 15010-12 St. Christopher Church Phase III
option is selected, all cables in inaccessible areas, such as walls, floors, and
inaccessible ceilings and all wiring in Mechanical Equipment areas shall be in conduit.
3.2.4 Running bare wire above bar joist in roof/floor metal deck flutes is not permitted. Wire to
be run above bottom chord of truss and fastened to structure with wire ties at maximum
4’ o.c.
3.2.5 All flexible conduit shall not exceed 2 foot.
3.2.6 All below ground wiring shall be installed in rigid conduit with minimum size of ¾”.
Conduit system shall be sealed watertight.
3.2.7 Provide all wire, conduit, fittings, miscellaneous materials and labor as required for
mounting and connecting the electrical control devices furnished in this contract
3.2.8 All wiring shall be continuous from point to point. No splicing between terminations
allowed.
3.2.9 In the event that a Supplier of equipment requires a larger starter, disconnect wiring
conduit, etc. than those indicated in Contract Documents, he shall reimburse Contractor
supplying these items for the difference.
3.2.10 Connections and wiring diagrams shown on Drawings or described in Specifications are
typical and for bidding purposes only. Detailed diagrams and instructions shall be
provided by Contractor supplying the equipment. If connections are different from those
shown on Drawings, Mechanical Contractor shall reimburse Electrical Contractor for
those differences.
3.2.11 Additional relays switches, contactors, etc. which may be required for control purposes
in addition to those specified and indicated on Drawings shall be provided by
Mechanical Contractor.
3.2.12 In the event that several pieces of mechanical equipment from different Suppliers are
combined in one system, Mechanical Contractor shall furnish complete wiring and
control diagrams to enable Electrical Contractor to make proper connections. Diagrams
shall be submitted to Engineer for review, prior to actual wiring.
3.2.13 Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to Electrical Contractor written notice of approval
and acceptance for all control wiring installed for mechanical systems by Electrical
Contractor. Such approval shall be given within 30 days of completion of all such
control wiring. Two copies of letter shall be sent to Engineer.
3.3 ATTACHING TO BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
3.3.1 Equipment and pipe supports shall be attached to structural members (beams, joists,
etc.) rather than to floor or roof slabs. Support from structural members shall be in
accordance with manufacturer recommendation of structural member and/or approved
by Structural Engineer.
3.3.2 Where piping is suspended from new concrete construction, furnish, locate and install
black steel channel type concrete inserts before concrete is placed. Fasten inserts to
D&A#07103 15010-13 St. Christopher Church Phase III
forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. Inserts shall
provide for horizontal and vertical adjustments.
3.3.3 Where piping is suspended from existing concrete or masonry construction, use
expansion shields to attach pipe supports to construction.
3.3.3.1 Anchors shall be installed horizontally into the sides (vertical portion) of concrete
beams at a minimum of 5” from the bottom of the beam.
3.3.3.2 When support location is between concrete beams, then unistrut shall be attached
to sides of concrete beams and span continuously between the concrete beams.
Unistrut shall be sized per manufacturer’s data to carry load.
3.3.3.3 Contractor must receive prior approval before attaching to the underside of concrete
slabs or concrete beams.
3.3.3.4 Install all anchors according to manufacturers written instructions. Expansion shield
bolt diameter shall be same size as support rod diameter hereinafter specified. If, in
the opinion of the Owner/Engineer, existing structure is questionable, an angle will
be required with two expansion shields to carry each vertical support rod.
Expansion shields shall be combined friction and keying hold type wedge anchor
like HILTI Red Head or approved equal.
3.3.4 Where piping is suspended from structural steel building framing or supporting
members, furnish and install beam clamps for attaching piping support device to building
member.
3.3.5 Obtain approval from Engineer before cutting or welding to structural member or before
hanging heavy equipment.
3.3.6 Support piping and ductwork from structure so that equipment connections are not being
used for support.
3.4 ROUGH-IN
3.4.1 Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of
the actual equipment to be installed.
3.4.2 Refer to shop drawings for equipment rough-in requirements.
3.5 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
3.5.1 General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical
systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
3.5.1.1 All equipment must be installed such that maintenance and service may be properly
accomplished. If necessary, the Owner, at their option, may require the contractor
to demonstrate the service on any piece of equipment to determine sufficient service
space exists. If the service space is not adequate, the equipment shall be relocated
at no additional cost to the Owner such that sufficient service space is achieved.
D&A#07103 15010-14 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.5.1.2 Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other
building components.
3.5.1.3 Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3.5.1.4 Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
3.5.1.5 Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
3.5.1.6 Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment
requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
3.5.1.7 Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, material,
and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
3.5.1.8 Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required
connection for each service.
3.5.1.9 Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with engineer reviewed
submittal data. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents,
recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where
coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict
to the Architect/Engineer.
3.5.1.10 Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components.
3.5.1.11 Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.
3.5.1.12 Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at specified slope.
3.5.1.13 Contractor shall field verify all locations, sizes and connection points to existing
piping, ductwork and systems as shown on the Drawings. All shutdowns required to
connect to existing systems shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner.
Contractor shall prefabricate and install new materials as much as possible to keep
shutdown duration to a minimum.
3.5.1.14 All pipe, duct and mechanical equipment shall be installed as high above floor (close
to structure) as possible. When any pipe, duct or mechanical piece of equipment is
installed lower than 7'-0" above finished floor, foam type insulation with black and
yellow caution marker tape shall be installed on bottom leading edges.
D&A#07103 15010-15 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.5.1.15 Contractor shall field verify all locations, sizes and connection points to existing
piping, ductwork and systems as shown on the drawings. Contact Engineer with
any discrepancies.
3.5.1.16 All equipment must be installed such that maintenance and service may be properly
accomplished. If necessary, the Owner, at their option, may require the contractor
to demonstrate the service on any piece of equipment to determine sufficient service
space exists. If the service space is not adequate, the equipment shall be relocated
at no additional cost to the Owner such that sufficient service space is achieved.
3.5.2 Platforms and Supporting Stands
3.5.2.1 Each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above
floor level shall be provided with suitable structural support, platform or carrier, in
accordance with best recognized practice.
3.5.2.2 Contractors shall exercise extreme care that structural members of building are not
overloaded by such equipment. In all cases, details of such hangers, platforms and
supports, together with total weights of mounted equipment, shall be approved by
Engineer.
3.5.3 Drive Guards:
3.5.3.1 All belt-driven equipment shall have belt guards with provisional slot for tachometer
reading access at shaft. All rotating equipment and drives shall have safety guards.
3.6 CLEANING AND TOUCH UP
3.6.1 All mechanical equipment, cabinets, control panels and other enclosures shall be
cleaned and have paint touched up as necessary to duplicate factory finished
appearance. Touch up paint shall exactly match color, composition and quality of
factory applied finish.
3.6.2 Equipment furnished with factory applied finish shall be protected from damage by the
installing Contractor. Any damaged surface shall be repaired or replaced by the
installing Contractor to match original finish or shall be replaced before final acceptance.
3.7 GENERAL COMPLETION, STARTUP
3.7.1 Work Included: furnish materials and labor required to perform startup of equipment
and systems installed on project and provide operating instructions to Owner.
3.7.2 It is Mechanical Contractors’ responsibility to conduct an owner orientation meeting
which will review all systems, their operation and operation of all equipment.
3.7.3 General Requirements:
D&A#07103 15010-16 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.7.3.1 Inspect bearings for cleanliness and alignment and remove any foreign materials
found. Grease as necessary and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Replace bearings that run rough or noisy.
3.7.3.2 Adjust tension in V-belt drives, adjust vari-pitch sheaves and drives for proper
equipment speed. Change belts and sheaves if necessary to obtain proper
equipment speed; remove any foreign materials from sheaves or belts before
starting operations; adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and v-belts. Construe
proper speed as that which produces intended performance. Change sheaves so
that design CFM is achieved when VFD is at 100%. Slowing VFD to meet maximum
design CFM is not acceptable.
3.7.3.3 Tighten flanges and packing glands after system has been placed in operation.
Replace gaskets in flanges that show any signs of leakage after tightening.
3.7.3.4 Inspect screwed joints for leakage and remake each joint that appears to be faulty.
Do not wait for rust to form. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound and
remake joint.
3.7.3.5 Adjust pipe hangers and supports for correct pitch and alignment.
3.7.3.6 Flush systems and clean all strainers. After 30 days of operation clean strainers
again.
3.7.3.7 Provide such continuing adjustment services as is necessary to insure proper
functioning of all mechanical systems after building occupancy and during guarantee
period.
3.7.4 Air Filters
3.7.4.1 Provide a total of three (3) sets of air filters for each piece of equipment.
3.7.4.2 Never operate equipment without air filters. Provide construction set of air filters for
equipment operation prior to substantial completion.
3.7.4.3 Replace construction air filters in each and every piece of equipment within 2 weeks
after substantial completion. Provide one additional set of air filters to Owner.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15050-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and all sections of Division 15 apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 Provide equipment, materials, labor and services common to more than one section of
Division 15. The work generally includes, but is not limited to the following:
1.2.1.1 Testing and Balancing
1.2.1.2 Vibration Isolators
1.2.1.3 Electric Motors
1.2.1.4 Pressure Gauges
1.2.1.5 Thermometers
1.2.1.6 Sleeves
1.2.1.7 Escutcheons
1.2.1.8 Firestopping
1.2.1.9 Pipe Identification
1.2.1.10 Equipment Identification
1.2.1.11 Painting
1.2.1.12 House Keeping Pads
1.2.1.13 Excavating and Backfilling
1.2.1.14 (ADD'L ITEMS)
1.3 TESTING AND BALANCING
1.3.1 Work Included:
1.3.1.1 Provide equipment, material, labor and services for complete balancing of systems,
as shown on Drawings and as specified herein.
1.3.1.2 Balance every system and piece of equipment installed under Mechanical Contract.
They shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.3.1.2.1 Heating Water System
1.3.1.2.2 Exhaust Systems
1.3.1.2.3 Air Distribution Systems
1.3.1.2.4 Temperature Control System
1.3.1.2.5 Chilled Water Cooling System
D&A#07103 15050-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.3.2 Engage the services of an independent Balance and Testing Contractor approved by
the Architect/Engineer, which specializes in the balance testing and adjusting of heating,
ventilating and air conditioning systems, test heating and chilled water flow, air moving
equipment and air distribution or exhausting systems as herein specified.
1.3.3 Final Report
1.3.3.1 Forms shall be 8-1/2" x 11" paper for looseleaf binding, with blanks for listing of the
required test ratings and for certification of report.
1.3.3.2 Upon completion, all information shall be neatly typed and five copies submitted to
the Architect/Engineer with accompanying schematic diagrams of systems tested.
1.3.3.3 All test reports shall be assembled, indexed and submitted in vinyl covered loose
leaf notebooks with project name and Balancing Contractor's name permanently
printed thereon.
1.3.4 Air System
1.3.4.1 Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within +10% of design
requirements.
1.3.4.2 Read and adjust the minimum and/or maximum settings on all variable air volume
(VAV) boxes.
1.3.5 Water Systems - perform the following minimum water system test and balance.
1.3.5.1 Set water pumps to proper gallons per minute delivery.
1.3.5.2 Adjust water flow through equipment to design flow.
1.3.5.3 Check leaving water temperatures and return water temperatures. Reset to correct
design temperatures.
1.3.5.4 Check water temperatures at inlet side of coils. Note rise or drop of temperatures
from source.
1.3.6 Record Data
1.3.6.1 Air Systems - record the following minimum data.
1.3.6.1.1 CFM delivery and RPM of blowers and fans
1.3.6.1.2 Static pressure at inlet and outlet of blowers and fans
1.3.6.1.3 All equipment nameplate data
1.3.6.1.4 Actual running current and voltage of fan motors
1.3.6.1.5 CFM delivery or exhaust at each diffuser, register or grille
D&A#07103 15050-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.3.6.2 Water Systems - record the following minimum data at each heating and cooling
element.
1.3.6.2.1 Inlet water temperature
1.3.6.2.2 Leaving water temperature
1.3.6.2.3 Pressure drop of each coil
1.3.6.2.4 Pressure drop across bypass valve
1.3.6.2.5 Pump operating suction and discharge pressures and final Total Dynamic Head
(TDH)
1.3.6.2.6 List mechanical specifications of pumps. Check and record starter size, heater
sizes, etc.
1.3.6.2.7 Rated and actual running amperage of pump motor
1.3.6.2.8 Water balance device readings and/or settings
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
2.1.1 General: mount equipment on isolators as noted in Schedule of Usage and as detailed
on Drawings. Isolators shall be furnished by manufacturer of isolators. They shall be
engineered for specific piece of equipment.
2.1.1.1 Manufacturers:
2.1.1.1.1 Mason Industries, Inc.
2.1.1.1.2 Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
2.1.2 Types of Isolators
2.1.2.1 Neoprene Pad: cross ribbed pad 3/8" thick.
2.1.2.2 Cork Rib Pad: 1" thick laminated pad consisting of cork bonded between 2 layers of
ribbed neoprene. Vibration Mountings Cork Rib Pad.
2.1.2.3 Rubber in Shear Mounting: molded neoprene with steel base plate. Single or
double deflection required with deflections of 1/4" and 1/2" respectively.
2.1.2.4 Steel Spring Mounting: steel housing containing steel springs with top plate,
leveling bolt, snubber, fastening slots and neoprene pad bonded to bottom.
2.1.2.5 Rubber in Shear Hanger: neoprene single or double deflection as required.
2.1.2.6 Spring Type Hangers: deflection to 2".
2.1.2.7 Combination Spring and Rubber in Shear Hangers: deflection to 2-1/2".
D&A#07103 15050-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.3 Submittals shall show frequency, required efficiency and designed deflection.
2.1.4 All vibration isolators shall be selected at 95% efficiency.
2.1.5 Schedule of Usage
2.1.5.1 Central Station Air Conditioners: Internally Spring Isolated.
2.1.5.2 Water Circulating Pumps
Neoprene pad
2.2 ELECTRIC MOTORS
2.2.1 Service:
2.2.1.1 Variable Speed Motors: PREMIUM-EFFICIENCY, NEMA Design B, drive rated with
Class F insulation, nameplated and designed for electrical characteristics noted on
Drawings and in accordance with NEMA and IEEE Standards. All end plates shall
be cast iron. Aluminum end plates are not acceptable.
2.2.1.1.1 Variable speed motors shall include installation of a maintenance free,
circumferential, conductive micro fiber shaft grounding brush to divert shaft
currents to ground. Aegis model SGR or approved equal.
2.2.2 General: motor shall be at least HP specified.
2.2.3 Bearings: ball, sleeve or roller bearings with dustproof rings.
2.2.4 Temperature Rise: continuous rating at 104oF (40oC) above ambient.
2.2.5 Base: cast iron or steel with adjustable slide rail.
2.2.6 Rating: motors specified for voltage of 220 to 240 volts and 440 to 480 volts shall have
230/460 rating. Motors specified for voltage of 208 volts shall be designed and
nameplated for 200 volts.
2.2.7 Enclosures
2.2.7.1 Hazardous Locations
2.2.7.1.1 Explosive Liquid Vapor and Gasses: Class I Explosion Proof
2.2.7.1.2 Combustible Dust (i.e., Coal, grain flower:): Class II - Dust Ignition Resistant
2.2.7.2 Outside: Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC)
2.2.7.3 All others: Open Drip-Proof (ODP) unless noted otherwise with a specific piece of
equipment.
D&A#07103 15050-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.2.8 Efficiency: 1800 RPM motors shall be a minimum guaranteed efficiency at full load as
listed below.
ODP TEFC
HP (MINIMUM) (MINIMUM)
3 86.5 87.5
5 87.5 87.5
7.5 88.5 89.5
10 89.5 89.5
2.3 PRESSURE GAUGES
2.3.1 Accuracy ASME/ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A (1%) 4 1/2" only.
2.3.2 2-1/2" minimum diameter dial, bronze bourdon tube and brass case. Ashcroft 1009G,
H.O. Trerice or approved equal.
2.3.3 4-1/2" minimum diameter dial, stainless steel bourdon tube, lower connection.
2.3.3.1 Manufacturers:
2.3.3.1.1 Ashcroft 1379S
2.3.3.1.2 Hellicoid 440
2.3.3.1.3 U.S. Gauge 1600
2.3.3.1.4 Duro United Series #10
2.3.3.1.5 Weksler 300 Series
2.3.3.1.6 Trerice No. 4500 Series
2.4 THERMOMETERS (D&A STANDARD)
2.4.1 Provide and install light powered digital thermometers to meet the following criteria.
2.4.1.1 Display: 3/8" LCD digits
2.4.1.2 Accuracy: 1%
2.4.1.3 Range: -40/300oF
2.4.1.4 Humidity: Operational in ambient conditions up to 100% RH.
2.4.1.5 Case: High impact
2.4.1.6 Stem length to fit separable sockets. Reference separable sockets for required
length.
2.4.1.7 Adjustable joint mounting so head can swivel and rotate for best visibility.
2.4.1.8 Heads shall be replaceable without any loss of water from system.
2.4.2 Manufacturers:
2.4.2.1 Weiss Vari-angle digital thermometer
2.4.2.2 Trend Instruments Inc.
D&A#07103 15050-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.4.2.3 Winters 9IT
2.5 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
2.5.1 Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
fixed thermometer stem.
2.5.1.1 Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.
2.5.1.2 Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
2.5.1.3 Material: Steel, for use in steel piping.
2.5.1.4 Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches (50 mm), but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets in piping not insulated.
2.5.1.5 Insertion Length: To extend to a minimum of 1/3 (one-third) of diameter of pipe.
2.6 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS (PETE'S PLUGS)
2.6.1 Plug shall be brass or stainless steel arranged for a 1/8" diameter shaft to enter into the
plug. The plug shall be rated for 350oF for water and 200oF for gases. The plug shall
be equipped with a pipe cap. The plug system shall be rated for zero leakage to 250
PSIG.
2.6.2 Manufacturer: Sisco or approved equal.
2.7 SLEEVES
2.7.1 Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube
closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2.7.2 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends.
2.7.3 Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe” equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7.4 Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
2.7.5 Sleeves shall be in accordance with following schedule unless otherwise specified.
PIPE
SIZE UNINSUL. 1" INSUL. 1-1/2" INSUL. 2" INSUL.
1" 2 4 6 6
1-1/2" 3 4 6 8
2" 3 6 8 8
3" 4 6 8 10
4" 6 8 10 10
6" 8 10 12 12
8" 10 12 12 14
D&A#07103 15050-7 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.8 FIRESTOP SEALANTS AND CAULKS
2.8.1 Penetration sealant:
2.8.1.1 3M Brand "Moldable Putty Pads: and "Moldable Putty Stix"
2.8.1.2 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk, Putty or Penetrating Sealing Systems
2.8.1.3 Dow Corning "Fire Stop Foam" and "Fire Stop Sealant" systems
2.8.1.4 Insta-Foam Products, Inc. "Insta-Fire Seal Silicone RTV Foam"
2.8.1.5 Standard Oil Engineering Materials Company, "Fyre Putty"
2.8.2 Intumescent Sealant:
2.8.2.1 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" caulk or putty, FS-195 Wrap Strip and CS-195 Composite
Sheet.
2.8.2.2 Dow Corning "Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap Strip"
2.8.2.3 Fox Couplings, Inc. "The Fox Cast-in-Place Coupling"
2.8.2.4 For plastic pipe penetrations up to 4" diameter: use 3M pre-manufactured fire barrier
plastic pipe devices or equal.
2.8.2.5 For plastic pipe penetrations larger than 4" diameter: use 3M fire barrier RC-1
restricting collar with FS-195+ wrap/strip or equal.
2.8.3 Performance Characteristics: firestopping materials shall conform to both Flame(F) and
Temperature(T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814
or UL 1479 fire tests.
2.8.3.1 F Rating shall be a minimum of one hour but not less than the fire resistance rating
of the assembly being penetrated.
2.8.3.2 Conduct the fire test with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01" of water
column.
2.8.4 Quality Assurance: installer qualifications - firm specializing in firestopping installation
with not less than two years of experience or trained and approved by firestopping
manufacturer.
2.9 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
2.9.1 Description: Modular design with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill
annular space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
2.9.2 Manufacturers: Thunderline/Link-Seal; Calpico, Inc.; MetraFlex Co.
D&A#07103 15050-8 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.10 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
2.10.1 Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless
otherwise indicated. Per ASTM C 920 like Dow Corning 995 GE Silicones, Tremco
Spectrum 1 or equal.
2.10.2 Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing
complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of
remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26oF (minus 32oC). Provide products
with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control
sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. Verify
compatibility with Elastomeric Joint Sealant Manufacturer prior to use.
2.10.3 Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
2.10.4 Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any
way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
2.11 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
2.11.1 Labeling shall consist of the following:
2.11.1.1 Pipe identification to comply with ASME A13.1.
2.11.1.2 Identification of medium in pipe using all uppercase letters.
2.11.1.3 Arrow indicating direction of flow.
2.11.1.4 Color-coded band to conform to color code hereinafter specified.
2.11.1.4.1 For pipe diameter of 6" or less (including insulation):
PIPE DIA. SIZE OF LETTERS LENGTH OF COLOR FIELD
(Use only if banding)
3/4" - 1 3/8" 1/2" 8"
1 1/2" - 2 3/8" 3/4" 8"
2 1/2" - 6" 1 1/4" 12"
2.12 PLASTIC LAMINATE SIGNS FOR EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
2.12.1 ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock;
Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore.
2.12.1.1 Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match
equipment identification.
2.12.1.2 Punch for mechanical fastening.
D&A#07103 15050-9 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.12.1.3 Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2.12.1.4 Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
2.12.1.5 Nomenclature: Name and plan number as shown on Equipment Schedules and on
Drawings or as directed by the Owner.
2.12.1.6 Size: Approximate 2 1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers,
and valves; and 4 1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
2.13 GROUT
2.13.1 Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
2.13.1.1 Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2.13.1.2 Design Mix: 5000-psig (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
2.13.1.3 Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.14 CONCRETE
2.14.1 Concrete shall be 1 part Portland cement, 2 parts sand and 4 parts gravel or broken
stone that will pass through a 1" diameter hole. Clean sharp sand, washed gravel and
Portland cement, Atlas, Alpha, LoneStar, Universal or approved equal, shall be
thoroughly mixed in a dry condition until color of mixture is uniform. This mixture shall
be uniformly spread and gravel evenly distributed thereon, then wet and thoroughly
mixed to a consistency that will need no tamping but can be easily faced for spading.
Hand mixed concrete shall be prepared upon substantially constructed, tight bottom
platforms and shall be mixed in batches not to exceed 1 cubic yard per batch. If
concrete is machine-mixed, it shall not be mixed until same can be immediately placed.
No concrete which has taken initial set shall be used.
2.15 CEILING AND WALL ACCESS PANELS
2.15.1 Plastered Wall or Ceiling: 24" x 12" unless otherwise noted. Constructed to receive
plaster to match adjacent finish. Milcor Style B.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PRESSURE GAUGES
3.1.1 Connection in Piping: provide spare pressure snubbers and install ahead of each
gauge to minimize gauge needle pulsations as directed by Engineer. Install 1/2" ball
valve to isolate each gauge. Mount gauges for maximum visibility from floor.
3.1.2 Where gauges are installed across pumps to measure differential pressure, install two
(2) 1/2” ball valves, one in pipe from pump suction and one in pipe from pump
discharge.
D&A#07103 15050-10 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.3 Install siphons on all steam gauges: brass or steel.
3.1.4 Scale Ranges
3.1.4.1 Hot Water Heating: 0-160 psig
3.1.4.2 Domestic Water: 0-150 psig
3.1.4.3 Chilled Water: 0-160 psig
3.2 THERMOMETERS
3.2.1 Connection in piping
3.2.1.1 Mount sockets in vertical up position to facilitate their being filled.
3.2.1.2 Mount and adjust thermometers so they may be read standing on floor without using
ladder or straining back.
3.2.2 Scale Ranges
3.2.2.1 Chilled and Condenser Water: 0-120oF
3.2.2.2 Hot Water Heating: 30-240oF
3.2.2.3 Domestic Cold Water: 0-130oF
3.2.2.4 Domestic Hot Water: 30-240oF
3.3 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS (PETE’S PLUGS)
3.3.1 Install Pete’s Plugs at each and every piece of hydronic equipment including coils, heat
exchangers and pumps and install where shown on Drawings.
3.3.2 Install Pete’s Plugs in 1/4" plugged bosses at pump suction and pump discharge
flanges.
3.3.3 Always install Pete’s Plugs on equipment side of balance valves to measure true
differential pressure across equipment, and not across balance valve.
3.4 ESCUTCHEONS
3.4.1 Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling and floor plates; deep-pattern if type required
to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
3.4.1.1 ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
3.4.1.2 OD: Completely cover opening and sleeve.
3.4.2 Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw.
3.4.2.1 Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
D&A#07103 15050-11 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.4.3 Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set screw.
3.4.3.1 Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
3.4.4 Install pipe escutcheons for exposed pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls,
wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
3.4.4.1 Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished
chrome-plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
3.4.4.2 Un-insulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with chrome-
plated finish and set screw.
3.4.4.3 Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips,
and chrome-plated finish.
3.5 SLEEVES / PENETRATIONS
3.5.1 Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes through poured in place concrete walls.
3.5.2 Install sleeves for pipes passing through masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions and
concrete floor slabs.
3.5.3 Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces when penetrating walls.
3.5.4 Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2
inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor
slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
3.5.5 Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. Core drilling of poured in
place concrete walls is acceptable.
3.5.6 Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
3.5.6.1 Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inch NPS (DN150).
3.5.6.2 Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inch NPS (DN150) and larger, penetrating
gypsum-board partitions.
3.5.6.3 Cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter and larger.
3.5.6.4 Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
3.5.7 When sleeve is installed in existing floor or masonry wall, seal space between sleeve
and wall with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
3.5.8 Above Grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants.
D&A#07103 15050-12 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.5.9 Below Grade Exterior-Wall, Floors of Mechanical Spaces or other wet areas Pipe
Penetrations: Seal penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size for 1-inch
(25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and opening for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
3.5.9.1 Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
3.5.10 Fire-Barrier Penetrations:
3.5.10.1 Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire sealants and caulks.
3.5.10.2 This assembly must maintain a watertight seal between floor or wall and pipe when
used on exterior walls, or floors of wet areas. Also use mechanical link seals in
these cases.
3.5.10.3 Use intumescent sealant for applications where combustible penetrants are involved
(i.e., insulated or plastic pipe).
3.5.10.4 Install in all penetrations where required by code.
3.5.11 Sealant Application
3.5.11.1 Install sealants around all piping penetrations.
3.5.11.2 Comply with sealant manufacturer’s written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
3.5.11.3 Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for
use of sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
3.5.11.4 Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C
919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials,
applications, and conditions indicated.
3.5.11.5 Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during applications and
at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed
sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
3.5.11.5.1 Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
3.5.11.5.2 Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3.5.11.6 Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
3.5.11.6.1 Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
3.5.11.6.2 Completely fill recess between pipe and opening.
D&A#07103 15050-13 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.5.11.6.3 Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
3.5.11.6.4 Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
3.5.11.6.5 Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work
progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by
manufacturers of joint sealants and of product in which joints occur.
3.6 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
3.6.1 Install Pipe Identification on each system. Include pipe service as abbreviated on
Drawings i.e. CHWS, CHWR, etc. and arrows showing normal direction of flow.
3.6.1.1 Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required
for hot, un-insulated piping.
3.6.1.2 Locate pipe identification as follows:
3.6.1.2.1 Exposed piping in unfinished spaces, machine rooms, and accessible
maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, above lay-in ceilings
and exterior non-concealed locations.
3.6.1.2.2 Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark
each pipe at branch, if flow pattern or service is not obvious.
3.6.1.2.3 Adjacent to penetrations where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or
enter non-accessible enclosures.
3.6.1.2.4 At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
3.6.1.2.5 At all major equipment and other points of origination and termination.
3.6.1.2.6 Spaced at maximum of 50-foot (15-m) intervals along each run. Reduce
intervals to 25 feet (7.5 m) in congested areas of piping and equipment and in
equipment rooms.
3.6.2 In all cases, Fire Protection piping shall be painted in its entirety in all exposed areas by
General Contractor.
3.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
3.7.1 Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each scheduled piece of mechanical
equipment.
3.7.1.1 Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm- high lettering for name of unit if viewing
distance is less than 24 inches (610 mm, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm- high lettering for
distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal
lettering.
D&A#07103 15050-14 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.7.1.2 Text of Signs: Provide specific name of unit as identified on Equipment Schedule on
Drawings or as directed by the Owner. Inform user of operational requirements,
indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
operations.
3.7.1.3 Locate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished
construction.
3.8 PAINTING
3.8.1 Refer to Division 9 Section “Painting” for paint materials, surface preparation and
application of paint. Select this if there is a Division 9 “Painting” in specifications.
3.8.2 Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
3.8.3 Adhere strictly to paint manufacturer’s written instructions for application.
3.8.4 Damage and Touch-Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.8.5 Paint the following:
3.8.5.1 All exposed insulated and or un-insulated pipes, equipment, ductwork including
insulation, etc. in finished areas.
3.8.5.2 All exposed ventilation equipment and ductwork in finished areas.
3.8.5.3 All equipment located in boiler room or equipment spaces.
3.8.5.4 All exposed bare pipe.
3.8.5.5 All hangers, platforms, supports and miscellaneous steel.
3.8.5.6 All exterior galvanized iron steel surfaces, including cooling towers, rooftop units,
piping ventilators, intake cowls, wall frames, louvers, exhaust vents, boiler stack and
other miscellaneous surfaces.
3.8.5.7 All sheet metal pipe enclosures in finished spaces to be painted to match adjacent
surfaces.
3.8.5.8 Convector cabinets, fin pipe enclosures and cabinet unit heaters.
3.8.5.9 All supply, return and exhaust grilles painted to match adjoining surfaces.
3.8.5.10 All roof mounted ventilation equipment.
3.8.5.11 All access panels.
3.9 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
3.9.1 Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
D&A#07103 15050-15 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.9.2 Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”.
3.10 HOUSEKEEPING PADS
3.10.1 Install housekeeping pads below all equipment located in Mechanical Room.
3.10.2 Pads shall be constructed of poured-in-place concrete, Nominal 6" thick (form using
standard 2" x 6" lumber) with 1" chamfer on all horizontal edges.
3.10.3 Pads shall extend a minimum of 6" beyond equipment in all directions or as detailed on
the Drawings.
3.11 GROUTING
3.11.1 Install nonmetallic, nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces,
pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to
manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.11.2 Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
3.11.3 Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
3.11.4 Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
3.11.5 Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
3.11.6 Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
3.11.7 Place grout around anchors.
3.11.8 Cure placed grout according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.12 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
3.12.1 Properly support banks of excavation with safety sheet pile. Install barricades, fences,
guards, etc. as required for safety and by OSHA.
3.12.2 Provide adequate pumping equipment and keep excavation free of water.
3.12.3 Excavate pipe trenches to proper depth and slope as required for piping.
3.12.4 Pipes passing under or through footings shall be sleeved (minimum two pipe sizes
larger than pipe).
3.12.5 Pipes passing under or through corrosive fills shall have external coating to protect from
corrosion.
3.12.6 Support and protect underground piping so it remains in place without settling and
without damage during and from backfilling. Replace any piping so settled or damaged.
Pipe shall not be supported on blocks to grade.
D&A#07103 15050-16 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.12.7 Lay underground piping on 6" bed of sand. Sand to fill from trench bottom to 6" above
top of pipe. Carefully fill around pipe.
3.12.8 Backfill with clean earth, crushed rock, gravel or sand. Use only sand inside buildings.
Carefully fill around piping. Fill first two feet in 6" lifts and remainder in 12" lifts. Tamp
and puddle each layer.
3.12.9 Provide 6" wide marker tape buried directly underground above utility lines continuously
along length of pipe. Marker tape shall be a minimum of 12" above utility line. Marker
tape shall be a minimum of 6" wide.
3.12.10 Replace all surfaces with like, kind, i.e., grass, road, sidewalk, etc., or as specified
elsewhere.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15060-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15060
PIPE, VALVES AND FITTINGS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This section specifies piping, valves and fittings including piping support for all systems. These
systems include the following:
1.2.1.1 System Piping Schedule #1
Heating Water
Chilled Water
1.2.1.2 System Piping Schedule #11
Refrigeration
1.2.1.3 System Piping Schedule #13
Coil Condensate
1.2.1.4 System Piping Schedule #14
Sanitary Inside Building
Vent Inside Building
Storm Gravity Inside Building
1.2.1.5 System Piping Schedule #15
Sanitary Outside Building
Vent Outside Building
Storm Gravity Outside Building
1.2.1.6 System Piping Schedule #16
Sanitary Forced Main
Storm Forced Main
1.2.1.7 System Piping Schedule #17
Domestic Cold Water Aboveground
1.2.1.8 System Piping Schedule #18
Domestic Hot Water Below Ground
Domestic Cold Water Below Ground
1.2.1.9 System Piping Schedule #19
Fire Protection
1.2.1.10 System Piping Schedule #20
Gas Piping
D&A#07103 15060-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.2.2 All specialty valves for specific systems are listed in specification sections for those systems.
Specialty valves for specific systems can be found in the following sections:
1.2.2.1 Plumbing Specialty Valves – 15400 “Plumbing”
1.2.2.2 Fire Protection Specialty Valves – 15500 “Fire Protection”
1.2.2.3 Refrigeration Specialty Valves – 15650
1.2.2.4 Hydronic Specialty Valves – 15700 “Heat Transfer”
1.2.2.5 Control Valves – 15975 “Temperature Controls”
1.2.3 Related sections include the following:
1.2.3.1 15010 General Provisions
1.2.3.2 15050 Basic Materials and Methods
1.2.3.3 15180 Insulation
1.2.3.4 15400 Plumbing
1.2.3.5 15500 Fire Protection
1.2.3.6 15700 Liquid Heat Transfer
1.2.3.7 15975 Temperature Controls
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Submit product data for pipe, valves and fittings used in each system as required in Section
15010.
1.3.2 Product data shall include pressure and temperature classifications, model numbers, material
types, actuators, trim, valve handle extensions and all pertinent data as required for complete
evaluation by Engineer.
1.3.3 Maintenance data for valves shall include adjusting, servicing, disassembly, exploded view with
part numbers and repair instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for
power piping.
1.4.2 MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.5.1 Prepare for shipping as follows:
1.5.1.1 Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
1.5.1.2 Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
1.5.1.3 Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
1.5.1.4 Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
1.5.1.5 Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
D&A#07103 15060-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.5.1.6 Block check valves in either closed or open position.
1.5.2 Use the following precautions during storage:
1.5.2.1 Maintain valve end protection.
1.5.2.2 Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature.
If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
1.5.2.3 Stack piping above grade and covered.
1.5.3 Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
2.1.1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of pipe types to
be used for each piping system. When more than one piping type is designated, contractor may
choose which type is installed.
2.1.2 Piping Designations
2.1.2.1 CP-2 Steel:
2.1.2.1.1 3/4" to 2" ASTM A53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (furnace-butt welded) Grade A Black
steel (galvanized if so noted). U.S. Steel; Laclede; Republic; Youngstown, Jones &
Laughlin.
2.1.2.1.2 2-1/2" to 12" ASTM A53, Type E (electric resistance welded) Grade A Black steel
(galvanized if so noted).
2.1.2.1.3 14" to 20" ASTM A53, Type E (electric resistance welded) Grade B or Type S
(seamless), (galvanized if so noted). U.S. Steel; Laclede; Republic; Youngstown; Jones
& Laughlin.
2.1.2.2 CP-7 DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306, Drawn Temper.
2.1.2.3 CP-8 Copper: ASTM B75, B88, B251 and B447; ASA H23.1-1947 seamless copper tubing,
hard temper (soft copper if so noted). Type K or L. (as noted) Chase; Bridgeport,
Anaconda; Scovill.
2.1.2.4 CP-20 Ductile Iron Mechanical Joint: AWWA C151 with Mechanical Joint Bell and plain
spigot end, cast iron pipe, centrifugally cast with asphaltum coating. Class as noted in
schedule. Pipe to be marked and carry nominal weights and dimensions as required by
state and local codes. As manufactured by James B. Clow & Sons; American Cast Iron
Pipe; Alabama Pipe; U.S. Pipe & Foundry.
D&A#07103 15060-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.2.5 CP-21 Ductile Iron: Push-on, AWWA C151 pipe with asphaltum coating. Class as noted in
schedule. As manufactured by James B. Clow & Sons Bell Type; American Cast Iron Pipe
Fastite; U.S. Pipe & Foundry Tyton.
2.1.2.6 CP-30 PVC: polyvinylchloride; ASTM D 1785 schedule as noted. As manufactured by A.M.
Byers; U.S. Steel; Carlon, Crescent; normal or high impact as noted.
2.1.2.7 CP-32 PVC SDR 35: (4" to 15") Polyvynlchloride Pipe, Type PSM conforming to ASTM D
3034. Reworked material is not acceptable. Cell Classification of 12454-B as defined in
ASTM D 1782 and SDR (standard dimension ratio) of not greater than 35.
2.1.2.8 CP-33 PVC DWV Drainage Pipe: ASTM D2665, polyvinylchloride pipe solid-wall, waste,
and vent. Schedule as noted.
2.1.2.9 CP-34 ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Solid Wall.
2.1.2.10 CP-40 Cast Iron (HUB) Bell and Spigot: ASTM A74, extra heavy bell and spigot cast iron
soil pipe centrifugally metal or sand spun cast with asphaltum coating. American Brass &
Iron; Tyler; Charlotte. Pipe and fittings shall be labeled with the trademark of the Cast Iron
Soil Pipe Institute.
2.1.2.11 CP-41 Soil Pipe: Cast Iron no hub ASTM A888, CISPI 301. No hub cast iron soil pipe
centrifugally metal or sand spun cast with asphaltum coating. American Brass & Iron; Tyler;
Charlotte. Pipe and fittings shall be labeled with the trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe
Institute.
2.2 PIPE FITTING DESIGNATIONS
2.2.1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of fitting types to
be used for each piping system. Fittings to be of the same strength of piping in each respective
piping system. When more than one type is designated, contractor may choose which type is
installed.
2.2.2 Fitting Designations:
2.2.2.1 CF-1 Malleable Iron: ASME B16.3. 300# (or as noted) black band malleable iron threaded
fitting (galvanized if so noted). Grinnell; Flagg; Kuhns; Illinois Malleable, Stockham.
2.2.2.2 CF-2 Cast Iron: ASME B16.4; 250# (or as noted) black cast iron threaded fitting
(galvanized if so noted). Grinnell; Kuhns, Illinois Malleable; Stockham.
2.2.2.3 CF-4 Flanged: 125# (or as noted) black cast iron, flanged fitting (galvanized if so noted).
Grinnell; Kuhns; Stockham; Illinois Malleable.
2.2.2.4 CF-5 Wrought Steel fittings: ASTM, B16.9, B16.11, B16.28. Steel butt welding fitting. All
elbows shall be long radius, unless otherwise noted. Tube Turns; Midwest; Taylor Forge;
Ladish; NIBCO; Grinnell; Weld Bend; Babcock Wilcox.
2.2.2.5 CF-6 Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM
A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B
fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed
to accept grooved end couplings. All elbows shall be long radius unless otherwise
D&A#07103 15060-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
specified. Completely Victualic coated if used with copper pipe UL listed, FM approved for
fire service.
2.2.2.6 CF-8 Wrought Copper: ASME B16.22. Wrought copper solder joint fitting as manufactured
by Flagg; Mueller; Chase, NIBCO; Anaconda; American Brass.
2.2.2.7 CF-8A Wrought Copper Cold Press Fitting: Fitting specifically design to be field installed
with hand held portable press tool. Fitting to be certified by NSF, UL and be compliant with
ICC, UPC, PHCC, NFPA13, 13D and 13R. Fittings to be ProPress Smart Connect installed
by RIGID Portable Press tool.
2.2.2.8 CF-10 Cast Brass: cast brass solder joint as manufactured by Flagg; Mueller; Chase;
NIBCO; Anaconda.
2.2.2.9 CF-11 Copper Drainage: ASME B16.23 cast copper, or ASME B16.29 wrought copper,
type DWV as manufactured by Flagg; Mueller; Chase, NIBCO; Anaconda.
2.2.2.10 CF-20 Mechanical Joint: AWWA C111 ductile or grey-iron, standard pattern, same class as
noted for pipe. Alabama Pipe, U.S. Pipe & Foundry.
2.2.2.11 CF-21 Push-on-Joint: AWWA C110 ductile cast iron, with push-on-joint, bell and plain-spigot
end.
2.2.2.12 CF-30 PVC: Polyvinylchloride; same schedule and impact as noted. Schedule 40 ASTM D
2466 Socket Type, Sch 80 ASTM D 2467 Socket. Carlon; Crescent; A.M. Byers; U.S. Steel;
Chemtrol.
2.2.2.13 CF-32 PVC Drainage Fitting: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35 for gasketed joints.
2.2.2.14 CF-33 PVC Drainage Fittings: ASTM D2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311 drain
waste and vent patterns.
2.2.2.15 CF-34 ABS Drainage: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste and vent pattern
socket fittings.
2.2.2.16 CF-40 (HUB) Bell and Spigot: Cast iron bell and spigot Type fitting DWV configuration, extra
heavy duty. American Brass & Iron; Tyler; Charlotte.
2.2.2.17 CF-41 (NO-HUB) Mechanical Joint: Cast iron no hub type fitting - DWV configuration.
American Brass & Iron; Tyler; Charlotte.
2.3 PIPE JOINT DESIGNATIONS
2.3.1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designations of joint types to
be used for each piping system. When more than one type is designated, contractor may
choose which type is installed.
2.3.2 Piping Joint Designations:
2.3.2.1 CJ-1 Threaded: threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1, ASTM B16.3, B16.4, B16.12.
Remove all burrs. Ream pipe ends to full bore and remove all chips. Use pipe compound
on male ends only. Approved pipe compounds: Blue Seal; Key Tite.
D&A#07103 15060-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3.2.2 CJ-5 Welded Pipe: standard specification provision for fabrication and erection of piping
systems as recommended by National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. All welding of pipe,
regardless of condition of is to be installed as follows:
2.3.2.2.1 Pipe welding shall comply with provisions of latest revision of applicable code, whether
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, ASTM Code for Pressure Piping, or such state or
local requirements as may supersede code mentioned above.
2.3.2.2.2 A copy of his welding procedure specification together with proof of its qualification as
outlined and required by most recent issue of code having jurisdiction.
2.3.2.2.3 Submit Operator's qualification record in conformance with provisions of code having
jurisdiction, showing that operator was under proven procedure specifications submitted
by Contractor.
2.3.2.2.4 Standard procedure specifications and operators qualified by National Certified Pipe
Welding Bureau shall be considered as conforming to requirements of these
specifications.
2.3.2.2.5 Welders to have ASME test papers not more than 5 years old.
2.3.2.2.6 Each manufacturer or Contractor shall be responsible for quality of welding done by his
organization and shall repair or replace work not in accordance with these
specifications.
2.3.2.3 CJ-6: grooved mechanical-joint couplings: Ductile or malleable-iron housing and synthetic
rubber EPDM (+230oF) gasket of central cavity pressure-response design; with nuts, bolts,
locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings; Victaulic Style 77,
Gruvlok Figure No. 7401 or equal.
2.3.2.4 CJ-8: 95% tin, 4.85% copper, 0.15% selenium. Premium Contractor Grade solder. 410oF
Minimum working temperature; 7130 PSI Tensile Strength, ASTM B32. Like Taramet
Sterling, Taracorp.IMACO, Winston-Salem, NC. Cut ends of tubing square with wheel type
cutter, ream to remove burrs, wipe clean on inside, apply paste type solder flux on external
surface. Apply solder (no lead allowed).
2.3.2.5 CJ-8A: Cold Press connection 0-250°F, 200 psig. Connection made using a hand held
portable press system. Joint to be certified by NSF, UL and be compliant with ICC, UPC,
PHCC, NFPA13, 13D and 139 like RIGID VIEGA ProPress System.
2.3.2.6 CJ-9 Silver Solder: minimum working temperature of 1100°F (copper to copper) ASTM B32,
BCUP-5. Make brazed joints in accordance with Section G of Code for Pressure Piping,
ASME B16.22. Approved products: Handy Harmon SilFos or United Wire & Supply
Phosphon 15. Approved fluxes: Handy Flux or Sil-Flux (lead content shall be .2% or less).
2.3.2.7 CJ-20 Mechanical Joint: AWWA C 111 ductile - or grey – iron glands, rubber gasket and
steel bolts. Reinforce joint at hydrants, fittings or valves with heavy wrought iron clamps
and wrought iron rods in accordance with standard details of National Board of Fire
Underwriters. Apply heavy coat of bituminous solution to assembly.
D&A#07103 15060-7 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3.2.8 CJ-21 Slip Joint: G, AWWA C111. Rubber gasket for use with slip-on-joint. AWWA C 110
Fittings. Reinforce joints at hydrants, fittings or valves with heavy wrought iron clamps and
wrought iron rods in accordance with standard details of NBFU. Apply heavy coat of
bituminous solution to assembly.
2.3.2.9 CJ-32 Gasket for PVC Sewer pipe: ASTM F 477 elastomeric seals.
2.3.2.10 CJ-33 PVC
2.3.2.10.1 Solvent Cement: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the
following:
2.3.2.10.1.1 Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers and solvent
cements.
2.3.2.10.1.2 ABS piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
2.3.2.10.1.3 CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F-493.
2.3.2.10.1.4 PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
2.3.2.10.1.5 PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2665.
2.3.2.10.1.6 PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement
according to ASTM D 3138.
2.3.2.10.2 Heat Welding: ASTM D 2657
2.3.2.10.3 Threads: Use only where noted on schedules. Install as outlined for steel pipe but only
to be used on Schedule 80 or 120 pipe. Use strap wrench for tightening.
2.3.2.11 CJ-40 (HUB) Bell & Spigot: Gasket-ASTM C 564, Rubber. American Brass & Iron; Tyler;
Charlotte.
2.3.2.12 CJ-41 (No HUB) Coupling: Stainless steel couplings CISPI 310 with ASTM A 167, Type 301
or ASTM A 666 Type 301 Stainless steel corrugated shield; stainless steel bands and
sleeve. American Brass & Iron; Tyler; Charlotte.
2.3.2.13 CJ-44 Flanged Joints: Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25,
125 and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced. Including bolts, nuts and
gaskets.
2.3.2.14 CJ-45 Victaulic Mechanical Pipe Couplings: Style 07 rigid couplings, Style 77 standard
coupling as manufactured by Victaulic Co. of America. Installation and pipe grooving shall
be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coupling shall be suitable for working
pressure and temperature of service. Coupling shall be approved by authorities having
jurisdiction. Stockham; Groovelock.
2.4 UNIONS AND FLANGED CONNECTIONS
2.4.1 150 pound malleable iron with ground joint and brass to iron seats. Crane 1280.
D&A#07103 15060-8 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.4.2 125 pound wrought copper or cast brass union with solder joint fittings. Crane 633.
2.4.3 150 pound forged steel flanges with welding neck. Crane 568.
2.4.4 150 pound bronze flanges with tube stop. Mueller F900.
2.5 VALVE DESIGNATIONS
2.5.1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2.5.2 All valves shall be compatible with the type of piping material installed in the system.
D&A#07103 15060-9 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 VALVE DESIGNATION CV-4
3 TYPE Globe
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 125
4.2 Temperature - oF Sat. Stm.
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 1/2 - 2 1/2
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body Bronze
6.2 Trim Bronze
6.3 Disc/plug Renewable Composite
6.4 Bonnet Screw-in
6.5 Stem Rising-Silicon Bronze
6.6 Seat Integral
6.7 Agency Compliance MSS SP-80
APPROVED PRODUCTS Soldered Threaded
7.1 Nibco S211 T211
7.2 Crane 1310 1
7.3 Lunkenheimer 2140
8 NOTES
8.1 Provide manufacturer’s standard stem packing for service intended.
8.2 Valves with rising stems suitable for repacking under pressure.
D&A#07103 15060-10 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 VALVE DESIGNATION CV-5 CV-6
3 TYPE Globe Angle
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 125 125
4.2 Temperature - oF Sat. Stm. Sat. Stm.
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 3 - 12 3 - 12
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body Iron ASTM A126 Iron
6.2 Trim Bronze ASTM B-584
6.3 Disc/plug Renewable Composite Renewable Composite
6.4 Bonnet Bolted Bolted
6.5 Stem OS&Y OS&Y
6.6 Seat Renewable Rings Renewable Rings, ASTM
B584
6.7 Agency Compliance MSS SP-85 MSS SP-85
7 APPROVED PRODUCTS
7.1 Nibco F-718-B F-818-B
7.2 Crane 351 353
7.3 Lunkenheimer 1123 1124
7.4 Jenkins 613CJ 615CJ
8 NOTES
8.1 Provide manufacturer’s standard stem packing for service intended.
8.2 Valves with rising stems suitable for repacking under pressure.
D&A#07103 15060-11 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 VALVE DESIGNATION CV-7 CV-8
3 TYPE Horizontal Swing Check Horizontal Swing Check
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 125 125
4.2 Temperature - oF Sat. Stm. Sat. Stm.
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 0 - 3 2 1/2 - 12
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body Bronze ASTM-B62 Iron ASTM A-126
6.2 Trim Bronze Bronze
6.3 Disc/plug Bronze Renewable Bronze
6.4 Bonnet Screw-in ASTM B-584
6.5 Seat Integral Renewable Rings
6.6 Agency Compliance MSS SP-80 MSS SP-71 TYPE I
7 APPROVED PRODUCTS Soldered Threaded Threaded Flanged
7.1 Crane 1342 37 372 373
7.2 Lunkenheimer 2145 2144 1789 1790
7.3 Nibco S41BB T-413B T-918-13 F-918-13
7.4 Mueller
7.5 Victaulic Series 716 Series 779
D&A#07103 15060-12 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to be
used for each piping system.
2 VALVE DESIGNATION CV-9
3 TYPE Non-Slam Wafer Check
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 150 (WOG)
4.2 Temperature - oF 100
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 2 - 12
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body Semi-Steel, ASTM A-126
6.2 Trim Bronze ASTM B-62
6.3 Disc/plug Center Guided
6.4 Bonnet
6.5 Seat Renewable Rings
6.6 Agency Compliance
7 APPROVED PRODUCTS
7.1 Crane 1400
7.2 Lunkenheimer -
7.3 Nibco W910
7.4 Mueller 91 AP, 92 AP
7.5 Victaulic Series 779
D&A#07103 15060-13 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 VALVE DESIGNATION CV-10 CV-11
3 TYPE Lubricated Plug Cock Lubricated Plug Cock
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 200 175
4.2 Temperature - oF 150 150
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 1/2 – 2 (Threaded) 2 1/2 – 4 (Flanged)
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body Iron Iron
6.2 Trim Iron Iron
6.3 Disc/plug 100% Pipe Area Plug 100% Pipe Area Plug
6.4 Seat Integral Integral
7 APPROVED PRODUCTS
7.1 Nordstrum 114 142, 143
7.2 Walworth 1700 1796, 1797
8 NOTES
8.1 Provide manufacturer’s standard stem packing for service intended.
D&A#07103 15060-14 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 VALVE DESIGNATION CV-15
3 TYPE Globe
Non-Slam
Check
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 125
4.2 Temperature - oF 250
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 4 - 12
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body Cast Iron
6.2 Trim Bronze
6.3 Disc/plug Center Guided
6.4 Bonnet
6.5 Seat Bronze
7 APPROVED PRODUCTS
7.1 Crane
7.2 Lunkenheimer
7.3 Jenkins
7.4 Nibco 105M AP
7.5 Victaulic
7.6 Centerline
8 NOTES
8.1 Use lift check valves only when noted on Drawings.
8.2 Use viton seat on CV-15 for temperatures above 250oF.
D&A#07103 15060-15 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 VALVE DESIGNATION CV-16 CV-17
3 TYPE Eccentric Plug Eccentric Plug
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 125 150
4.2 Temperature - oF
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 1/2 - 2
(Threaded)
2 1/2 - 4
(Flanged)
5 - 12
(Flanged)
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body Iron Semi-Steel
6.2 Trim St. Steel Iron
6.3 Disc/plug Dezurik
Bronze with FS55
(250)
Dezurik
Resilient
Faced Plug
RS55
(250)
7 NOTES
7.1 Provide manufacturer's standard stem packing for service intended.
7.2 Provide lever actuator for each valve except where special actuator is noted on Drawings.
7.3 Where eccentric plug valves are noted on Drawings as balancing valves, they are to have
position stop, plastic cap and 1/8" downstream tap.
D&A#07103 15060-16 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 CLASS NO. CV-20
3 TYPE Ball - Full Port
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 150
4.2 Temperature - oF Sat. Stm.
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 1/2 – 2 1/2”
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body/End Piece 2-Piece Construction - ASTM B 584 Bronze Body Alloy
844 Forging Brass ASTM B-124 Alloy 377
6.2 Ball Chromeplated Brass Conventional Port
6.3 Stem Bronze or Brass
6.3.1 Provide with Stem Extension on insulated pipes
6.4 Seats/Seals Teflon
6.5 Agency Compliance MSS SP-110
7 APPROVED PRODUCTS Threaded
7.1 Nibco T585-70
7.2 Crane/Capri 9200
7.3 Combraco Industries, Inc. 70-100
Apollo Series
8 NOTES
8.1 Soldered valves are not allowed.
D&A#07103 15060-17 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve
types to be used for each piping system.
2 VALVE DESIGNATION CV-21
3 TYPE Ball
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 125 (200 WOG)
4.2 Temperature - oF 350
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 4 - 10
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body/End Piece Cast Iron Split Body A126 CL.B
6.2 Ball Nickel Plated
6.3 Stem
6.3.1 Stainless steel blow-out proof
6.3.2 Stem extension for all insulated pipes
6.4 Seats/Seals Reinforced PTFE
6.5 Agency Compliance MSS SP-72, FED. SPEC. WW-V-35, ANSI
6.6 Handle Lever Operated
8 APPROVED PRODUCTS
8.1 Victaulic Series 721 (1,000 PSIG WOG Rating)
D&A#07103 15060-18 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 CLASS NO. CV-22
3 TYPE Ball - Full Port - AGA Gas Ball Valve
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 5 psig Ambient - Valve Rated at 600 psig at 250o F
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 1/2 - 2
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body/End Piece Cast Brass ASTM B684 - C85700
Forged Brass ASTM B124 - C37700
6.2 Ball Chromeplated Brass Conventional Port
6.3 Stem Bronze or Brass
6.4 Seats/Seals PTFE
6.5 Agency Compliance
6.5.1 ANSI Z21.15
6.5.2 FM 1/4" - 2"
6.5.3 UL MHKZ; YSTD: VOGU (1/2" - 1"); YRBX (1 1/4" - 2");
YRPV (1 1/4" - 2")
7 APPROVED PRODUCTS Threaded
7.1 McDonald #10710
D&A#07103 15060-19 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 CLASS NO. CV-23
3 TYPE Butterfly
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 150
4.2 Temperature - oF 200
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 3 – 6 (see note below)
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body/End Piece Cast Iron ASTM A-126 Threaded Lug for dead end service
6.2 Disc AL. Bronze ASTM B-148 Alloy 954/955
6.3 Stem 416 Stainless steel ASTM A-582
Collar bushings upper and lower bushing
6.4 Seats EPDM Rubber
6.5 Agency Compliance MSS SP-67
7 OPERATOR
7.1 Standard Lever-lock handle w/memory stop Delete this line if worm gear actuator is used.
7.2 Self-locking worm gear type actuator with adjustable stops and disc position
indicator.
7.3 Provide with chain wheel where noted on Drawings.
8 APPROVED PRODUCTS
8.1 Nibco LD 2000-3
8.2 Crane 14-TL
8.3 Apollo 6L-31
8.4 Lunkenheimer FIG. 4735
8.5 Stockham LD-711-BS3-E
8.6
9
Victaulic 300 Series
9.0 NOTES
9.1 Do not use butterfly valves on pipes size 2 1/2” and smaller. LD-711-BS3-E
D&A#07103 15060-20 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 CLASS NO. CV-24
3 TYPE Butterfly
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 150
4.2 Temperature - oF 200
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 8 - 12
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body/End Piece Cast Iron ASTM A-536 Threaded Lug for dead end service
6.2 Disc AL. Bronze ASTM B-148 Alloy 954/955
6.3 Stem 416 Stainless steel ASTM A-582
Collar bushings upper and lower bushing
6.4 Seats EPDM Rubber
6.5 Agency Compliance MSS SP-67
7 OPERATOR
7.1 Self-locking worm gear type actuator with adjustable stops and disc position indicator.
7.2 Provide with chain wheel where noted on Drawings.
8 APPROVED PRODUCTS
8.1 Nibco LD 2000-5
8.2 Crane 14-TL
8.3 Apollo 6L-31
8.4 Lunkenheimer FIG. 4735
8.5 Stockham LD-711-B53-E
8.6 Victaulic 300 Series
D&A#07103 15060-21 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.0 PRODUCTS (Continued) VALVE SCHEDULES
1 Refer to System Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for designation of valve types to
be used for each piping system.
2 CLASS NO. CV-25
3 TYPE Butterfly
4 MAXIMUM WORKING
4.1 Pressure - PSIG 150
4.2 Temperature - oF 200
5 SIZE LIMITS - Inches 14 - 36
6 DESCRIPTION
6.1 Body/End Piece Cast Iron ASTM A-126 CL.B
6.2 Disc AL. Bronze ASTM B-148 Alloy 954
6.3 Stem 302 Stainless steel A151-302
6.4 Seat/Backing Ring EPDM/Fiberite
7 OPERATOR
7.1 Self-locking work gear type actuator with adjustable stops and disc position indicator.
7.2 Provide with chain wheel where noted on Drawings.
8 APPROVED PRODUCTS
8.1 Victaulic Series 709
D&A#07103 15060-22 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Install pipe, valves and fittings for each system as designated in the System Schedules on the
following pages.
3.1.2 Reference Products, Part 2 of this Section for specifications and manufacturers of pipes, valves
and fittings designated to be installed in System Schedules.
D&A#07103 15060-23 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 1
HEATING & CHILLED WATER
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System.
2 NOMINAL SIZE RANGE
2.1 Minimal Diameter 1/2" 2 1/2" 10”
2.2 Maximum Diameter 2” 8” 20”
3 DESIGN
3.1 Working Pressure PSIG 160 160 160
3.2 Working Temperature °F 250 250 250
4 PIPING MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
4.1 Soft “K” Copper (See Notes) CP-8 - -
4.2 Hard “L” Copper CP-8 CP-8 -
4.3 Sch. 40 Bl. St. (See Notes) CP-2 CP-2 CP-2
5 FITTING DESIGNATIONS
5.1 Cold Press CF-8A CF-8A -
5.2 Wrought CF-8 - -
5.3 Cast Iron Threaded CF-2 - -
5.4 Flanged - CF-4 CF-4
5.5 Butt Welded - CF-5 CF-5
5.6 Grooved - CF-6 CF-6
6 JOINT DESIGNATIONS
6.1 Cold Press CJ-8A CJ-8A -
6.2 Solder CJ-8 CJ-8 -
6.3 Threaded CJ-1 - -
6.4 Welded - CJ-5 CJ-5
6.5 Flanged 125# - CJ-44 CJ-44
6.6 Grooved - CJ-45 CJ-45
7 VALVE DESIGNATIONS
7.1 Ball CV-20 CV-20 -
Use only if specifically told to do so CV-21 CV-21
7.2 Butterfly - CV-23, 24 CV-24, 25
7.3 Globe CV-4 CV-4, 5 CV-5
7.4 Wafer Check - CV-9 CV-9
7.5 Globe Check - CV-15 CV-15
8 NOTES
8.1 Pipe installed below grade shall be continuous soft copper. No piping joints allowed below
grade. All pipe above grade shall be straight lengths.
8.2 Use Schedule 30 black steel pipe on all sizes 12” and over.
8.3 Use 1/2" pipe only is shown on Drawings.
D&A#07103 15060-24 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 11
REFRIGERATION
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System.
2 LOCATION ABOVE GROUND BELOW GROUND
3 PIPING DESIGNATIONS
3.1 Pipe Hard Type L
Copper
CP-8 Soft Type K
Copper
CP-8
3.2 Fittings Wr. Copper CF-8
3.3 Joints Silver
Solder
CJ-9
4 NOTES
4.1 Pipe installed below grade shall be continuous soft copper. No piping joints allowed below
grade.
D&A#07103 15060-25 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 13
COIL CONDENSATE
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System.
2 NOMINAL SIZE RANGE
2.1 Minimum Diameter 1”
2.2 Maximum Diameter 4”
3 DESIGN
3.1 Working Pressure Ft. Hd. 10
3.2 Working Temperature °F Ambient
4 PIPING DESIGNATIONS
4.1 Hard “L” Copper CP-8
4.2 Sch. 40 PVC CP-30
5 FITTING DESIGNATIONS
5.1 Wrought CF-8
5.2 Sch. 40 PVC CF-30
6 JOINT DESIGNATIONS
6.1 Solder CJ-8
6.2 Solvent Cement CJ-33
D&A#07103 15060-26 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 14
SANITARY, VENT AND STORM GRAVITY-INSIDE BUILDING
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System.
2 ABOVE GRADE
2.1 SANITARY & STORM PIPE
DESIGNATIONS
FITTING
DESIGNATIONS
JOINT
DESIGNATIONS
2.1.1 1 1/2” and Larger
2.1.1.1 Cast Iron No Hub CP-41 No Hub CF-41 Coupling CJ-41
2.1.1.2 DWV Copper CP-7 Copper CF-11 Solder CJ-8
2.1.1.3 Sch. 40 DWV PVC CP-33 PVC CF-33 Solvent CJ-33
2.2 VENT PIPE DESIGNATIONS
2.2.1 1 1/2" and Larger
2.2.1.1 Cast Iron No Hub CP-41 No Hub CF-41 Coupling CJ-41
2.2.1.2 DWV Copper CP-7 Copper CF-11 Solder CJ-8
2.2.1.3 Sch. 40 DWV PVC CP-33 PVC CF-33 Solvent CJ-33
3 BELOW FLOOR
3.1 SANITARY, STORM AND VENT
3.1.1 2” and Larger
3.1.1.1 Cast Iron Hub CP-40 Hub CF-40 Gasket CJ-40
3.1.1.2 Sch. 40 DWV PVC CP-33 PVC CF-33 Solvent CJ-33
4 NOTES
4.1 PVC in return air plenums shall be insulated. Reference Insulation Section 15180.
D&A#07103 15060-27 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 15
SANITARY, VENT AND STORM
GRAVITY-OUTSIDE BUILDING
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System.
2 SANITARY & STORM PIPE
DESIGNATIONS
FITTING
DESIGNATIONS
JOINT
DESIGNATIONS
2.1 2” and 3”
2.1.1 Sch. 40 DWV PVC CP-33 PVC CF-33 Solvent CJ-33
2.1.2 Sch. 40 ABS CP-34 ABS CF-34 Solvent CJ-33
2.2 4” to 15”
2.2.1 PVC SDR 35 CP-32 PVC CF-32 Gasket CJ-32
3 NOTES
3.1 Use concrete pipe below roads and driveways.
D&A#07103 15060-28 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 16
SANITARY AND STORM, FORCED MAIN
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System.
2 SANITARY & STORM PIPE
DESIGNATIONS
FITTING
DESIGNATIONS
JOINT
DESIGNATIONS
2.1 ABOVE GRADE
2.1.1 2” to 4”
2.1.1.1 Type L
Copper
CP-8 Wrought
Copper
CF-10 Solder CJ-8
2.1.1.2 Sch. 40
Galv. St.
CP-2 Ductile
Iron
CF-6 Grooved
Mech.
CJ-6
3 BELOW FLOOR – INSIDE BUILDING
3.1 2” to 4”
3.1.1 Ductile Iron CP-20 Ductile Iron CF-20 Mech. Joint CJ-20
4 BELOW GRADE – OUTSIDE BUILDING
4.1 2” to 4”
4.1.1 Ductile Iron CP-20 Ductile Iron CF-20 Mech. Joint CJ-20
D&A#07103 15060-29 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 17
DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER
ABOVE GROUND
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System.
2 NOMINAL SIZE RANGE
2.1 Minimum Diameter 1/2" 4”
2.2 Maximum Diameter 3” 8”
3 DESIGN
3.1 Working Pressure PSIG 125 125
3.2 Working Temperature °F 250 250
4 PIPING DESIGNATIONS
4.1 Hard “L” Copper CP-8 CP-8
5 FITTING DESIGNATIONS
5.1 Cold Press CF-8A CF-8A
5.2 Wrought CF-8 -
5.3 Grooved Mech. - CF-6
6 JOINT DESIGNATIONS
6.1 Cold Press CJ-8A CJ-8A
6.2 Solder CJ-8 -
6.3 Grooved - CJ-6
7 VALVES
7.1 Ball CV-20 Use only if specifically told to
do so – CV-21
7.2 Angle - CV-6
7.3 Globe CV-4, 5 CV-5
7.4 Check Horizontal Swing CV-7, 8 CV-8
7.5 Butterfly - CV-23, 24
8 NOTES
8.1 Install ball valves for balancing services.
8.2 Use flange joint on 3” and larger pipe when connection to equipment or valves.
8.3 See Section 15400 “Plumbing Fixtures” for special valves.
D&A#07103 15060-30 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 18
DOMESTIC COLD WATER
BELOW GROUND
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System.
2 NOMINAL SIZE RANGE
2.1 Minimum Diameter 1/4" 1 1/2" 3”
2.2 Maximum Diameter 2 1/2" 2 1/2" 24”
3 DESIGN
3.1 Working Pressure PSIG 125 - 125
3.2 Working Temperature °F 250 - 250
4 PIPING MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
4.1 Soft “K” Copper CP-8 - -
4.2 Hard “K” Copper - CP-8 -
4.3 Ductile Iron Mech. Jt. - - CP-20
4.4 Ductile Iron Push On - - CP-21
5 FITTING DESIGNATIONS
5.1 Wrought Copper - CF-8 -
5.2 Ductile Iron Mech. Jt. - - CF-20
5.3 Ductile Iron Push On - - CF-21
6 JOINT DESIGNATIONS
6.1 Silver Solder - CJ-9 -
6.2 Mech. Jt. - - CJ-20
6.3 Push On - - CJ-21
7 NOTES
7.1 Use flange joint on 3” and larger pipe when connecting to equipment or valves.
7.2 Provide manufacturer’s standard gasket for service intended on mechanical joint pipe.
7.3 See Section 15400 “Plumbing”.
7.4 When using soft copper underground, no joints shall be permitted.
D&A#07103 15060-31 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 19
FIRE PROTECTION
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System
2 LOCATION LIMITES BELOW GROUND ABOVE GROUND
3 NOMINAL SIZE RANGE
3.1 Minimum Diameter 4” 1” 2 1/2"
3.2 Maximum Diameter 12” 2” 8”
4 DESIGN
4.1 Working Pressure PSIG 175 175 175
4.2 Working Temperature °F WOG WOG WOG
5 PIPING DESIGNATIONS
5.1 Ductile Iron CP-20 - -
5.2 Sch. 40 Bl. St. - CP-2 -
5.3 Sch. 10 Bl. St. - - CP-2
6 FITTING DESIGNATIONS
6.1 Ductile Iron Mech. Joint CF-20 - -
6.2 250# Cast Iron - CF-2 -
6.3 Steel Grooved - - CF-6
7 JOINT DESIGNATIONS
7.1 Mechanical Joint CJ-20 - -
7.2 Threaded - CJ-1 -
7.3 Mech. Grooved - - CJ-6
8 NOTES
8.1 Valves are specified in Fire Protection Section 15500.
8.2 Provide manufacturer’s standard gasket for service intended on mechanical joint pipe.
8.3 Provide thrust blocks or tie-rods at all fittings below grade as required by NFPA #24, Chapter
8.
8.4 Above grade: Sch. 10 light wall pipe ASTM-A135 with victaulic fittings is acceptable for
sprinkler system.
8.5 The minimum burial depth of exterior fire protection systems shall be 5’0”.
D&A#07103 15060-32 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM PIPING SCHEDULE 20
GAS PIPING
1 Install pipe, valves and fittings as designated in this Schedule for this System.
2 NOMINAL SIZE RANGE
2.1 Minimum Diameter 1/4" 2 1/2"
2.2 Maximum Diameter 2” 12”
3 DESIGN
3.1 Working Pressure PSIG 5 5
3.2 Working Temperature °F 150 150
4 PIPING DESIGNATIONS
4.1 Sch. 40 Bl. St. CP-2 CP-2
5 FITTING DESIGNATIONS
5.1 150# Mal. Iron CF-1 -
5.2 Wrought St. - CF-5
6 JOINT DESIGNATIONS
6.1 Threaded CJ-1 -
6.2 Welded - CJ-5
7 VALVE DESIGNATIONS
7.1 Cock CV-10 CV-11
7.2 Eccentric Plug CV-16 CV-16, 17
7.3 Ball CV-22 -
7.4 Crane 270 Gas Cock in 1 1/2" and Under
8 NOTES
8.1 Unions shall be malleable iron railroad unions for 500# WOG.
8.2 Pipe buried below ground to be Dupont Aldyl A or approved AGA equal.
8.3 Steel piping shall connect to plastic piping just below ground. Coat steel pipe which extends
into ground with cold asphalt Reilly Tar & Chemical Enamel CA-50; Glass Fiber and Mat
Roskote Glasswrap with coat enamel or approved equal.
8.4 Underground piping within building shall be installed in underground conduit, in accordance
with National Fire Code 54. Conduit used to encasing gas pipe shall be Schedule 40 steel
pipe, well wrapped or plastic coated. All joints to be welded. Provide cathode protection for
electrolytic action. Conduit shall extend to outside for venting.
8.5 Inspection, testing and purging shall be done as set forth in NFPA #53, Part 4.
D&A#07103 15060-33 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.2 PIPE SUPPORT
3.2.1 General
3.2.1.1 Furnish and install supports, guides, anchors and sway braces required for proper
installation and support of pipe lines except supports noted to be furnished by
others.
3.2.1.2 Pipe suspension shall prevent excessive stress and excessive variation in
supporting force. Fabrication and installation of supports for pipe lines shall not
constrain piping to cause excess transfer of load from supports to piping or from
support to support when expansion or contraction occurs. Supports shall be
capable of taking entire piping load imposed by expansion or contraction.
3.2.1.3 Where pipe vibration transmits objectionable vibration to building structure or
attached equipment, hangers shall be supplemented by spring cushions or an
energy absorbing means in the supports themselves, or through the addition of
flexible piping connectors or other auxiliary equipment.
3.2.1.4 Piping system where flexibility is not desired shall be supported by rigid hangers.
3.2.1.5 See Section 15010, paragraph 3.4 – “Attaching to Building Construction” for
attaching pipe support to structure.
3.2.2 Vertical Pipe Risers
3.2.2.1 Support vertical runs under 15' long with hanger adjacent to elbows.
3.2.2.2 Support vertical runs over 15' with steel riser clamps. Weld clamps to pipe and
support on building structure. Space clamps at every floor with maximum spacing of
28'.
3.2.3 Hanger Rods
3.2.3.1 Support horizontal pipe with hot rolled steel rod manufactured in accordance with
ASTM A107. Space hanger rods to eliminate pipe sagging. Space hangers as
listed below. Place hangers within 12" of each horizontal elbow.
3.2.3.2 Steel and Copper Hanger Spacing
PIPE SIZE (NPS)
ROD SIZE
(DIAMETER)
MAXIMUM HANGER
SPACING
1/2" thru 2" 3/8" 8'0"
2-1/2" and 3" 1/2" 12'0"
4" and 5" 5/8" 12'0"
6" 3/4" 15'0"
8" thru 12" 7/8" 15'0"
14" thru 18" Two 7/8" 15'0"
20" thru 24" Two 1" 15'0"
D&A#07103 15060-34 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.2.3.3 PVC Pipe Support Spacing
PIPE SIZE (NPS)
ROD SIZE
(DIAMETER)
MAXIMUM HANGER
SPACING
3/4" thru 2" 3/8" 5'0"
2-1/2" thru 4" 1/2" 6'6"
6" thru 8" 3/4" 7'0"
3.2.3.4 Piping with caulked joints to be supported at each joint.
3.2.4 Pipe Hangers (Pipe Suspended from Above)
3.2.4.1 For Hot Lines or Combination Hot and Cold Lines
3.2.4.1.1 2" and smaller iron or steel pipe: adjustable steel clevis hangers. Elcen 12;
Grinnell 260; Fee & Mason 239; Crawford 11.
3.2.4.1.2 2" and smaller copper pipe: adjustable copper pipe ring. Elcen 394; Grinnell
97CP; Fee & Mason 365; Crawford.
3.2.4.1.3 2-1/2" thru 12" iron, steel and copper pipe: adjustable steel clevis hangers.
Elcen 12; Grinnell 260; Fee & Mason 239; Crawford 11.
3.2.4.1.4 2-1/2" thru 12" iron, steel and copper pipe: adjustable swivel pipe roll (one
hanger rod). Elcen 14; Grinnell 174; Fee & Mason 272; Crawford 129.
3.2.4.1.5 14" thru 24" o.d. iron or steel pipe: single pipe roll with adjustable sockets (two
hanger rods). Elcen 15; Grinnell 171; Fee & Mason 170; Crawford 15.
3.2.4.2 For Cold Lines
3.2.4.2.1 All sizes iron or steel pipe: Elcen 12; Grinnell 260; Fee & Mason 239; Crawford
11.
3.2.4.2.2 All sizes copper pipe: adjustable copper-plated ring. Elcen 394; Grinnell 97CP;
Fee & Mason 365; Crawford.
3.2.4.3 All hangers used on lines requiring insulation and vapor barrier shall have hangers
oversized to allow insulation to pass thru hanger. Install insulation cradles or wood
blocks the same thickness as insulation so insulation will not be crushed. Insulation
cradles or wood blocks shall be designed for this specific use.
3.2.5 Pipe Carriers (Pipe Supported from Below on Racks, Piers, Stands or Trapeze Support)
3.2.5.1 For Hot Lines or Combination Hot and Cold Lines
3.2.5.1.1 3” and smaller Pipe: roller chair with steel U bar support. Elcen 16; Grinnell
176; Fee & Mason 168; Crawford 130.
D&A#07103 15060-35 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.2.5.1.2 4” and larger Pipe: adjustable pipe roll stand with base plate. Elcen 20; Grinnell
274; Fee & Mason 161; Crawford 19.
3.2.5.2 For Cold Lines: all pipe sizes supported on steel pipe chair designed to contain pipe
movement in direction perpendicular to pipe run but allow some movement in
direction of pipe run.
3.2.5.3 All hangars used on lines requiring insulation and vapor barrier shall have hangers
oversized to allow insulation to pass thru hanger. Install insulation cradles or wood
blocks the same thickness as insulation so insulation will not be crushed. Insulation
cradles or wood blocks shall be designed for this specific use.
3.2.6 For sprinkler piping support refer to NFPA#13 (3-10 hangers).
3.2.7 Supports for sprinkler piping to be in conformance with NFPA 13, if modified by this
section.
3.2.8 For piping hanger rod attachment to building, see Section 15010 “Attaching to Building
Construction.”
3.3 UNDERGROUND PIPING Reference - Excavation and Backfilling
3.3.1 See Excavation and Backfilling Section 15050.
3.4 ESCUTCHEONS
3.4.1 See Escutcheons, Section 15050.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
3.5.1 Locate valves accessibly and arrange to permit easy removal of fixtures and equipment
they serve.
3.5.2 Unless otherwise noted, all valves shall be full size of lines in which they are placed.
3.5.3 Install all piping and shut-off valves full pipe size as shown on Drawings. Reduce at
control valves to control valve size.
3.5.4 Valves mounted in horizontal lines shall not have their stems and bonnets pointed below
horizontal position unless indicated on Drawings.
3.5.5 Provide valves with 3/4" garden hose adaptor for draining low points, boilers, chillers,
coils, etc. with cap and chain. Use ball valves for systems which operate below 120oF.
Use gate (Crane 431) or globe valves for systems which operate above 121oF.
3.5.6 Mount all globe valves to close against flow pressure. Flow should be against bottom of
plug.
3.5.7 Remove bonnets and trim from all valves before soldering, brazing or welding in piping
system. Protect seating surfaces during installation. Clean valve parts thoroughly
before reassembling. Install bonnet with valve in open position. Follow manufacturers
written instructions to protect valves from overheating during installation.
D&A#07103 15060-36 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.5.8 Install all valves with discs or plugs in open position. Close only when assured that
sealing parts are free from foreign material. Weld scale or similar foreign materials
found embedded in sealing surfaces will require installation of new trim or complete
valve.
3.5.9 If grooved piping system is used, then only grooved end valves shall be used. If
grooved piping is used, it is not acceptable to use grooved to flanged adapters to install
flanged valves.
3.5.10 Install valves as required by control contractor.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
3.6.1 Offset piping to avoid interference with other work to increase head room under piping.
3.6.2 Contractor may, at his option, use pipe bending equipment to form full lengths of pipe to
proper configuration indicated on Drawings.
3.6.3 Remove raised face from flanges that are to match cast iron flat face patterns.
3.6.4 Coat studs, nuts, flange faces and metallic gaskets with material similar to molybdenum
disulphide before assembly.
3.6.5 Pipe sizes refer to nominal inside pipe diameter except on copper refrigeration lines and
steel and wrought iron pipe 14" and larger.
3.6.6 Bonney Weldolet Forge Branch Outlet Fittings may be used where steel with welding
fittings are specified in lieu of branch outlet tees, provided branch tee is 2 sizes smaller
than main. Nipples welded into mains not acceptable.
3.6.7 Use galvanized fittings and unions with galvanized pipe.
3.6.8 Caulk clearance space in floor sleeves with plastic compound or fire stop material as
required.
3.6.9 Caulk exterior wall sleeves with thiokol.
3.6.10 Install chromeplated pipe escutcheons on bare exposed pipe at wall, floor and ceiling
penetrations. Reference 15050 Escutcheons.
3.6.11 Use dielectric couplings when joining dissimilar piping materials.
3.6.12 Piping shall not pass over electrical apparatus. If conflict is shown on Drawings, notify
Engineer prior to installing pipe.
3.6.13 Refer to General Requirements for installation of sleeves, escutcheons, cutting and
fitting and attaching to building construction.
3.6.14 Refer to Insulation Section for insulation data.
3.6.15 Conceal all pipe where provisions have been made for this purpose.
D&A#07103 15060-37 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.6.16 In case of conflict on Drawings as to pipe size, the larger pipe size shall be installed.
3.6.17 Joints shall be approved type, gas and watertight for system pressure.
3.6.18 All pipe shall be cut square, reamed, chamfered and free of all burrs and obstructions.
Pipe ends shall have full-bore openings and not be undercut.
3.6.19 Piping not serving elevator equipment rooms shall not pass through elevator equipment
rooms. If conflict is shown on drawings, notify Engineer prior to installing pipe.
3.6.20 Install wells, thread-o-lets and T’s as required by control contractor.
3.6.21 Copper pipe shall not come in direct contact with mortar or grout. Where copper pipes
are exposed to mortar or grout, pipes shall be wrapped with duct tape. This typically
happens when pipes pass through masonry walls.
3.7 PIPE CLEANING
3.7.1 Swab to remove dirt or scale.
3.7.2 Flush water system until water runs clear.
3.7.3 Operate steam systems until condensate runs clear.
3.7.4 Clean all strainers and traps.
3.8 TESTING PIPING
3.8.1 Test all piping at 1 1/2 times operating pressure.
3.8.2 Test all concealed work before covering with earth, insulation or furring.
3.8.3 Notify Engineer not less than 24 hours in advance of all tests.
3.8.4 Furnish all fuel and necessary equipment required for tests.
3.8.5 Promptly repair all leaks and reapply tests.
3.8.6 Install blind flanges or plugs in order to make tests.
3.8.7 See Specification Sections 15400 and 15700 for additional pressure testing
requirements.
3.9 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
3.9.1 Flush system thoroughly until water runs clear.
3.9.2 Entire system shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing 50 parts per million
of chlorine. The system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 24
hours; or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution
containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for three hours.
D&A#07103 15060-38 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.9.3 Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean potable
water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
3.9.4 After the above requirements are satisfied, submit samples to local Board of Health for
approval.
3.9.5 Sterilization shall be redone until approval from the State Board of Health is obtained.
3.10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
3.10.1 Reference 15050.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15180-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15180
INSULATION
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This section includes field applied insulation and jacket materials for all systems.
These systems include:
1.2.1.1 System Insulation Schedule 1:
Heating Water Pipe
1.2.1.2 System Insulation Schedule 2
Chilled Water Pipe
1.2.1.3 System Insulation Schedule 3:
Coil Condensate Pipe
Domestic Cold Water Pipe
Domestic Hot Water Pipe
1.2.1.4 System Insulation Schedule 4:
Refrigeration Suction Pipe
1.2.1.5 System Insulation Schedule 7:
Storm Water Pipe
1.2.1.6 System Insulation Schedule 8:
Chillers
Chilled Water Pumps
1.2.1.7 System Insulation Schedule 9:
Heating and Air Conditioning Supply Ductwork
Outside Air Intake Ductwork
1.2.1.8 System Insulation Schedule 10:
Return Air Ductwork
1.2.2 Any equipment that is to be factory insulated is specified with respective equipment.
1.2.3 Any piece of equipment, pipe, or duct, installed in this contract, which is typically
insulated to prevent condensation, shall be insulated unless specifically noted
otherwise.
D&A#07103 15180-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.2.4 Internally lined sheet metal is specified in Air Distribution Section 15800.
1.2.5 Related sections include all applicable Mechanical Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Submit product data for insulation, jacket materials and fittings used in each system
as required in Section 15010, “Shop Drawings”.
1.3.2 Product data shall include thermal conductivity, thickness, jacket material, insulation
material, sealing compounds, flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings for each
type of product to be used.
1.3.3 Submit test reports of independent testing agency showing conformance with flame-
spread and smoke-developed ratings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Insulation Contractor shall have completed a minimum of two (2) projects of similar
scope. Upon request, the Insulation Contractor shall provide a list of similar projects
and references to the Engineer. The engineer may wish to inspect work previously
installed by the Insulation Contractor.
1.4.2 Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 50 or less.
1.4.3 Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 150 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.5.1 All insulation to be shipped to site in unopened containers as packaged by Insulation
Manufacturers.
1.5.2 All containers shall state contents within.
1.5.3 Store in clean dry area properly protected from weather and physical damage.
1.5.4 Open only containers required to be opened as construction progresses.
1.6 COORDINATION
1.6.1 Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers and insulation shields.
1.6.2 Coordinate hanger sizes and piping penetrations for pipes requiring insulation, wood
blocking and saddles with piping installer.
1.7 SCHEDULING
1.7.1 Schedule insulation application after pipe testing and heat trace has been installed.
D&A#07103 15180-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
2.1.1 Refer to Insulation Material Schedules in Execution portion of this Section for
Insulation types to be used for each system. When more than one is shown,
contractor may choose which type is to be installed.
2.1.2 FIBERGLASS INSULATION
2.1.2.1 Glass fiber bonded with a thermosetting resin with thermal conductivity of .25 or
less @ 75oF. 3-pound per cubic foot density. Designed for use to 850oF.
2.1.2.1.1 Preformed Pipe Insulation with Jacket: ASTM C547, Type I, Class I with
factory applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket .02 perm max water vapor
permeance.
2.1.2.1.2 Board Insulation: with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-
service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil
and vinyl film.
2.1.2.1.3 Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service
jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and
vinyl film.
2.1.2.2 Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:
2.1.2.2.1 Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber
insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging
cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
2.1.2.2.2 Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
2.1.2.3 Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for
indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
2.1.2.4 Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
2.1.2.5 Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C
196.
2.1.2.6 Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
2.1.2.7 Manufacturers:
2.1.2.7.1 CertainTeed Manson
2.1.2.7.2 Knauf Insulation
2.1.2.7.3 Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
2.1.2.7.4 Schuller International, Inc.
D&A#07103 15180-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.2.7.5 Johns Manville
2.1.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
2.1.3.1 Closed cellular or expanded rubber material of high insulating efficiency (K of .25
or better @ 75oF) and designed for use with temperatures from -40o to 210oF.
Odorless, self-extinguishing and vapor resistant in compliance with ASTM E-84,
25/50 flame smoke rating. Approved for use in return air plenums.
2.1.3.1.1 Preformed pipe insulation: ASTM C 534, Type I.
2.1.3.1.2 Sheet insulation: ASTM C 534, Type II.
2.1.3.2 Adhesive: As recommended by Insulation Material Manufacturer.
2.1.3.3 Ultraviolet – Protective Coating: As recommended by Insulation Manufacturer.
2.1.3.4 Manufacturers:
2.1.3.4.1 Armstrong World Industries, Inc. – Armacell
2.1.3.4.2 Rubatex Corp.
2.1.3.4.3 K-Flex
2.1.4 DUCT LINER: See Section 15800
2.2 ADHESIVES
2.2.1 Adhesives or mastics used in the application or manufacture of insulating materials
shall be fire retardant with UL flame rating not exceeding 25 and smoke developed
rating not exceeding 50 (on dry film) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. All
adhesives specifically designed for respective application as noted by insulation
manufacturer.
2.3 JACKETS
2.3.1 PVC Jacket
2.3.1.1 High-impact
2.3.1.1.1 Fittings - Gloss White, preformed, 30 Mill, PVC jacket designed for use with
and provided by same manufacturer of insulation. Fiberglass insert wrapped
around fitting and covered by PVC preformed jacket piping insulation system.
2.3.1.1.2 Sheet - Gloss White, preformed, pre-cut and curled 20 mil PVC jacket
designed for use with and provided by same manufacturer of piping insulation
system. Ultraviolet-resistant suitable for outdoor service and temperature
range 0 – 150oF. Jacket to be completely sealed with solvent weld for vapor
proof barrier where noted in schedule.
2.3.2 Foil and Paper Jacket
D&A#07103 15180-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3.2.1 Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil.
Maximum of .02 perms moisture vapor transmission, ASTM C 921, Type I, Max
25/50 flame smoke rating.
2.3.3 Aluminum Jacket
2.3.3.1 Aluminum roll stock .010" thick, ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
2.3.3.2 Aluminum Fittings - Preformed - same thickness and finish as jacket.
2.3.3.3 Jacket Bands - Aluminum 3/4" wide.
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
2.4.1 Glass Cloth and Tape
2.4.1.1 Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-
fiber fabrics, plain weave, pre-sized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270 g/sq. m).
Tape Width: 4 inches (100 mm).
2.4.2 Bands
2.4.2.1 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
2.4.2.1.1 Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
2.4.2.1.2 Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
2.4.3 Wire
2.4.3.1 0.080-inch (2.0 mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6 mm), soft-annealed,
stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6 mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
2.4.4 Welded-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers
2.4.4.1 Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and galvanized speed
washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
2.4.4.1.1 Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb (45 kg) for direct pull perpendicular to
the attached surface.
2.4.5 Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers
2.4.5.1 Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and
plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
2.4.5.1.1 Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for
surface temperature of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a
holding capacity of 100 lb (45 kg) for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered
surface.
D&A#07103 15180-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.4.6 Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers
2.4.6.1 Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and
plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Install Insulation for each system as designated in the Insulation Material Schedules
on the following pages.
3.1.2 When more than one type of insulation system is specified, contractor may choose
which type is installed.
3.1.3 Reference Products, Part 2 of this Section for specifications and manufacturers of
insulation materials designated to be installed in Insulation Material Schedules.
D&A#07103 15180-7 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE 1:
HEATING WATER PIPE
1 Install insulation materials as designated in this schedule for system(s) listed.
2 LOCATION INSIDE OUTSIDE
3 INSULATION
3.1 Pipe Fiberglass-Preformed with
Jacket
Fiberglass-Preformed with
Jacket
3.2 Fitting Fiberglass Blanket Fiberglass Blanket
4 INSULATION THICKNESS
4.1 Pipe Size <2" 2 ½ ", 3" >4" <2" 2 ½", 3" >4"
4.2 Insulation Thickness 1" 1 ½" 2 ½" 1" 1 ½" 2 ½"
5 JACKETS
5.1 Pipe Integral to Insulation Stainless Steel
5.2 Fittings Preformed PVC Preformed Stainless Steel
5.3 Vapor-Retardant No
6 NOTES
6.1 On VAV Boxes with heating coils, wrap ends of coils, exposed to space adjacent to coils with
blanket type insulation. Secure with tape for vapor retarder surface.
6.2 Where pipe insulation is to be painted, install glass cloth jacket. Prior to finish paint, paint with
one coat of fire retardant, washable, white liquid plastic coating. Confirm compatibility with finish
paint prior to painting.
D&A#07103 15180-8 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE 2:
CHILLED WATER PIPE
1 Install insulation materials as designated in this schedule for system listed.
2 LOCATION INSIDE OUTSIDE
3 INSULATION
3.1 Pipe Fiberglass-Preformed
with Jacket
3.2 Fitting Fiberglass Blanket
4 INSULATION THICKNESS
4.1 Pipe Size All
4.2 Thickness 1"
5 JACKETS
5.1 Pipe Integral to Insulation
5.2 Fittings Preformed PVC
5.3 Vapor-Retardant Yes
6 NOTES
6.1 All chilled water pump bodies, air separators and miscellaneous chilled water equipment to
be insulated in their entirety with 1" flexible elastomeric.
6.2 Where pipe insulation is to be painted, install glass cloth jacket. Prior to finish paint, paint
with one coat of fire retardant, washable, white liquid plastic coating. Confirm compatibility
with finish paint prior to painting.
D&A#07103 15180-9 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE 3:
COIL CONDENSATE PIPE
DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE
DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPE
1 Install insulation materials as designated in this schedule for system(s) listed.
2 LOCATION INSIDE OUTSIDE
3 INSULATION
3.1 Pipe Fiberglass-Preformed with Jacket
3.2 Fitting Fiberglass Blanket
4 INSULATION THICKNESS
4.1 Pipe Size All
4.2 Thickness 1"
5 JACKETS
5.1 Pipe Integral to Insulation
5.2 Fittings Preformed PVC
5.3 Vapor-Retardant Yes
6 NOTES
6.1 On outside installations, use silicon sealant at all stainless steel joints for a water-tight
installation.
D&A#07103 15180-10 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE 4:
REFRIGERATION SUCTION PIPE
REFRIGERATION HOT GAS PIPE
1 Install insulation materials as designated in this schedule for this system.
2 SERVICE INSIDE OUTSIDE
3 INSULATION MATERIAL
3.1 Pipe Elastomeric Elastomeric
3.2 Fitting Preformed Preformed
4 INSULATION THICKNESS
4.1 Pipe Size All All
4.2 Thickness 3/4" 3/4"
5 JACKETS
5.1 Pipe N/A Ultraviolet
5.2 Fittings N/A
5.3 Vapor-Retardant N/A
D&A#07103 15180-11 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE 7:
STORM WATER
1 Install insulation materials as designated in this schedule for system(s) listed.
2 SERVICE INSIDE - HORIZONTAL
3 INSULATION MATERIAL
3.1 Pipe Preformed Fiberglass with Jacket
3.2 Fitting Fiberglass Blanket
4 INSULATION THICKNESS
4.1 Pipe Size All
4.2 Thickness 1"
5 JACKETS
5.1 Pipe Integral to Insulation
5.2 Fittings Preformed PVC
5.3 Vapor-Retardant Yes
6 NOTES
6.1 Where pipe insulation is to be painted, install glass cloth jacket. Prior to finish paint, paint
with one coat of fire retardant, washable, white liquid plastic coating. Confirm
compatibility with finish paint prior to painting.
D&A#07103 15180-12 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE 8:
CHILLERS
CHILLED WATER PUMPS
1 Install insulation materials as designated in this schedule for system(s) listed.
2 LOCATION INSIDE
3 INSULATION MATERIAL Elastomeric
4 INSULATION THICKNESS 3/4"
5 JACKETS
5.1 Pipe
5.2 Fittings
5.3 Vapor-Retardant Yes
NOTES TO DESIGNER
- Chillers are usually factory insulated. Reference 15700 for clarification
- Chilled water pumps should have condensate catch pan piped to floor drain.
- Insulate as last resort only.
- Chilled water expansion tanks do not get insulated.
D&A#07103 15180-13 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE 9:
HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SUPPLY DUCTWORK
OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE DUCTWORK
1 Install insulation materials as designated in this schedule for system.
2 LOCATION INSIDE INSIDE INSIDE
3 INSULATION MATERIAL 3/4 lb. Flexible
Fiberglass
3 lb. Rigid
Fiberglass
Flexible
Elastomeric
4 INSULATION THICKNESS 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2"
5 JACKETS FSK FSK FSK
5.1 Vapor-Retardant Yes Yes Yes
6.0 NOTES
6.1 Use rigid or flexible elastomeric insulation in mechanical rooms. All other areas may be
flexible fiberglass.
6.2 Where ductwork is to be painted, install 3 lb. rigid insulation with glass cloth jacket. Paint
with one coat of fire retardant washable white liquid plastic coating. Confirm compatibility
with finish paint prior to painting.
6.3 Insulate outside air intake ductwork within building envelope. No need to insulate when
installed on outside of insulation barrier.
6.4 Insulate relief air plenums, ductwork, etc., from relief damper to a point where duct or
plenum enters unconditioned space.
6.5 Insulate ends of reheat coils including VAV box reheat coils in all applications where
heating coils are in air conditioning supply ductwork. Install vapor barrier over insulation
and seal water tight to adjacent insulation vapor barrier.
6.6 Externally insulate supply air slot diffuser plenums with flexible fiberglass.
D&A#07103 15180-14 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.0 EXECUTION (Continued) SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE 10:
RETURN AIR DUCTWORK
1 Install insulation materials as designated in this schedule for this system.
2 LOCATION SEE NOTES SEE NOTES SEE NOTES
3 INSULATION MATERIAL 3/4 lb.
Fiberglass
3 lb. Fiberglass Flexible
Elastomeric
4 INSULATION THICKNESS 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2"
5 JACKETS FSK FSK FSK
5.1 Vapor-Retardant No No No
6.0 NOTES
6.1 Insulate return air ductwork in unconditioned attics and in machine rooms.
D&A#07103 15180-15 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.2 EXAMINATION
3.2.1 Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
3.2.2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 PREPARATION
3.3.1 Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove
materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.4 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
3.4.1 All insulation that is to be painted shall be covered with glass cloth jacket unless
noted otherwise.
3.4.2 Apply insulation only after pipes, ducts and equipment have been tested and
cleaned.
3.4.3 Protect furniture, equipment, ducts, pipes, etc. with tarpaulins. Keep premises clean.
3.4.4 Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer’s
written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids
throughout the entire length.
3.4.5 Refer to schedules at the beginning of this Section for insulation materials and
thickness, jackets, and fittings required for each system. Unless otherwise indicated,
insulation shall be the same type throughout the same service.
3.4.6 Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket
in either wet or dry state.
3.4.7 Where insulation is applied on ducts, pipes and equipment which are against
columns, walls or other equipment without adequate space for insulation, finish off
insulation in workmanlike manner to meet approval of Engineer.
3.4.8 Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
3.4.9 Seal joints, seams and ends of insulation with vapor-retardant mastic on insulation
with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer on systems
indicated to receive a vapor retardant.
3.4.10 Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
3.4.11 Insulation shall be applied by craftsmen who are qualified to install insulation.
3.4.12 Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
D&A#07103 15180-16 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.4.13 Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
3.4.14 Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retardant integrity, on systems noted to have vapor-retardant jacket.
3.4.15 Provide removable sections of insulation or insulation boxes at all points where
access is required for servicing of equipment on systems not requiring vapor-
retardant jacket.
3.4.16 Exposed is defined to mean visible from working zones of finished building.
Concealed signifies opposite. Pipes and ducts above ceilings and in crawl tunnels
are considered to be concealed. Finished rooms are defined as office, workrooms,
instruction, store room areas, equipment rooms, walking tunnels, etc.
3.4.17 Aluminum jackets shall be installed in high traffic areas subject to damage.
3.4.18 On systems not requiring vapor-retardant, neatly bevel insulation at all flanges,
access cover plates, etc. so that bolts may be removed without disturbing insulation.
3.4.19 All hangers used on lines requiring insulation and vapor barrier shall have hangers
oversized and insulation cradles to allow insulation to pass thru hanger.
3.4.20 Cut insulation according to manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent
compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
3.4.21 Whenever Insulation Jacket is noted as Vapor Retardant: Overlap insulation facing at
seams a minimum of one inch and secure with pressure-sensitive tape or adhesive
as recommended by Manufacturer.
3.4.22 Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of
roof flashing.
3.4.23 Seal penetrations with vapor-retardant mastic.
3.4.24 Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3.4.25 Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retardant mastic.
3.4.26 Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls
and partitions.
3.4.27 Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retardants are
indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended
by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retardant.
3.4.28 Do not insulate over equipment and name plate data.
3.4.29 Seal all punctures in vapor retardant jacket with vapor-barrier adhesive on cooling
piping and air conditioning ducts.
3.4.30 Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer’s recommended coverage rate.
D&A#07103 15180-17 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.4.31 Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to item being insulated
unless specifically noted to do so.
3.5 DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
3.5.1 Blanket insulation application.
3.5.1.1 Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
3.5.1.1.1 Pull jacket tight and smooth.
3.5.1.1.2 Install anchor pins and speed washers to keep insulation from sagging when
duct width exceeds 22”.
3.5.1.1.3 Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retardant as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3.5.1.1.4 Vapor-Retardant Mastics: Where vapor retardants are indicated, apply mastic
on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
3.5.1.2 Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire-rated wall
and partition penetrations. Maintain vapor-retardant barrier.
3.5.1.3 Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at
floor support at top of floor. Provide vapor-retardant mastic on insulation
indicated to receive vapor-retardant.
3.5.2 Board and Block Insulation Application
3.5.2.1 Blankets, Board, and Block Applications: Secure insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins with speed washers.
3.5.2.1.1 Apply adhesives according to manufacturer’s recommended coverage rates
per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of surfaces to be insulated.
3.5.2.1.2 Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the
surfaces, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces
for tight joint. Stagger end joints.
3.5.2.1.3 Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
3.5.2.1.4 Install adhesive-attached or self-adhesive anchor pins and speed washers on
sides and bottoms of surfaces to be insulated as follows:
3.5.2.1.4.1 Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
3.5.2.1.4.2 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches
(400 mm) o.c. in both directions.
3.5.2.1.4.3 Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
D&A#07103 15180-18 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.5.2.1.4.4 Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sided and dome heads of
tanks and vessels.
3.5.2.2 Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
3.5.2.3 Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching
insulation facing.
3.5.2.4 Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands.
3.5.2.5 Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm).
3.5.2.6 Apply insulation in removable segments on access doors and other elements that
require removal for service.
3.5.2.7 Bevel and seal insulation ends around access panels, manholes, hand holes,
ASME stamps, and nameplates.
3.5.2.8 Apply vapor-retardant mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retardant.
3.5.3 Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications:
3.5.3.1 Apply insulation over entire surface to be insulated according to the
manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.5.3.2 Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer’s
recommended adhesive.
3.5.3.3 Seal longitudinal seams and end joints for Vapor Retardant installation.
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
3.6.1 Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation
with factory-applied jackets.
3.6.1.1 Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams
and joints.
3.6.1.2 Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of jacket
manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.
3.6.1.3 Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
3.7 PIPING APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
3.7.1 Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
3.7.1.1 Pull jacket tight and smooth.
D&A#07103 15180-19 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.7.1.2 Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material
as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches (100mm) o.c.
3.7.1.3 Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches (40 mm). Apply
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom pipe. Clean and dry surface to
receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at
4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3.7.1.3.1 Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor
retardant.
3.7.1.4 Vapor-Retardant Mastics: Where vapor retardants are indicated, apply mastic on
seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
3.7.1.5 At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal
voids with vapor-retardant mastic.
3.7.2 Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
3.7.2.1 Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments
of pipe insulation where scheduled. Secure according to manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3.7.2.2 Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a
thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with
wire, tape, or bands.
3.7.2.3 Apply jacket material overlapping seams at least 1 inch (25 mm) at each end.
Secure with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, attachments and
accessories. Seal seams with tape. Use vapor-retardant mastic on insulation
indicated to receive vapor-retardant.
3.7.3 Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
3.7.3.1 Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments
of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3.7.3.2 When pre-molded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to
allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange
insulation for access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3.7.3.3 Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.
Secure fitting covers with manufacturer’s attachments and accessories. Seal
seams with tape. Also, seal seams with vapor-retardant mastic on insulation
indicated to receive vapor-retardant.
3.7.3.4 On piping 3" and smaller, not requiring vapor-retardant, fittings may be insulated
with insulating cement equal in thickness to adjoining pipe insulation and
D&A#07103 15180-20 St. Christopher Church Phase III
troweled to smooth even finish. Do not insulate heating water pipe valves or
unions.
3.7.3.5 For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with
canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer.
3.7.4 Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly. Seal
insulation with vapor-retardant mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor-
retardant.
3.7.5 Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate
insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retardant
mastic.
3.7.6 Hangers and Anchors: All hangers used on lines requiring insulation shall have
hangers oversized and insulation support shield to allow insulation to pass
continuously thru hanger.
3.7.6.1 Install insert materials on all piping 1 1/2" and larger. Apply insulation to tightly
joint the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing
compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
3.7.6.2 Fabricate inserts of heavy density insulating material suitable for temperature.
Insulation inserts shall not be less than the following lengths:
1 1/2" to 2 1/2" pipe size 10" long
3" to 6" pipe size 12" long
8" to 10" pipe size 16" long
12" and over 22" long
3.7.6.3 Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the
hanger, support, and shield.
3.7.7 Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
3.7.7.1 Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
3.7.7.2 Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3.7.7.3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
3.7.7.4 Apply jacket material with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 2 inch (50 mm), and seal joints with vapor-retardant mastic.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15183-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15183
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections included
under Division 1, General Requirements, and Section 15050 of this Division are
included as a part of this Section as though bound herein.
1.1.2 Refer to Details, Schematics and Schedules on the Drawings for additional
requirements.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
1.2.1 Treatment materials
1.2.2 Equipment
1.3 SUMMARY
1.3.1 Provide the labor, chemicals, materials, equipment, appliances, services and
transportation, and perform the operations in connection with the construction and
installation of the Work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on the
accompanying Drawings.
1.3.2 Systems to receive treatment include:
1.3.2.1 Heating Water System
1.3.2.2 Chilled Water System
1.3.3 Work of this Section includes the following:
1.3.3.1 Cleaning of piping systems.
1.3.3.2 Chemical feeder equipment.
1.3.3.3 Treatment for closed systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Submit shop drawings indicating system schematics, equipment locations, and controls
schematics.
1.4.2 Submit product data indicating chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment.
1.4.3 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Division 1.
1.4.4 Submit reports indicating startup of treatment systems is completed and operating
properly.
D&A#07103 15183-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.4.5 Submit reports indicating analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment.
1.4.6 Operating and Maintenance Data
1.4.6.1 Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1.
1.4.6.2 Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other equipment including
spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs.
1.4.6.3 Include step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum 3 years experience. Company shall have local representatives
with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.
1.5.2 Conform to applicable EPA code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building
mechanical systems, and for delivery to public sewage systems.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
1.6.1 Maintenance Service
1.6.1.1 Furnish testing service, warranty, bag filter replacement and maintenance of
treatment systems or two years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.6.1.2 Furnish monthly technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water
analysis on site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating
requirements, and corrective actions needed. Submit two (2) copies of field service
report after each visit.
1.6.1.3 Furnish laboratory and technical assistance services for warranty period.
1.6.1.4 Include training course for operating personnel, instructing them on installation,
care, maintenance, testing and operating of water treatment systems. Arrange
course at startup of systems.
1.6.1.5 Furnish on site inspections of equipment during schedule or emergency shutdown to
properly evaluate success of water treatment based upon these inspections.
1.6.2 Maintenance Materials
1.6.2.1 Provide sufficient chemicals and corrosion coupons for treatment and testing during
warranty period.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE CONTRACTORS
2.1.1 Marathon
D&A#07103 15183-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.2 Atom Chemical, Inc.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.2.1 Mitco
2.2.2 Nalco
2.2.3 Betz-Entec
2.2.4 Marathon
2.3 TREATMENT MATERIALS
2.3.1 System Cleaner
2.3.1.1 Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease
and petroleum products.
2.3.2 Closed System Treatment (Water)
2.3.2.1 Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH.
2.3.2.2 Corrosion inhibitors.
2.4 EQUIPMENT
2.4.1 Shot feeder/bag filter: Unit shall be Marathon FTF-2. Supply one lot of 12 extra filters.
2.5 TEST EQUIPMENT
2.5.1 Provide white enamel test cabinet with local and fluorescent light, capable of
accommodating 4 to 10 ml zeroing titrating burettes and associated reagents.
2.5.2 Provide the following test kits:
2.5.2.1 Alkalinity titration test kit.
2.5.2.2 Total hardness titration test kit.
2.5.2.3 Low phosphate test kit.
2.5.2.4 Portable electronic conductivity meter.
2.5.2.5 High nitrate test kit.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Install feeder in a 2 valve bypass arrangement around circulating pump in order to
create a pressure differential. A 3/4 inch feeder lead-in line shall be taken from the
circulating line on the discharge side of the pump. A 3/4 inch feeder outlet line shall run
D&A#07103 15183-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
to the circulating line on the suction side of the pump. Feeder line shall be installed with
a line size shutoff valve and union connection on the shot feeder side of each valve.
3.1.2 The conductivity monitor, chemical feed pumps, and biocide timer shall be mounted on
a unistrut frame wall mounted bracketed shelf.
3.1.3 The chemical treatment systems shall be completely wired and ready to operate by the
time of the initial system start-up. The hydronic systems shall not be operated without
the proper chemical treatment specified in this section., Wiring of water meter and
solenoid back to controller shall be provided by Division 16 Contractor.
3.1.4 Install the make-up water meter, bleed valve and chemical injection nozzle(s) in the
proper location in the piping system.
3.1.5 The final flushing shall be witnessed by the Owner.
3.2 PREPARATION AND CLEANING PROCEDURES
3.2.1 Preparation
3.2.1.1 Systems shall be operational, filled, started and vented prior to cleaning. Use water
meter to record capacity in each system. Record the volume of water required to fill
all closed loop systems and report the amount to the Engineer in writing.
3.2.1.2 Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.
3.2.2 Cleaning Sequence
3.2.2.1 Remove and clean all existing strainers prior to start-up.
3.2.2.2 Circulate for 48 hours then drain systems as quickly as possible. Refill with clean
water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until
system cleaner is removed.
3.2.2.3 Flush open systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and
refill.
3.2.2.4 Remove, clean and replace strainer screens.
3.2.2.5 Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process
is completed. Include disassembly and reassembly of components as required.
3.2.3 Closed System Treatment and Cleaning
3.2.3.1 Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and
necessary piping. Install around valve downstream of circulating pumps unless
indicated otherwise.
3.2.3.2 Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or
indicated by test. System shall have 30 ppm to 60 ppm of molydate residual, after
testing.
D&A#07103 15183-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.2.3.3 Provide water meter in make-up piping to each closed system.
3.2.3.3.1 Water meters for closed loop heating and cooling systems will be furnished by
Brownsburg Water Utility for installation by the Mechanical Contractor.
3.2.3.3.2 Water meter for open loop cooling tower system shall be furnished and installed
by the Mechanical Contractor.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15400-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This section specifies plumbing fixtures, fixture carriers, stops and related components.
1.2.2 Related sections include the following:
1.2.2.1 15010 - General Provisions
1.2.2.2 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods
1.2.2.3 15060 - Pipe, Valves and Fittings
1.2.2.4 15180 – Insulation
1.2.2.5 Division 16 - Electrical Wiring and Connections
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Submit product data for each plumbing fixture and trim as required in Section 15010 -
General Provisions.
1.3.2 Submit maintenance data and maintenance manuals for each plumbing fixture including
information on adjusting, servicing, disassembly and an exploded view with part
numbers and repair instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets and other components of each
category through one source from a single manufacturer.
Exception: If components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar
products from other manufacturers specified for that category.
1.4.2 Electrical components, devices and accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
marked for intended use.
1.4.3 Comply with the following standards for plumbing fixtures:
1.4.3.1 Requirements in U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board’s
“Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187" about plumbing
fixtures for people with disabilities.
1.4.3.2 Hand Sinks NSF 2 Construction
1.4.3.3 Stainless Steel Fixtures other than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M
1.4.3.4 Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901
D&A#07103 15400-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.4.3.5 Lavatory and Sink Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M
1.4.3.6 Vitreous China Fixtures: ASME A122.19.2M
1.4.3.7 Off Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M
1.4.3.8 Water Closet Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5
1.4.3.9 Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5
1.4.3.10 Plastic Mop Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6
1.4.3.11 Backflow Prevention Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME
A112.18.3M
1.4.3.12 Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001
1.4.3.13 Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001
1.4.3.14 Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1
1.4.3.15 Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A122.18.1M
1.4.3.16 Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M
1.4.3.17 Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M
1.4.3.18 Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: 166 A117.1
1.5 COORDINATION
1.5.1 Coordinate rough-in and final locations of plumbing fixtures and components. Verify that
fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1.6.1 Protect fixtures and components from damage and corrosion.
1.6.2 Store fixtures and components indoors and maintain temperature higher than dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is approved in writing by the Owner and Engineer, store
fixtures off the ground in a watertight enclosure.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER CLOSET (WC-1) ADA ACCESSIBLE
2.1.1 Fixture: Vitreous china, wall hung, back-outlet, 17" high elongated bowl, siphon-jet
flushing action, 1-1/2" top spud designed for 1.6 gallons per flush.
2.1.2 Manufacturer: American Standard “Afwall” 2257.103; Kohler; Eljer; Crane; Briggs.
2.1.3 Flush Valve: Exposed diaphragm type, 1-1/2" top spud, ADA compliant metal oscillating
non-hold-open handle, 1" I.P.S. screwdriver angle check stop, vandal resistant stop
cover, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker flush connection, spud coupling, wall and
spud escutcheon, synthetic rubber diaphragm, handle packing, stop seat, and vacuum
breaker, designed for 1.6 gallons per flush.
2.1.4 Manufacturer: Sloan Regal Pro 111; Zurn.
2.2 LAVATORY (L-1) ADA ACCESSIBLE
2.2.1 Fixture: Vitreous china, 20" x 17" oval bowl, countertop mounted, self rimming, front
overflow, faucet ledge, 4" centers, template for counter cut and sealant.
D&A#07103 15400-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.2.2 Manufacturer: American Standard “Aqualyn” 0476.028; Kohler; Eljer; Crane; Briggs.
2.2.3 Faucet: Chrome plated brass, quarter turn ceramic disk cartridge, 4" centers, 2.0 GPM
aerator, lever handles with color coded index buttons, 4" spout.
2.2.4 Manufacturer: Chicago 802A-369-1-099XK; T&S Brass; Zurn.
2.2.5 Strainer and Tailpiece: Chrome plated cast brass, open grid drain strainer, cast brass
elbow, 1-1/4", 17-gauge tubular brass offset tailpiece.
2.2.6 Manufacturer: Sanitary Dash R7308; McGuire; Engineered Brass Company.
2.2.7 P-trap: Chrome plated adjustable cast brass, 1-1/4" trap with swivel joint, cleanout plug,
17-gauge tubing to wall, wall escutcheon.
2.2.8 Manufacturer: Sanitary Dash R367; McGuire; Engineered Brass Company.
2.2.9 Stops: Chrome plated brass angle stop, 1/2" I.P.S. inlet, 3/8" compression outlet, loose
key handle, 3/8" O.D. chrome plated flexible copper tube risers.
2.2.10 Manufacturer: Sanitary Dash HLSD020LK; McGuire; Engineered Brass Company.
2.3 SINGLE COMPARTMENT SACRARIUM SINK (SK-1)
2.3.1 Fixture: Fabricated of 304, (18-8) stainless steel, 18-gauge, 15" x 17 1/2" x 7 1/2" deep,
single compartment, 16-gauge stainless steel cover with cross and hinge on left side,
cylinder lock with two (2) keys, interior and top surfaces polished satin finish, 3-hole
punched, sound deadened, self rimming, template for counter cut.
2.3.2 Manufacturer: Elkay; Just.
2.3.3 Faucet: Cast brass concealed mount with chrome plated brass trim, quarter turn
ceramic disk cartridge, 8" centers, 2.0 GPM aerator, lever handles with color coded
index buttons, 9" spout.
2.3.4 Manufacturer: Chicago 201A-377XK; T&S Brass; Zurn.
2.3.5 Strainer and Tailpiece: type 304 stainless steel stamped drain outlet with 3” perforated
grid strainer and 1 ½” tailpiece.
2.3.6 Manufacturer: Elkay LK-18-B; Just.
2.3.7 P-trap: Chrome plated adjustable cast brass, 1-1/2" trap with swivel joint, cleanout plug,
17-gauge tubing to wall, wall escutcheon.
2.3.8 Manufacturer: Sanitary Dash R371; McGuire; Engineered Brass Company.
2.3.9 Stops: Chrome plated brass angle stop, 1/2" I.P.S. inlet, 3/8" compression outlet, wheel
handle, 3/8" O.D. chrome plated flexible copper tube risers.
2.3.10 Manufacturer: Sanitary Dash HLSD020; McGuire; Engineered Brass Company.
D&A#07103 15400-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.4 TWO COMPARTMENT SINK WITH DISPOSER (SK-2)
2.4.1 Fixture: Fabricated of 302, (18-8) stainless steel, 18-gauge, 33" x 22" x 8" deep, two
compartment, interior and top surfaces polished satin finish, 4-hole punched, sound
deadened, self-rimming, template for counter cut.
2.4.2 Manufacturer: Elkay LR-3322; Just.
2.4.3 Faucet: Cast brass concealed mount with chrome plated brass trim, swing spout with
integral spray and retractable hose, ceramic disk cartridge, escutcheon plate for three
hole installation, 2.2 GPM aerator, single lever handle.
2.4.4 Manufacturer: Kohler K-6352; American Standard.
2.4.5 Strainer and Tailpiece: Stainless steel crumb cup strainer with removable stainless steel
basket and rubber seat stopper, 1-1/2" chrome plated brass tailpiece.
2.4.6 Manufacturer: Elkay LK-35; Just.
2.4.7 P-trap: Chrome plated adjustable cast brass, 1-1/2" trap with swivel joint, cleanout plug,
17-gauge tubing to wall, wall escutcheon.
2.4.8 Manufacturer: Sanitary Dash R371; McGuire; Engineered Brass Company.
2.4.9 Stops: Chrome plated brass angle stop, 1/2" I.P.S. inlet, 3/8" compression outlet, wheel
handle, 3/8" O.D. chrome plated flexible copper tube risers.
2.4.10 Manufacturer: Sanitary Dash HLSD020; McGuire; Engineered Brass Company.
2.5 SINGLE COMPARTMENT SINK (SK-3) ADA ACCESSIBLE
2.5.1 Fixture: Fabricated of 302, (18-8) stainless steel, 18-gauge, 25" x 22" x 6-1/2" deep,
single compartment, interior and top surfaces polished satin finish, 3-hole punched,
sound deadened, self-rimming, template for counter cut, offset drain hole.
2.5.2 Manufacturer: Elkay LRAD-2522; Just.
2.5.3 Faucet: Cast brass concealed mount with chrome plated brass trim, quarter turn
ceramic disk cartridge, 8" centers, 2.0 GPM aerator, lever handles with color coded
index buttons, 9" spout.
2.5.4 Manufacturer: Chicago 201A-377XK; T&S Brass; Zurn.
2.5.5 Strainer and Tailpiece: Stainless steel crumb cup strainer with removable stainless steel
basket and rubber seat stopper, 1-1/2" chrome plated brass offset tailpiece.
2.5.6 Manufacturer: Elkay LKAD-35; Just.
2.5.7 P-trap: Chrome plated adjustable cast brass, 1-1/2" trap with swivel joint, cleanout plug,
17-gauge tubing to wall, wall escutcheon.
D&A#07103 15400-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.5.8 Manufacturer: Sanitary Dash R371; McGuire; Engineered Brass Company.
2.5.9 Stops: Chrome plated brass angle stop, 1/2" I.P.S. inlet, 3/8" compression outlet, loose
key handle, 3/8" O.D. chrome plated flexible copper tube risers.
2.5.10 Manufacturer: Sanitary Dash HLSD020LK; McGuire; Engineered Brass Company.
2.6 MOP SINK (MS-1)
2.6.1 Fixture: 24" x 24" x 10" deep molded stone basin, 3" I.P.S. cast brass drain with 16-
gauge stainless steel dome strainer and lint basket.
2.6.2 Manufacturer: Fiat MSB - 2424; Swan; Stern-Williams.
2.6.3 Faucet: Brass body, rough chrome finish, quarter turn ceramic disk cartridge, integral
stops, vacuum breaker spout with 3/4" hose thread, pail hook, wall support, lever
handles with color coded index buttons.
2.6.4 Manufacturer: Chicago 897-1-099XK; T&S Brass; Zurn.
2.6.5 Hose and Bracket: Stainless steel hose bracket, spring-loaded rubber grip, 30" long
flexible heavy duty 5/8" rubber hose.
2.6.6 Manufacturer: Fiat 832-AA; or approved equal.
2.6.7 Mop Hanger: Stainless steel mop hanger bracket, 24" long x 3" wide, 3-spring loaded
rubber grips.
2.6.8 Manufacturer: Fiat 899-CC; or approved equal.
2.7 HOSE BIB (HB-1)
2.7.1 Fixture: Brass body, wheel handle, wall flange, integral vacuum breaker to meet ASSE
1011 Standard, 3/4" inlet, 3/4" hose thread outlet, brass finish.
2.7.2 Manufacturer: Woodford Model 24; Acorn.
2.8 WALL HYDRANT (HYD-1)
2.8.1 Fixture: Brass body with chrome plated faceplate, stainless steel operating stem, anti-
siphon backflow preventer to meet ASSE 1011 standard, automatic draining, flush
installation, wall clamp, freeze proof design, loose key handle, 3/4" inlet, 3/4" hose
thread outlet.
2.8.2 Manufacturer: Woodford Model 65; J.R. Smith; Zurn; Watts; Wade; Josam.
D&A#07103 15400-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Verify actual rough-ins, locations, pipe connection sizes and fixture supports before
plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturers’ rough-in data if necessary.
3.1.2 Vitreous china fixtures to be Class A and white in color unless alternate color is
specified.
3.1.3 Exposed fixture metal and fittings shall be chrome plated brass.
3.1.4 Set fixtures level and plumb to walls, fasten securely in place. Joints formed where
fixtures come in contact with walls shall be caulked/sealed watertight.
3.1.5 Fixtures, faucets and components shall be protected by contractor until final
acceptance. Clean fixtures and trim before final inspection. Cracked, damaged or
scratched fixtures, trim and components shall be replaced by the contractor before final
acceptance.
3.1.6 Attach supplies to supports or building substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures to
prevent movement.
3.1.7 Set mop sinks in a leveling bed of cement grout.
3.1.8 Insulate water and drain stems of wall hydrants to prohibit electrolysis from occurring in
masonry wall construction.
3.1.9 Reference Specification Section 15060 for pressure testing and disinfecting of domestic
water system.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
3.2.1 Sizes of branch water pipe shall be not less than actual size of fixture connection.
3.2.2 Ground all electrical connections and devices, tighten electrical connectors and
terminals according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15410-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15410
DRAINAGE PRODUCTS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This section includes floor drains, roof drains, cleanouts and related components.
1.2.2 Related sections include the following:
1.2.2.1 15010 - General Provisions
1.2.2.2 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods
1.2.2.3 15060 - Pipe, Valves and Fittings
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Submit product data for each product specified as required in Section 15010 - General
Provisions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Source Limitations: Obtain floor drains, roof drains, cleanouts and components of each
category through one source from a single manufacturer.
Exception: If components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar
products from other manufacturers specified for that category.
1.4.2 Comply with the following standards for specified products:
1.4.2.1 Floor drains: ASME A112.21.1M
1.5 COORDINATION
1.5.1 Coordinate rough-in and final locations of floor drains, roof drains, cleanouts and
components. Verify that specified product can be installed to comply with original
design and referenced standards.
1.5.2 Floor drains and roof drains shall be same size as connected piping shown on drawings
unless otherwise noted.
1.5.3 Cleanouts shall be same size as connected piping shown on drawings up to a maximum
of 8" unless otherwise noted.
D&A#07103 15410-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1.6.1 Protect equipment and components from damage and corrosion.
1.6.2 Store equipment and components indoors and maintain temperature higher than dew-
point temperature. If outdoor storage is approved in writing by the Owner and Engineer,
store equipment off the ground in a watertight enclosure.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOOR DRAIN (FD-1)
2.1.1 Body: Cast iron, flashing collar, side spigot outlet, integral trap and cleanout, 4" water
seal.
2.1.2 Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
2.1.3 Strainer Type: Adjustable, round, flat.
2.1.4 Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 2041S-A; Zurn; Wade; Watts; Josam.
2.2 AREA DRAIN (AD-1)
2.2.1 Body: Cast iron, flashing collar, bottom no-hub outlet.
2.2.2 Strainer Finish: Galvanized cast iron.
2.2.3 Strainer Type: Adjustable, round, bar grate, “safe-set” sediment bucket.
2.2.4 Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 2350Y-G; Zurn; Wade; Watts; Josam.
2.3 CLEANOUT FOR VINYL TILE FLOOR (CO)
2.3.1 Cast iron body, round adjustable secured nickel bronze top with 1/8" tile recess, bronze
plug, gasket seal.
2.3.2 Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 4141S; Zurn; Wade; Watts; Josam.
2.4 CLEANOUT FOR TERRAZZO FLOOR (CO)
2.4.1 Cast iron body, round adjustable secured nickel bronze top with 1/2" terrazzo recess,
bronze plug, gasket seal.
2.4.2 Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 4181S; Zurn; Wade; Watts; Josam.
2.5 CLEANOUT FOR CARPET FLOOR (CO)
2.5.1 Cast iron body, round adjustable secured nickel bronze cover, carpet cleanout marker,
bronze plug, gasket seal.
2.5.2 Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 4021S-Y; Zurn; Wade; Watts; Josam.
D&A#07103 15410-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.6 CLEANOUT FOR UNFINISHED (CONCRETE) FLOOR (CO)
2.6.1 Cast iron body, round adjustable scoriated secured cast iron top, bronze plug, gasket
seal.
2.6.2 Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 4221S; Zurn; Wade; Watts; Josam.
2.7 EXTERIOR CLEANOUT (EXT CO)
2.7.1 Cast iron body, double flanged housing, heavy-duty secured scoriated cast iron cover
with lifting ring, bronze plug, gasket seal.
2.7.2 Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 4251S; Zurn; Wade; Watts; Josam.
2.8 WALL CLEANOUT (WCO)
2.8.1 Chrome plated bronze round frame and secured cover.
2.8.2 Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 4720; Zurn; Wade; Watts; Josam.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Locate cleanouts at the base of each riser.
3.1.2 Locate floor cleanouts on 50' intervals inside the building for up to 4" pipe size; 6" pipe
size and larger to have cleanouts on 100' intervals.
3.1.3 Locate exterior cleanouts every 100'.
3.1.4 Locate cleanouts in horizontal piping in every change of direction greater than 45o.
3.1.5 Reference Specification Section 15060 for pressure testing of sanitary, storm, and vent
piping.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15420-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15420
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This section specifies:
1.2.1.1 Air Admittance Valves
1.2.1.2 Backflow Preventers
1.2.1.3 Electric Water Heaters
1.2.1.4 Instantaneous Water Heaters
1.2.1.5 Sump Pumps
1.2.1.6 Thermostatic Mixing Valves
1.2.1.7 Water Hammer Arresters
1.2.2 Related sections include the following:
1.2.2.1 15010 - General Provisions
1.2.2.2 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods
1.2.2.3 15060 - Pipe, Valves and Fittings
1.2.2.4 15180 – Insulation
1.2.2.5 Division 16 - Electrical Wiring and Connections
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Submit product data for each product specified as required in Section 15010 - General
Provisions.
1.3.2 Submit maintenance data and maintenance manuals for each product specified
including information on adjusting, servicing, disassembly and an exploded view with
part numbers and repair instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Source Limitations: Obtain specified products and components of each category through
one source from a single manufacturer.
1.4.2 Electrical components, devices and accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
marked for intended use.
1.4.3 Comply with the following standards for listed equipment:
1.4.3.1 Air Admittance Valves: ASSE 1051, ASSE 1050.
D&A#07103 15420-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.4.3.2 Backflow Prevention Devices: ASSE1012, ASSE1013, ASSE1015, ASSE1001,
ASSE1011, AWWA C511, ASSE 1048, AWWA C510.
1.4.3.3 Electric Water Heaters: ASME.
1.4.3.4 Thermostatic Mixing Valves: ASSE 1017.
1.4.3.5 Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010.
1.4.4 Product Options:
1.4.4.1 Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and capacities based on
specific units indicated. Other manufacturers’ products complying with requirements
may be considered.
1.5 COORDINATION
1.5.1 Coordinate rough-in and final locations of equipment and components. Verify that
specified product can be installed to comply with original design and referenced
standards.
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1.6.1 Protect equipment and components from damage and corrosion.
1.6.2 Store equipment and components indoors and maintain temperature higher than
dewpoint temperature. If outdoor storage is approved in writing by the Owner and the
Engineer, store equipment off the ground in a watertight enclosure.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR ADMITTANCE VALVE
2.1.1 General
2.1.1.1 An air admittance valve is an acceptable means for temporarily venting plumbing
fixtures (i.e. to accommodate building construction phasing) but will not be allowed
to become a permanent part of the plumbing system.
2.1.1.2 The valve shall be located a minimum of 4” above the weir of the fixture trap and
where adequate air can enter the valve.
2.1.1.3 The valve shall be installed in the vertical, upright position only.
2.1.2 Manufacturer: Studor Mini-vent; or approved equal.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 Capacity: Size, location, capacity, and model as indicated on Drawings.
2.2.1.2 2 inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze body, threaded ends, in-line bronze ‘Y’ strainer.
D&A#07103 15420-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.2.2 Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: Suitable for continuous pressure application,
quarter turn ball valves on inlet and outlet, test cocks, pressure-differential relief valve
with air gap fitting located between two (2) positive-seating check valves, separate air
inlet and water relief channels into reduced pressure zone.
2.2.3 Manufacturers: Watts Regulator; Wilkins; Febco.
2.3 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
2.3.1 Capacity: Size, location, capacity, and model as indicated on Drawings.
2.3.2 Construction: Glass lined steel tank with enamel baked steel outer jacket.
2.3.3 Working pressure: 150 psig.
2.3.4 Tappings: Factory fabricated of material compatible with tank for pipe connections, relief
valve, pressure gauge, drain, anode rod and controls required.
2.3.5 Insulation: Foam insulation to comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire tank except
for connections and controls.
2.3.6 Heating Elements: Screw-in, immersion type.
2.3.7 Temperature Controls: Adjustable thermostat with overheat protection.
2.3.8 Anode Rod: Magnesium, factory installed, screw-in type.
2.3.9 Relief Valve: ASME temperature and pressure relief valve.
2.3.10 Warranty: 6 year limited warranty against failure due to corrosion, metal fatigue, or
overheating caused by the build-up of scale, film, or other sediment.
2.3.11 Manufacturers: A.O. Smith; State; Lochinvar; Bradford White.
2.4 SUMP PUMP
2.4.1 General
2.4.1.1 Provide a packaged duplex sump pump assembly complete with pumps, basin,
valves, control panel, floats, quick removal system, inter-connecting wiring, and all
other components necessary for an operational system.
2.4.1.2 Units to be factory assembled and tested prior to shipping.
2.4.1.3 Capacity: Size, location, capacity, and model as indicated on Drawings.
2.4.2 Submersible Sump Pump
2.4.2.1 Casing: Cast iron pump volute and motor housing with 3" N.P.T. discharge.
D&A#07103 15420-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.4.2.2 Impeller: Non-clogging, two-vane, cast iron threaded to shaft, capable of passing a
3/4" spherical solid.
2.4.2.3 Motor shaft: Stainless steel with permanently lubricated single row ball bearings.
2.4.2.4 Motor: Oil-filled, magnetic starter type with dual carbon and ceramic faced
mechanical shaft seals, seal failure sensor probe.
2.4.2.5 Controls: NEMA 250, Type I Enclosure, wall mounted, float switch with floats, rods,
rod buttons, and float guide pipe, automatic alternator with capacity for simultaneous
operation, high water alarm with local audio and visual indicators plus one (1) set of
dry contacts for remote alarm, disconnect switch, single point electrical connection.
2.4.3 Pump Discharge Piping
2.4.3.1 Factory fabricated, ASTM A53, Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, screwed or
flanged fittings; Schedule 40 PVC, solvent welded fittings.
2.4.4 Sump Pump Basin
2.4.4.1 Basin: Size as indicated on Drawings with integral anchor flange, bolted on inlet hub
(shipped loose for field installation), factory fabricated with sump, pipe connections
and cover.
2.4.4.2 Cover: Heavy gauge steel fabricated with gaskets, pump access ports, pump
shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
2.4.4.3 Quick-removal system: Complete package including guide rails, lifting chains,
break-away discharge flanges, and basin supports.
2.4.5 Valves
2.4.5.1 Shut-off valve: gate valve, 125 lb class, non-rising stem design; solid wedge disc,
bolted bonnet, flanged ends.
2.4.5.2 Check Valve: 125 lb class, bolted cap, flanged ends, non-shock design.
2.4.6 Manufacturer: Hydromatic, Weil, Meyers; Zoeller.
2.5 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE
2.5.1 Capacity: Size, location, capacity, and model as indicated on Drawings.
2.5.2 Flow rate: Standard flow design
2.5.3 Construction: Liquid filled thermal motor and piston control mechanism, integral check
stops, tamper resistant adjustable set point, positive shut-off in cold water failure,
bronze body construction with stainless steel trim, removable strainers, rough bronze
finish.
2.5.4 Manufacturer: Bradley; Lawler; Leonard; Powers; Symmons.
D&A#07103 15420-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
2.6.1 General
2.6.1.1 Install in upright position.
2.6.1.2 Arresters to be accessible. Provide access panels as required. Coordinate with
architectural drawings.
2.6.1.3 Install arrester at any fixture having quick-closing valves.
2.6.1.4 Capacity: Size, location, capacity, and model as indicated on Drawings.
2.6.2 Construction: Bellows type arrester with factory pressurized and sealed cushion
chamber.
2.6.3 Manufacturers: J.R. Smith; Zurn; Watts; Wade; Josam.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Install plumbing equipment and devices according to manufacturers written instructions.
3.1.2 Verify actual rough-ins, locations and pipe connection sizes before installing equipment
and devices.
3.1.3 Install floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete housekeeping pads.
3.1.4 Support piping so weight of pipe is not supported by equipment.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15500-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15500
FIRE PROTECTION
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 Provide a complete, wet pipe, automatic fire suppression sprinkler system for all areas
as required by code.
1.2.2 These drawings and specifications are the fire protection basic concept. If any other
items are required by code, they shall also be furnished and installed by this contractor.
1.2.3 The sprinkler system shall be hydraulically calculated, fully supervised, and installed
according to NFPA 13-1996, “Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems”.
1.2.4 The following articles reflect code requirements and/or design that would best aid the
emergency and maintenance services of the Owner in line with current policy and
practice. Systems shall be designed to protect the structure, contents and life safety of
the occupants in accordance with the appropriate Codes and Guidelines.
1.2.5 Related sections include the following:
1.2.5.1 15010 - General Provisions
1.2.5.2 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods
1.2.5.3 15060 - Pipe, Valves and Fittings
1.2.5.4 Division 16 - Electrical Wiring and Connections
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Submit product data for each product specified as required in Section 15010 - General
Provisions.
1.3.2 Submit fire protection system drawings and hydraulic calculations including:
1.3.2.1 Areas to be sprinkled, type of hazards, and hazard locations.
1.3.2.2 Size of water supply piping.
1.3.2.3 Type and locations of valves, drains and test pipes.
1.3.2.4 Alarm devices.
1.3.2.5 Riser diagrams.
1.3.2.6 Seismic restraints.
1.3.2.7 Fire department connections.
1.3.2.8 Location of electrical connections.
1.3.2.9 Coordination with other trades.
D&A#07103 15500-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.3.3 Submit maintenance data and maintenance manuals for each product specified
including:
1.3.3.1 As-built drawings.
1.3.3.2 Reviewed equipment drawings.
1.3.3.3 Detailed operating instructions for testing each system.
1.3.3.4 Parts lists and diagrams.
1.3.3.5 Test results including equipment operating data.
1.3.3.6 Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures.
1.3.3.7 Listing of government tests required.
1.3.3.8 Manufacturers’ equipment guarantees.
1.3.3.9 Listing of Inspector’s’ Test Stations with locations noted.
Note: When system tests are completed and system is accepted by Owner as
operable, the contractor shall give the Owner representative one copy of
instructions for operation of alarm systems, for resetting automatic valves,
and one set of keys for alarm cabinets. The O&M manuals are to be
submitted to the Owner with completed project submittals as a separate
package.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Source Limitations: Obtain specified products and components of each category through
one source from a single manufacturer.
Exception: If components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar
products from other manufacturers specified for that category.
1.4.2 Work shall be performed by a sprinkler contractor engaged in the sprinkler industry for a
minimum of five (5) years. Proof of experience must accompany request for payment.
1.4.3 Each item of equipment shall be capable of performing its function over an extended
period of time with a minimum of attention and maintenance. All equipment shall be
constructed using new materials designed and built in accordance with the best
practices of the industry. Each item of equipment shall be listed in the Factory Mutual
Approval Guide or be acceptable to FM. Each major item of equipment shall bear the
manufacturer's name or trademark, serial number and FM label. Operating instructions
and hydraulic temperature characteristic conditions, etc., shall be affixed, as applicable.
1.4.4 The equipment manufacturer shall have been engaged in the sprinkler industry for a
minimum of five (5) years. The standard manufactured product shall be as specified in
this section. All others must be pre-approved by the Mechanical Engineer. Equipment
and installation shall comply with the latest edition of NFPA 13-1996.
1.5 COORDINATION
1.5.1 Coordinate rough-in and final locations of equipment and components. Verify that
specified product can be installed to comply with original design and referenced
standards.
D&A#07103 15500-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.5.2 Flow test data indicated on drawings has been obtained from the local water company
and shall be considered preliminary. Contractor shall obtain a flow test to which the
hydraulic calculations will be based.
1.5.3 The routing of the water supply, sprinkler mains, etc., is a suggested method that has
been coordinated with mechanical, electrical, architectural, structural, and civil
designers. Contractor is responsible for final coordination, layout, and design.
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1.6.1 Protect equipment and components from damage and corrosion.
1.6.2 Store equipment and components indoors and maintain temperature higher than dew-
point temperature. If outdoor storage is approved in writing by the Owner and Engineer,
store equipment off the ground in a watertight enclosure.
1.7 CODES, STANDARDS AND RELATED DATA
1.7.1 Entire system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the following codes
and standards in addition to those appearing in Division 1 and Section 15010.
1.7.2 Owner’s insurance company requirements.
1.7.3 Standards of National Board of Fire Underwriters, as recommended by NFPA 13
(installation of sprinkler systems); 14 (standpipe and hose systems) and 24 (private fire
service mains).
1.7.4 Indiana Rating Bureau (IRB).
1.7.5 All State and Local Fire Codes.
1.7.6 State Fire Marshal.
1.7.7 IOSHA Safety and Environmental Standards and Guidelines.
1.7.8 Fire Apparatus Access Guidelines.
1.7.8.1 Contractors shall not block roads or walkways with vehicles, trailers, or materials in
such a manner as to prevent access by fire department trucks or fire department
personnel.
1.7.8.2 Contractors shall not block access to the perimeter of the building by parking
vehicles, setting equipment, or storing materials within five (5) feet of the building.
1.7.9 FM Fire Protection Sprinkler System Data Sheets.
1.7.10 Factory Mutual Engineering and Research (FM) Hydrant Test Data - FME&R data
entitled "Water Source Test Data", Index No. 55323.22, as a basis for design of the fire
protection system(s).
D&A#07103 15500-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.8 GUARANTEE
1.8.1 The contractor shall guarantee all equipment and materials free from inherent
mechanical defects for a period of one year from the date of installation. The
manufacturer shall furnish to the Owner a one-year contract from the date of the final
acceptance test for maintenance and inspection service of the installed equipment.
1.9 DEFINITIONS
1.9.1 Approved: Underwriters Laboratory, Factory Mutual listed, and meets criteria set forth in
NFPA code and Specifications.
1.9.2 Concealed Sprinkler Head: A fully recessed pendent sprinkler head with a decorative
trim plate flush mounted to the finished ceiling.
1.9.3 FM: Factory Mutual Engineering and Research.
1.9.4 IBV: Indicating butterfly valve.
1.9.5 IOSHA: Indiana Occupational Safety and Health Act.
1.9.6 NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (codes).
1.9.7 OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke (valve).
1.9.8 Pendant Sprinkler Head: Head installed vertically below feed main in such a way that
water is directed downward against the deflector.
1.9.9 UL: Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.9.10 Upright Sprinkler Head: Head installed off top of feed main in such a way that water is
directed upwards against the deflector.
1.9.11 Wet-Pipe System: Sprinkler system filled with water under pressure which immediately
discharges when a sprinkler head is activated.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, DRAINS
2.1.1 Piping shall be designed to provide proper protection in the specified areas. All piping
shall be identified by size on plans. Piping shall be arranged with proper spacing and
location of sprinklers, alarm devices, drains and test connections. Piping shall be
protected from damage by earthquakes per NFPA 13, 4-5.4.3, and FM 1-2, 1-2S, 2-8
and 2-8N. Sprinkler lateral piping shall be from top of mains. Sprinkler head piping
drops shall be from top of laterals.
2.1.2 FM approved hangers shall be properly spaced and sized. Hangers shall be indicated
on the working drawings as required by NFPA 13. All pipe hangers shall be installed
per FM 2-8N, 3-15. All sprinkler piping shall be supported from the building structure
D&A#07103 15500-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
which must support the added load of the water filled pipe, plus a minimum of 250
pounds applied at the point of hanging in accordance with NFPA 13.
2.1.3 Drains and drainage shall be designed according to NFPA 13, 3-6, 3-12.8 and FM "Fire
Safety Inspections and Sprinkler Maintenance, 2-81" and FM 2-8N, 3-11, 3-14. Building
plumbing drains used to drain fire protection systems shall be capable of handling a full
flow of water at 60 psi from a 2" pipe continuously for 5 minutes.
2.1.4 Thrust blocks shall be specified as required for underground piping per NFPA 24, A-8
and FM 3-10.
2.2 VALVES
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 All sprinkler control valves shall be installed per FM 2-8N, 2-7.4, and 3-14.
2.2.1.2 All valves shall be indicated on the preliminary and working drawings and identified
by size, type, and function.
2.2.1.3 Valves shall be same size as connected piping as shown on drawings unless
otherwise indicated.
2.2.2 GATE VALVE
2.2.2.1 OS&Y design, minimum working pressure of 175 psi, cast iron body, flanged ends,
bronze seating ring, bronze stem, cast iron disc with bronze disk ring, Buna-N ‘O’-
rings.
2.2.2.2 Manufacturer: Kennedy Valve 68 or equal.
2.2.3 BALL VALVE
2.2.3.1 Standard port end entry design, minimum working pressure of 300 psi, ductile iron
body and end cap (ASTM A-536), grooved ends, 316 stainless steel ball and stem,
virgin tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) seats, ductile iron actuator arm with steel lead
screw, integral open double pole/double throw tamper switch (15A at 125/250 VAC,
2.5A at 24 VDC).
2.2.3.2 Manufacturer: Victaulic Series 727 “Fire Ball” or equal.
2.2.4 BUTTERFLY VALVE
2.2.4.1 Minimum working pressure of 300 psi, ductile iron body (ASTM A-536), grooved
ends, ductile iron disk with EPDM coating, carbon steel switch housing and brackets
with zinc plating (ASTM B-633), ductile iron actuator arm with steel lead screw,
integral open double pole/double throw tamper switch (15A at 125/250 VAC, 2.5A at
24 VDC).
2.2.4.2 Manufacturer: Victaulic Series 705W or equal.
D&A#07103 15500-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3 SPRINKLER HEADS
2.3.1 General
2.3.1.1 Sprinklers shall be spaced, located, positioned, and identified by type on the working
drawings in accordance with NFPA 13. Sprinklers shall be installed in all areas in
accordance with the applicable codes, NFPA 13, and FM 2-8N, 4-2, 4-3, 4-4 and 4-
5.
2.3.1.2 Temperature ratings of all sprinklers shall be indicated on the working drawings.
2.3.1.3 Provide wire guards on heads below 7'-6" or in areas subject to physical damage.
2.3.1.4 Acceptable manufacturers:
2.3.1.4.1 Star Sprinkler Corporation
2.3.1.4.2 Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Company, Inc.
2.3.1.4.3 Viking Corporation
2.3.1.4.4 Victaulic Company of America
2.3.1.4.5 GEM Sprinkler
2.3.1.5 Provide spare sprinkler heads of each type used on the project in a wall mounted
metal cabinet as required by NFPA.
2.3.1.6 Center heads both ways in 2'x2' ceiling grids and in the 2' dimension of 2'x4' grids.
Coordinate with other trades for locations of ceiling mounted items.
2.3.1.7 Coverplates and escutcheons shall be protected during construction against
scratches, dents, overspray, etc. Any damaged items shall be replaced at the
Contractors expense. Under no circumstances shall sprinkler heads, escutcheons,
or coverplates be field painted.
2.3.2 UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD
2.3.2.1 Rough brass finish, quick-response (light hazard), standard response (ordinary
hazard), extended coverage (Contractor’s option).
2.3.2.2 Manufacturer: Reliable GFR (quick response, standard coverage), Reliable G
(standard response, standard coverage), Reliable GFR-VELO-ECOH (standard
response, extended coverage) or equal.
2.3.3 PENDENT SPRINKLER HEAD
2.3.3.1 Recessed glass bulb design, chrome plated head and escutcheon
2.3.3.2 Manufacturer: Reliable F1FR (standard coverage), Reliable F1FR-QREC (extended
coverage) or equal.
2.3.4 SIDEWALL SPRINKLER HEAD
2.3.4.1 Recessed glass bulb design, chrome plated head and escutcheon
D&A#07103 15500-7 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3.4.2 Manufacturer: Reliable F1FR (standard coverage), Reliable F1FR-QREC-EC-9
(extended coverage) or equal.
2.3.5 CONCEALED SPRINKLER HEAD
2.3.5.1 Fully recessed design finished flush with ceiling, brass head with factory painted
coverplate white in color, quick-response, extended coverage (Contractor’s option).
2.3.5.2 Manufacturer: Reliable G4A (standard coverage), Reliable G4-XLO-QREC/EC
(extended coverage) or equal.
2.4 ALARM AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES
2.4.1 General
2.4.1.1 Sprinkler alarms shall meet the requirements of FM 2-8N, 3-17.
2.4.1.2 The outdoor audible alarm shall be located at the nearest fire department
connection (siamese) and in no case further than 25 feet away and on the same
wall. The standard notification sign shall be located on or adjacent to the alarm.
2.4.2 FLOW SWITCH
2.4.2.1 A flow switch shall be located on branches of the system piping to allow alarm and
annunciation of different floors and/or zones. An approved test drain as specified
shall be provided for each water flow switch. Retard timing shall be as directed by
FM guidelines and/or the Owner to prevent nuisance trips. Activation of any flow
switch shall cause the buildings fire alarm system to be activated.
2.4.2.2 Flow devices shall be provided and installed by the Sprinkler Contractor and shall be
connected by Division 16 Contractor per Fire Alarm Equipment Supplier
requirements. In addition, activation of the main water flow device shall cause the
outside bell to sound. Power for the outside bell shall be from an emergency power
panel. This bell shall be provided by the Sprinkler Contractor and installed by the
Division 16 Contractor.
2.4.2.3 Flow switch shall be vane type with adjustable retard, rated for horizontal and
vertical installations, 10A at 125/250 VAC, 2A at 24 VDC.
2.4.2.4 Manufacturer: Potter VSR-F, Grinnell, Notifier.
2.4.3 TAMPER SWITCH
2.4.3.1 All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers, including but not limited to PIV, pit
valve(s), OS&Y(s) and control valves to fire department hose connections, shall be
equipped with supervisory devices (tamper switches) and be electrically connected
to the building's fire alarm system supervisory control.
D&A#07103 15500-8 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.4.3.2 Supervisory devices shall be provided and installed by the Sprinkler Contractor and
connected by the Division 16 Contractor to the fire alarm system per fire alarm
equipment supplier requirements.
2.4.3.3 Tamper switch shall be installed without interfering the normal operation of the
valve, 15A at 125/250 VAC, 2.5A at 24 VDC.
2.4.3.4 Manufacturer: Potter OSYSU-A, Grinnell, Notifier.
2.5 INSPECTOR'S TEST STATIONS
2.5.1 Inspector's test stations to be designed per latest version of NFPA 13.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Burial depth: Minimum depth of exterior fire protection piping shall be 5'-0".
3.1.2 Sprinkler piping that passes through a non-sprinkled area shall be adequately protected
as required by NFPA 13.
3.1.3 Do not route any piping over electrical panels, transformers, or other equipment
requiring a clear space above per NEC and NFPA Codes.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15700-1 St. Christopher Church Phase II
SECTION 15700
LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This section includes all Equipment and Installation guidelines specific to Liquid Heat
Transfer Equipment and Systems.
1.2.2 Systems requiring work include the following:
1.2.2.1 Chilled Water
1.2.2.2 Heating Water
1.2.3 Equipment being supplied and installed in this contract includes but is not limited to
the following:
1.2.3.1 Air Separator (AS)
1.2.3.2 Air Vents
1.2.3.3 Boiler - Modulating Gas Fired Condensing
1.2.3.4 Central Station Air Conditioner (AHU)
1.2.3.5 Chiller – Air Cooled With Remote Evaporator
1.2.3.6 Expansion Tank (ET)
1.2.3.7 Expansion Tank Fitting
1.2.3.8 Heater - Cabinet Unit Heater (CUH)
1.2.3.9 Heater - Hydronic Propeller Unit Heater (PUH)
1.2.3.10 Pump – Close Coupled - End Suction
1.2.3.11 Pump Trim - Suction Diffuser
1.2.3.12 Shot Feeder
1.2.3.13 Valve - Automatic Make-Up for Closed Loop (MUV)
1.2.3.14 Valve - Flow Control (FCV)
1.2.4 Related Sections Include but are not limited to the following:
1.2.4.1 15010 General Provisions
1.2.4.2 15050 Basic Materials and Methods
1.2.4.3 15060 Pipe Valve and Fittings
1.2.4.4 15180 Insulation
1.2.4.5 15700 Liquid Heat Transfer
1.2.4.6 15975 Temperature Controls
D&A#07103 15700-2 St. Christopher Church Phase II
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Submit product data for equipment and specialties as noted in Section 15010, “Shop
Drawings”.
1.3.2 Product data shall include pressure and temperature ratings and drops, model
numbers, material types, actuators, trim, motor type and all pertinent data as
required for complete evaluation by Engineer. Submittals shall show conformance
with schedules, data and these specifications.
1.3.3 Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for unpacking, rigging, installation and
start-up.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
three (3) years.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.5.1 Prepare for shipping as follows:
1.5.1.1 Protect all parts against rust, corrosion and from road salt spray, etc.
1.5.1.2 Block all spring mounted devices.
1.5.1.3 Cover all equipment water tight.
1.5.1.4 Secure all devices to eliminate shifting during shipment.
1.5.2 Use the following precautions during storage:
1.5.2.1 Maintain protection over all openings.
1.5.2.2 Store indoors and maintain equipment temperature higher than ambient dew-
point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store equipment off the
ground in watertight enclosures.
1.5.3 Rig equipment to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use parts not intended for
such as lifting or rigging points.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR SEPARATOR (AS)
2.1.1 Capacity, size and arrangement shall be as shown on Drawings.
2.1.2 Unit shall be a turbulence suppressive type of air eliminator to separate
microbubbles and to remove stationary air pockets through absorption.
2.1.3 Maximum allowable water velocity through the unit of 4 ft per second with a pressure
drop of less than 2 ft of head.
D&A#07103 15700-3 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.1.4 Unit construction as follows:
2.1.4.1 Mild steel housing.
2.1.4.2 Inlet and outlet 2" and smaller, NPT connections; 2 1/2" and larger, flanged
connections.
2.1.4.3 Copper tubing inside of housing.
2.1.4.4 Venting connection on top of housing.
2.1.4.5 Threaded blowdown port on bottom of housing.
2.1.4.6 Stainless steel strainer with 3/16" holes.
2.1.5 Unit constructed in accordance with Section VIII of ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code and rated for 150 psi working pressure and 270°F.
2.1.6 Manufacturers:
2.1.6.1 Bell & Gossett
2.1.6.2 Taco
2.1.6.3 Amtrol
2.2 AIR VENTS
2.2.1 Furnish and install vents where shown and at each high trapped point in closed
water systems, each coil, unit heater, piece of radiation and where otherwise
required to properly expel air from systems. Pipe air vent outlet to floor drain, drip
pan, open-site drain, etc.
2.2.2 Main and Riser Vents: vents for venting mains, branches and risers to have heavy
duty cast iron body, seamless copper float and stainless steel or bronze trim.
2.2.2.1 Manufacturers: McAlear 797; Fisher 30; Crispin Midget; Warren 329; Apco 65;
Sarco 13W.
2.2.2.2 Outlets of vents piped to nearest floor drain, janitor's sink, open-site drain, etc.
2.2.3 Branch and Equipment Vents: (Coils, Unit Heaters, Cooling Units, etc.)
2.2.3.1 Vents to have drawn brass body with nickel trim and tapped at top for 1/4" drain
connection.
2.2.3.2 Vent outlets to be piped to nearest floor drain, janitor's sink, open-site drain, etc.
2.2.3.3 Valves to be: Hoffman 79; Taco 424; Dole 75; Bell & Gossett 7; Marsh 50.
2.2.4 Manual Vents: pipe air chamber with 1/4" brass pet cock. Crane 708; Powell 917;
Lunkenheimer 174.
D&A#07103 15700-4 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.3 BOILER - MODULATING GAS FIRED CONDENSING
2.3.1 Capacity, mounting arrangement, electrical characteristics and installation shall be
as shown on the Drawings.
2.3.2 Furnish and install as shown on the Drawings in accordance with all codes and
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3.3 Boilers shall be UL/FM approved and labeled.
2.3.4 Boiler Construction
2.3.4.1 Boiler modules shall be of gas-fired, condensing fire tube design with a
modulating power burner and positive pressure discharge. Each boiler shall be
capable of 5:1 turndown of firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency. Heat
exchanger/combustion chamber shall incorporate a helical fire tube design that
will be self supporting, baffle free, and warranted to withstand thermal shock.
Heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure of not less than
150 psig. Unit shall have an ASME approved relief valve with a setting of 50
psig. Exhaust manifold shall be of corrosion resistant porcelain enameled cast
iron, with a 6" diameter flue connection. Exhaust manifold shall have a gravity
drain for the elimination of condensation with collecting reservoir. Contractor
responsible for piping condensation to floor drain.
2.3.4.2 The flame monitoring system shall incorporate a U/L recognized combustion
safeguard system utilizing interrupted spark ignition and a rectification type flame
sensor. An electro-hydraulic double seated safety shutoff valve shall be an
inherent part of the gas train.
2.3.4.3 Each boiler module shall incorporate electric probe type low water cutoff and dual
over temperature protection including a manual reset in accordance with ASME
Section IV and CSD-1. Remote fault alarm contacts, sensor failure detection and
auxiliary contacts shall be standard equipment. Boilers shall operate on 120V,
single phase, 60Hz.
2.3.5 Installation
2.3.5.1 All aspects of the boiler plant installation shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Materials shall conform with all manufacturer’s
recommendations (and shall include a Stainless Steel AL-29-4C Positive
Pressure U/L Listed Vent System by others). Boiler piping shall be field
constructed of materials as specified and in the arrangement shown on the
Drawings and as required by the manufacturer.
2.3.6 Mode of Operation
2.3.6.1 Boiler manufacturer shall supply as part of boiler package a completely
integrated manufacturer’s Boiler Management System to control all operation and
energy input of the multiple boiler system. The system shall be comprised of a
microprocessor based control utilizing pulse width modulation for bumpless
D&A#07103 15700-5 St. Christopher Church Phase II
transfer of header temperature and sequential firing. The controller shall have
the ability to vary each individual module input throughout its full range to
maximize the condensing capability of the module and the entire plant without
header temperature swings. The controller shall be PID type for accurate
temperature control with excellent frequency response. BAS shall provide
contact closure for automatic adjustable heat start circuit for plant activation and
have contact closure for auxiliary equipment such as pumps.
2.3.6.2 The BAS will operate plant to vary header temperature setpoint linearly as an
externally applied 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal is applied. Units shall operate
inversely with an Inverse Efficiency Curve, with known Part Load Value
Efficiencies. Maximum efficiency shall be achieved at minimum firing input.
Main header outlet temperature shall not be more than +/- 2o F from setpoint at
any point of operation. The controller shall have LCD display for monitoring of all
sensors and interlocks. Non-volatile backup of all control setpoints shall be
internally provided as standard. Control will automatically balance operating time
on each module by a first on-first off mode and provide for setback and remote
alarms contacts. Connection between central BAS system and individual
modules shall be twisted pair low voltage wiring to internal terminal strips for
easy installation.
2.3.7 Warranty
2.3.7.1 The pressure vessel of boiler(s) shall carry an unconditional, non-prorated 10
year warranty against leakage due to defective materials or workmanship. The
heat exchanger tubes/combustion chamber assembly shall be warranted against
failure due to thermal stress failure or condensate corrosion for a five year
period. Warranty shall include all factory recommended maintenance. A
Warranty Certificate must be issued to the Owner form the manufacturer and a
copy of warranty submitted for Engineer’s approval.
2.3.8 Field Services
2.3.8.1 Contractor shall provide the services of a local factory authorize representative to
supervise all phases of equipment start-up. A letter of compliance with all factory
recommendations and installation instructions shall be submitted to Engineer
with operation and maintenance instructions.
2.3.9 Manufacturers
2.3.9.1 AERCO
2.3.9.2 Viessmann
2.3.9.3 PVI, Riverside
2.4 CENTRAL STATION AIR CONDITIONER (AHU)
2.4.1 Unit Casing
2.4.1.1 Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with removable panels. Removal
of side panels must not affect the structural integrity of each module. The casing
must be able to withstand up to six-inches positive or four-inches negative static
D&A#07103 15700-6 St. Christopher Church Phase II
pressure. All exterior wall panels shall be made of minimum 18 gauge G90
galvanized steel. Closed-cell foam gasketing shall be utilized where modules are
joined. Unit casing shall be double-wall with smooth galvanized steel interior
liner.
2.4.1.2 Units shall have an insulated, double wall stainless steel drain pan under cooling
coil for drainage of condensate. Drain connections are to be provided on one
side of the unit. Pans pitched to outlet.
2.4.1.3 Full sized, hinged, removable double-wall access doors with two step safety
handles shall be provided for quick access to the interior of the unit casing.
Doors attached by screws, or doors not continuously gasketed are not
acceptable.
2.4.2 Insulation
2.4.2.1 Complete unit including fan, access, coil and filter sections shall be factory
insulated with 2", 1-1/2 pound density insulation. All connecting channels shall
be insulated to prevent sweating.
2.4.3 Filter Section
2.4.3.1 Filter media shall be a multi-layer 100% polyester fiber. The media shall contain
a flame retardant binder as well as an anti-microbial agent that inhibits the growth
of mold, mildew, algae and bacteria. The agent shall be an integral part of the
media and shall have both USDA and FDA approval.
2.4.4 Prefilters - (Flat Filter Section)
2.4.4.1 Prefilters shall be 2” thick pleated and be 30% efficient as determined by
ASHRAE 52-76.
2.4.5 Final Filters (Angled Filter Section)
2.4.5.1 Final filters shall be 4” thick pleated and be 65% efficient as determined by
ASHRAE 52-76.
2.4.5.2 Prefilters and final filters shall be secured so that filters are removed individually
by a worker inside the unit from the upstream side (front loading) or from the
sides of the unit.
2.4.5.3 Blank-off around filters shall be airtight. Include filter sizes and quantities in
submittals.
2.4.6 Filter Gage
2.4.6.1 Provide filter gage for measuring resistance to air flow through filters for each
filter bank.
2.4.6.2 The gage shall be diaphragm actuated with pointer zero adjustment, signal flag,
and 3-7/8" dia white dial.
D&A#07103 15700-7 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.4.6.3 Filter gage shall be mounted on unit housing at each filter bank approximately 5'-
0" above finished floor.
2.4.6.4 Filter gage range shall be 0'-2" water like Dwyer Model 2001.
2.4.7 Motors
2.4.7.1 Motors shall be mounted integral to a spring isolated fan assembly furnished by
the unit manufacturer. Motors shall be mounted inside the unit casing, and
mounted on a slide base to permit adjustment of drive belt tension. Motors shall
be VFD rated.
2.4.7.2 Motors shall be "T" frame. Reference Section 15050 for motor specifications.
2.4.8 Drives
2.4.8.1 Drives shall be selected at 1.5 service factor.
2.4.8.2 Plans show CFM at estimated static. Balance contractor shall provide sheaves
for desired CFM at actual static as required at 100% motor RPM as directed by
balance contractor.
2.4.9 Coils
2.4.9.1 Coil arrangement shall be as shown on drawings. Cooling coils shall have non
ferrous header option. Provide stainless steel drain pan for cooling coils.
2.4.10 Fans
2.4.10.1 Fans shall be air foil / backward inclined, plug fan as shown on Central Station
Air Conditioners schedule on drawings.
2.4.10.2 Housed fan performance shall be certified as complying with ARI Standard 430-
89. Centrifugal fans shall be dynamically balanced at the factory as a complete
fan assembly (fan wheel, motor, drive and belts). Fan shafts shall not exceed 75
percent of their first critical speed at any cataloged rpm.
2.4.10.3 Fans shall be equipped with self-aligning anti-friction pillow block bearings with a
minimum life of L-50 200,000 hours. Bearings shall be equipped with grease
lines allowing for lubrication from one side of the fan.
2.4.10.4 Fan and motor assembly shall be internally isolated from unit casing with spring
isolators, furnished and installed by unit manufacturer. Fan scroll shall be
attached to the unit casing by a flexible canvas duct.
2.4.10.5 Grease lines from both fan bearings shall be extended to the fan support bracket
on the drive side adjacent to access door.
2.4.10.6 The drive side shall always be on same side as fan section access door.
D&A#07103 15700-8 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.4.10.7 The access door in the fan section shall have 10" square viewing port of double
pane safety glass.
2.4.11 Access Doors
2.4.11.1 Provide access doors as shown on drawings.
2.4.11.2 Access doors shall be removable, hinged, fully gasketed, double wall
construction similar to the module in which it is located.
2.4.11.3 Provide minimum 10" square viewing port of double pane safety glass where
shown on drawings.
2.4.11.4 Access doors shall comply with previously described leakage test when closed in
the normal fashion.
2.4.11.5 Access doors shall open against the static pressure of the section in which it is
located, i.e., open inward downstream of fan and opener outward upstream of
fan.
2.4.12 Manufacturer of unit supplied other than first named shall verify unit will fit in
allocated space. Access to sections must be maintained.
2.4.13 Discharge Plenum - Provide discharge plenum where shown on drawings. Sheet
metal contractor shall be required for all openings required.
2.4.14 Lights
2.4.14.1 Factory Mounted Marine Lights (enclosed and gasketed) shall be provided where
indicated on drawings and in each fan section. Conduit, junction box, switch,
globe, receptacle and bulb shall all be included. Devices shall be completely
wired for one single point Electrical connection. All lights operable from a single
pull switch mounted outside the unit.
2.4.15 Manufacturers:
2.4.15.1 Carrier
2.4.15.2 Trane
2.4.15.3 York
2.5 CHILLER – AIR COOLED WITH REMOTE EVAPORATOR BARREL
2.5.1 Capacity and electrical characteristics as noted on Drawings.
2.5.2 Refrigerant circuit dehydrated, purged and charged with oil and nitrogen at factory.
Refrigerant will be R-410A, R134A or R407C.
2.5.3 Compressor to be scroll type or direct driven semi-hermetic rotary screw type.
Compressor to start unloaded and have at least three stages of capacity reduction.
Compressor lubricated with forced feed lubrication system and pressure regulator.
D&A#07103 15700-9 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.5.4 Evaporator direct expansion shell, Z circuit tube type with BWG copper tubes rolled
and expanded into steel tube sheets with carbon steel shell. Refrigerant shall flow
inside tubes and water in shell. Evaporator shell tapped for water supply, return,
drain, vent and water temperature controlled and freeze protection controller
connections into shell.
2.5.5 Evaporator constructed and tested in accordance with ASME Unfired Pressure
Vessel Code and bear ASME stamp. Evaporators to have working pressure of 300
psig on refrigerant side and 215 psig on water side.
2.5.6 Evaporator factory insulated with 3/4" Armaflex II, Suction line factory insulated.
2.5.7 Two Refrigeration circuits each to include refrigerant expansion valves, oil separator,
filter dryer, moisture indicator sight glass, electronic expansion valves, charging
valve, relief valves, liquid strainer, liquid shutoff valve at condenser, suction shutoff
and discharge gas shutoff valves at compressor.
2.5.8 Air Cooled Condensing Unit shall be supplied by this manufacturer and sized along
with evaporator to provide capacity as noted on drawings.
2.5.9 Chiller mounted on 4" high concrete pad furnished by Mechanical Contractor.
2.5.10 Controls
2.5.10.1 All controls, including sensors, are factory mounted and tested prior to shipment.
Control power provided by integral transformer to provide all control power
required. All catalogued units are UL listed. Direct digital controls provide all
control functions including start-up and shut down, leaving chilled water
temperature control, compressor and electronic expansion valve modulation,
anti-recycle logic, automatic lead/lag compressor starting, load limiting and fan
staging. The controller also to provide control outputs for the chilled water pump.
2.5.10.2 The unit control module, utilizing Adaptive Control microprocessor automatically
takes action to avoid unit shutdown due to abnormal temperature, and motor
current overload. Should the abnormal operating condition until a protective limit
is isolated, the unit will be shut down.
2.5.10.3 Unit protective functions include loss of chilled water flow (flow switch by TCC),
evaporator freezing, low refrigerant pressure, reverse rotation, compressor
starting and running over current, phase loss, phase imbalance, phase reversal,
and loss of oil flow. Unit shall automatically reset upon loss of power.
2.5.10.4 Controls package also to include digital cycle counters and hour meters for each
compressor, under/over voltage protection, remote alarm contacts, compressor
run indication contacts, maximum capacity contacts, percent volts display, and a
percent rated amps (each compressor) display.
2.5.10.5 A menu driven, digital display to provide a full array of operating conditions and
diagnostic readouts.
2.5.11 Starter
D&A#07103 15700-10 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.5.11.1 Wye-Delta closed transition starter.
2.5.12 Manufacturer:
2.5.12.1 Carrier
2.5.12.2 Trane
2.5.12.3 York
2.6 EXPANSION TANK (ET)
2.6.1 Furnish and install tanks constructed of welded steel for 125# working pressure in
accordance with ASME stamp.
2.6.2 Tanks tapped for inlet connection on bottom and air charging connection on top.
2.6.3 Tank and tappings sized as shown.
2.6.4 Tanks equipped with high quality valved gauge glass.
2.6.5 Gauge glass gasketing made of neoprene or other material which will not shrink
upon drying.
2.6.6 Manufacturers:
2.6.6.1 Bell Gossett
2.6.6.2 TACO
2.6.6.2.1 Amtrol
2.7 EXPANSION TANK FITTING
2.7.1 Furnish and install at the inlet of each expansion tank a fitting to separate air and to
control water flow to and from the tank.
2.7.2 The actual tank charging and draining shall not be done with these fittings, but shall
be done with a valved drain line and a valved air line as shown on Drawings.
2.7.3 Tank fitting for tanks 24" diameter and smaller shall be Bell & Gossett Type ATF.
2.7.4 Tank fitting for tanks larger than 24" diameter shall be Bell & Gossett Type AFTFL.
2.8 HEATER - HYDRONIC PROPELLER UNIT HEATER (PUH)
2.8.1 Unit heater capacity, heating medium, motor size, rpm and mounting type as shown
on Drawings. Capacity rating based on 60` entering air.
2.8.2 Coils suitable for steam or water service and constructed with non-ferrous fins
securely bonded to seamless copper tubing. Coils leak tested with 150 psi air
pressure and suitable for service using heating medium shown on Drawings.
D&A#07103 15700-11 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.8.3 Casings of heavy gauge steel fitted with threaded hanger rod connections,
bonderized and painted with finished enamel at the factory.
2.8.4 Propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced and vibration-free. Fan blades of
heavy gauge construction.
2.8.5 Fan motors mounted in rubber to prevent vibration transfer. Motors located in
airstream shall be totally enclosed. Open motors used where protected from
airstream.
2.8.6 Horizontal throw unit heaters to have double deflection discharge louvers. Vertical
throw unit heaters shall have adjustable vane discharge louvers.
2.8.7 Manufacturers:
2.8.7.1 Trane
2.8.7.2 Sterling
2.8.7.3 approved equal
2.9 PUMP - CLOSE COUPLED - END SUCTION
2.9.1 Capacity, head, rpm, motor size, electrical characteristics, mounting arrangement as
shown on Drawings.
2.9.2 Type CC pumps to have pump body mounted on motor end bell and to be single
stage, end suction.
2.9.3 Casing or Volute: close grained Class 35 cast iron with smooth waterway - designed
for 1-1/2 times the working pressure but not less than 175 psig. Casing to have
tapped drain port at bottom of casing. Suction and discharge flanges to have
pressure tappings for pump performance verification.
2.9.4 Impeller: cast-bronze, enclosed type, statically and dynamically balanced, non-
overloading centrifugal volute, keyed to shaft.
2.9.5 Wearing Ring: bronze, back-plate, gray iron.
2.9.6 Motor/Pump Shaft: on small sizes 416 stainless steel; on large sizes carbon steel
with stainless steel shaft sleeve.
2.9.7 Pump Shaft Seal: removable mechanical seal to be constructed in accordance with
seal manufacturer's published recommendations for service requirements
encountered considering temperature, pressure, liquid, and flash point of liquid.
2.9.8 Pump Base: all chilled water pumps to have drain base. Division 15 shall furnish and
install full tapping. Install pipe from pumps with drain base to floor drain.
2.9.9 Pump constructed so motor and rotating parts can be removed without removing
pump casing from piping.
D&A#07103 15700-12 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.9.10 Motor: to be heavy duty, greasable ball bearing, open drip-proof. Reference
drawings for VFD service. See Section 15050 - Motors for Motor Performance.
Motor sized for continuous operation without undue heating or overload.
2.9.11 Pump shall not be run until system is filled with water. Division 15 shall give
particular notice of this to Division 16 who may desire to check motor rotation.
2.9.12 Manufacturers:
2.9.12.1 TACO CE
2.9.12.2 Bell & Gossett Series 1531
2.9.12.3 Peerless
2.10 PUMP TRIM - SUCTION DIFFUSER
2.10.1 Cast iron construction rated at 175 psi at 250o F.
2.10.2 125 ANSI flanges.
2.10.3 90o entrance elbow with integral flow straightening devices. Flow straightening
devices shall be of cast iron construction and shall be cast as integral part of suction
diffuser.
2.10.4 Bottom drain/blowdown connection. Pipe same size as connection to floor drain.
Provide full port ball valve in pipe.
2.10.5 Strainer
2.10.5.1 Fine mesh brass startup strainer.
2.10.5.2 Stainless steel 1/8" hole permanent strainer.
2.10.6 Sized for maximum 3 ft head pressure drop. Use increaser to upsize if required to
meet pressure drop requirements.
2.10.7 Manufacturers:
2.10.7.1 TACO SD Series
2.10.7.2 Bell & Gossett
2.11 SHOT FEEDER
2.11.1 Reference 15183.
2.12 VALVE - AUTOMATIC MAKE-UP FOR CLOSED LOOP (MUV)
2.12.1 Furnish and install where shown or required for each closed water circulating system
automatic feed or makeup valves.
2.12.2 Valves to be spring-loaded pressure-reducing type having bronze body and monel or
stainless steel trim. Valves for use in cold water systems to have rubber diaphragm
D&A#07103 15700-13 St. Christopher Church Phase II
with composition shutoff disc. Valves for hot water systems to have monel metal
diaphragm with stainless steel shutoff disc.
2.12.3 Feed valves suitable for entering pressures from 40 to 80 psig and to have a reduced
pressure spring range from 8 to 25 psig. Valves to have built-in strainer and check.
2.12.4 Feed valves suitable for entering pressure to 150 psig and reduced pressure spring
range down to 5 psig. Valves to be: Warren 430; McAlear 258; Keckley 11A; Cash-
Acme Type B; Watts 223-LP.
2.12.5 Valves to be adjusted, after installation, to maintain a minimum of 10 psig at highest
and most remote point of system.
2.12.6 Manufacturers:
2.12.6.1 Thrush 11
2.12.6.2 Taco 320
2.12.6.3 Bell & Gossett 12
2.12.6.4 Watts U-5LP
2.12.6.5 Keckley Type 11A
2.13 VALVE - FLOW CONTROL (FCV)
2.13.1 Factory calibrated pressure compensating type valve. Valve shall maintain flow rates
within +/-5% regardless of system pressure fluctuations.
2.13.2 Internal parts of passivated stainless steel construction.
2.13.3 Valves shall be equipped with nipples and quick disconnect valves for connection of
flow measuring instrumentation.
2.13.4 Manufacturers:
2.13.4.1 Griswold
2.13.4.2 Flow Control Industries
3 EXECUTION
3.1 REQUIREMENTS - CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS
3.1.1 Installation
3.1.1.1 Pitch mains up in direction of flow. All branch takeoffs from bottom of main.
3.1.1.2 Install auto or manual air vents at high points of system.
3.1.1.3 Install pressure relief valve on all closed loop systems.
3.1.1.4 Install pressure gauge at high point of system.
3.1.1.5 Install drains at low point of system and at each and every piece of equipment.
D&A#07103 15700-14 St. Christopher Church Phase II
3.1.1.6 Install control valves furnished by others.
3.1.1.7 Install all piping and shut-off valves full line size as indicated on drawings.
Reduce pipe size at control valves to control valve size.
3.1.1.8 Install full port ball valve with hose bibb connection on all strainers. Install cap on
hose bibb connection.
3.1.1.9 Install all weld-o-lets and thermo wells as required by control contractor.
3.1.1.10 Install shot feeder in a 2 valve bypass arrangement around circulating pump in
order to create a pressure differential. A 3/4 inch feeder lead-in line shall be
taken from the circulating line on the discharge side of the pump. A 3/4 inch
feeder outlet line shall run to the circulating line on the suction side of the pump.
Feeder line shall be installed with a line size shutoff valve and union connection
on the shot feeder side of each valve.
3.1.2 Initial fill of system
3.1.2.1 Refer to Section 15183 Chemical Treatment
3.2 REQUIREMENTS – EQUIPMENT
3.2.1 All equipment to be set level and plumb. Grout as required.
3.2.2 Provide all support steel to support roof mounted equipment.
3.2.3 All condensate drain pans shall be pitched for positive drainage.
3.2.4 Pipe all condensate drains and pitch down in direction of flow to sanitary drain.
3.2.5 Start all equipment as recommended by manufacturer’s written procedures.
3.2.6 Provide and change all air filters as noted in Section 15010.
3.2.7 Clean all equipment as noted in Section 15010.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15800-1 St. Christopher Church Phase II
SECTION 15800
AIR DISTRIBUTION
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This section includes all Equipment and Installation guidelines specific to Air Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
1.2.2 Systems shall include the following:
1.2.2.1 Supply Air Distribution
1.2.2.2 Return Air
1.2.2.3 Outside Air Intake
1.2.2.4 Exhaust Air
1.2.3 Equipment being supplied and installed in this contract includes but is not limited to the
following:
1.2.3.1 Air Distribution – Duct Liner
1.2.3.2 Air Distribution – Flexible Air Duct
1.2.3.3 Air Distribution –Round Duct
1.2.3.4 Air Distribution – Rectangular Duct System
1.2.3.5 Damper – Fire
1.2.3.6 Damper – Volume (Mixed Air, Shutoff, Etc.)
1.2.3.7 Diffuser – Rectangular
1.2.3.8 Diffuser – Square Ceiling (Louvered Face) Round Neck Adjustable Pattern
1.2.3.9 Grilles and Registers
1.2.3.10 Grilles – Aluminum Eggcrate Return
1.2.4 Related Sections Include but are not limited to the following:
1.2.4.1 15010 General Provisions
1.2.4.2 15050 Basic Materials and Methods
1.2.4.3 15060 Pipe Valve and Fittings
1.2.4.4 15180 Insulation
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Submit product data for equipment and specialties as noted in Section 15010, “Shop
Drawings”.
1.3.2 Product data shall include pressure and temperature ratings and drops, model numbers,
material types, actuators, trim, motor type and all pertinent data as required for complete
D&A#07103 15800-2 St. Christopher Church Phase II
evaluation by Engineer. Submittals shall show conformance with schedules, data and
these specifications.
1.3.3 Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for unpacking, rigging, installation and start-
up.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three
(3) years.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.5.1 Prepare for shipping as follows:
1.5.1.1 Protect all parts against rust, corrosion and from road salt spray, etc.
1.5.1.2 Block all spring mounted devices.
1.5.1.3 Cover all equipment water tight.
1.5.1.4 Secure all devices to eliminate shifting during shipment.
1.5.2 Use the following precautions during storage:
1.5.2.1 Maintain protection over all openings.
1.5.2.2 Store indoors and maintain equipment temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store equipment off the ground in
watertight enclosures.
1.5.3 Rig equipment to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use parts not intended for
such as lifting or rigging points.
1.6 DUCT SYSTEM CLASSIFICATION
1.6.1 Supply duct between AHU and VAV Boxes:
1.6.1.1 Shall be designed and fabricated for static pressure construction class 3” W.G. and
seal Class B.
1.6.1.2 Duct leakage shall not exceed 50 CFM per 100 square feet of ductwork when tested
at 3 W.G. static pressure (F=CLPN=24.5 X 3.65=50)
1.6.2 Supply duct between VAV Boxes and Diffusers:
1.6.2.1 Shall be designed and fabricated for 1” positive static pressure.
1.6.3 Return Duct to AHU Units:
1.6.3.1 Shall be designed and fabricated for 2” negative static pressure.
1.6.4 Exhaust Duct:
D&A#07103 15800-3 St. Christopher Church Phase II
1.6.4.1 Shall be designed and fabricated for 1.5” negative static pressure.
1.6.5 Ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized iron.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR DISTRIBUTION – DUCT LINER
2.1.1 Where noted on Drawings, this Contractor shall insulate inside of duct with liner.
2.1.2 All exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall be neatly butted without gaps. All
edges shall be factory coated. All field cut edges shall be coated with approved
coating/sealant. Manville Superseal Permacote or equal.
2.1.3 Nominal insulation thickness to be 1/2".
2.1.4 Insulation density shall be 1-1/2 cu. ft.
2.1.5 Insulation shall have an air stream surface with an acrylic coating and a biocidal
component, which satisfies the requirements of ASTM C1071 - "Standard Specification
for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Liner Material)." The material
must not support the growth of mold and fungi when tested in accordance with ASTM
C665. NBFU approved. All components of duct liner insulation must not exceed 25
flame or 50 smoke developed ratings.
2.1.6 Manufacturers:
2.1.6.1 Knauf Duct Liner EM
2.1.6.2 CertainTeed
2.1.6.3 Approved equal
2.2 AIR DISTRIBUTION – FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT
2.2.1 Sizes as shown on Drawings.
2.2.2 3'-0" maximum length unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
2.2.3 Constructed with continuous steel supporting spiral covered with treated fabric, fire
resistant, self - extinguishing.
2.2.4 Duct to be UL approved and meet NFPA Standard indicated in NBFU Pamphlet 90A.
Duct to have flame spread rating of 30 or less; 25 or less where duct passes through
floors.
2.2.5 Connections to Metal:
2.2.5.1 Sheet metal screws
2.2.5.2 Hose clamps
2.2.5.3 Manufacturer: 3M-EC800
D&A#07103 15800-4 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.2.6 Fabric
2.2.6.1 Chloroprene rubber-coated or neoprene impregnated glass fiber material.
Manufacturer: Wiremold Type 54; H.K. Porter Thermoid Type PADNF; or
Aircon-Duct.
2.2.6.2 Vinyl-coated glass fiber material. Manufacturer: Wiremold Type 57; H.K. Porter
Thermoid Type PAD-A; or Aircon-Duct.
2.2.6.3 Insulated type to be chloroprene rubber-coated or neoprene impregnated glass fiber
material pre- insulated at factory. Insulation to be 1", 3/4# density fiberglass
insulating blanket. Manufacturer: Wiremold Type 4K; H.K. Porter Thermoid Type
PAD-NIA; or Aircon-Duct.
2.2.6.4 Horchohide HyTemp coated glass fiber material. Wiremold Type 55; or Aircon-Duct.
2.2.6.5 Neoprene-coated cotton with neoprene interior coating. Manufacturer: Wiremold
Type 86-C; or Aircon-Duct.
2.2.6.6 Corrugated Steel - zinc coated. Manufacturer: Aircon-Duct ST-103.
2.3 AIR DISTRIBUTION – ROUND DUCT
2.3.1 Construct duct to pressure classification as noted in Part 1 of this specification section.
2.3.2 Data for Approval - Manufacturer shall submit to Engineer for approval, spiral pipe test
data which shall cover leakage rate and friction loss. Friction loss test data shall cover
both duct and assembled coupling joints. Fittings test data shall cover friction loss tests
of all fittings applied to the job.
2.3.3 Installation Manual - shall be included in submittal data. They shall include detailed
instructions on: assembly, joint sealing, erection, reinforcement of flat-oval duct and
system pressure testing for leaks.
2.3.4 Joint Sealing
2.3.4.1 Approved sealer is applied to the male end of couplings and fittings. After joint is
slipped together, sheet metal screws are placed 1/2" from joint bead for mechanical
strength. Sealer is applied to outside of joint extending 1" on each side of joint bead
and covering screw heads. Plastic-backed tape is immediately applied over the wet
sealer.
2.3.4.2 Duct sealer must be specifically formulated for job of sealing field joints for pressure
systems as classified. Sealer shall be compatible with plastic-backed duct tape so
two shall cure and bond together. Samples of sealer and tape and specification
data sheets shall be submitted to Engineer for approval.
2.3.4.3 Flanged joints shall be sealed by neoprene rubber gaskets.
2.3.5 Leakage Testing in Installed Systems
D&A#07103 15800-5 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.3.5.1 Acceptance Criteria
2.3.5.1.1 Installed duct system shall be pressurized to a test pressure 50% over designed
operating pressure.
2.3.5.1.2 Air leakage at test pressure shall be measured by calibrated orifice type of flow
meter. Total allowable leakage of system shall not exceed 1/2 of 1% of air
handling capacity of system.
2.3.5.1.3 If system is tested in sections, leakage rates shall be added to give performance
of whole system.
2.3.5.1.4 Leakage concentrated at one point may result in objectionable noise even if
system passes the leakage rate criteria. This noise source must be corrected to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.3.5.1.5 Orifice flow measurement device must have been individually calibrated against
primary standard, and this calibrated curve permanently attached to orifice tube
assembly.
2.3.5.1.6 Testing must be in accordance with printed procedure submitted to Engineer for
approval.
2.3.6 Circular Pipe and Fittings
2.3.6.1 Pipe
2.3.6.1.1 Round pipe shall be manufactured of galvanized steel meeting ASTM A-527-67
by the following methods and in minimum gauges listed:
DIA. MIN. GAUGE METHOD OF MANUFACTURE
3" thru 8" 26 spiral lockseam
9" thru 22" 24 spiral lockseam
2" thru 36" 22 spiral lockseam
38" thru 50" 16 longitudinal seam
2.3.6.1.2 Spiral type shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate any leakage under
pressures for which this system has been designed.
2.3.6.1.3 Longitudinal seam duct shall have fusion welded butt seam.
2.3.6.2 Fittings
2.3.6.2.1 Fittings and coupling shall be of the following minimum gauges:
DIA. GAUGE
3" thru 36" 20
38" thru 50" 18
over 50" 16
D&A#07103 15800-6 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.3.6.2.2 All fittings are to have continuous welds along all seams. All divided flow fittings
are to be manufactured as separate fittings, NOT AS TAP COLLARS WELDED
INTO SPIRAL DUCT SECTIONS.
2.3.6.2.3 Elbows shall be fabricated to centerline radius of 1.5 times cross-section
diameter. All elbows not die-stamped shall be fabricated according to the
following schedule:
ELBOW ANGLE NO. OF GORES
less than 30° 2
30° thru 60° 3
over 60° 5
2.3.6.2.4 Where two-piece mitered elbows are shown on Drawings, they shall have
turning vanes in accordance with the following schedule:
DIA. NO. OF VANES
3" thru 9" 2
10" thru 14" 3
15" thru 19" 4
20" and over 5
2.3.6.2.5 The leading edge of all vanes in ducts over 20" diameter shall be hemmed with
1/2" foldback. Turning vanes in ducts over 24" shall be reinforced by rods or
sectional construction to limit unsupported length to 24". Vanes shall be
minimum of 20 gauge.
2.3.6.2.6 Galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding shall be coated with
corrosion resistant aluminum paint.
2.3.6.3 Couplings
2.3.6.3.1 Pipe-to-pipe joints in diameters to 50" are by use of sleeve couplings, reinforced
by rolled beads.
2.3.6.3.2 Pipe-to-fitting joints in diameters to 50" are by slip-fit of projecting collar of the
fitting into the pipe.
2.3.6.3.3 Insertion length of sleeve coupling and fitting collar is 2" for diameters through 9"
and 4" for diameters 10" and up.
2.3.6.3.4 Pipe-to-pipe and pipe-to-fitting connections in diameters above 50" should be by
angle ring flanges. 1/2" flange is provided for body ends of duct sections and
fittings to act as gasketing surface for sealing. The angle ring is a rolled, welded
ring 2" x 2" x 3/16".
2.3.6.3.5 Bolt hold spacing for angle rings shall not exceed 6". If duct sections in
diameters greater than 50" are supplied in lengths greater than 4', one angle ring
must be welded to duct on 4' centers. Welding can be intermittent weld of 1" in
4".
D&A#07103 15800-7 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.4 AIR DISTRIBUTION – RECTANGULAR DUCT SYSTEM
2.4.1 Construct duct to pressure classification as noted in Part 1 of this specification section.
2.4.2 Construct rectangular duct of first quality materials in accordance with HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible(SMACNA). Crossbreak except where rigid
insulation is specified. Construct round duct according to recommendations of ASHRAE
Guide.
2.4.3 Support horizontal duct on wall with band iron strap hanger if width is under 18" and with
shelf-type bracket if over 18".
2.4.4 Support ducts suspended from roof structure with band- type hangers if maximum is
inside 48" and with trapeze-type hangers if over 48".
2.4.5 Fittings
2.4.5.1 Elbows (less than 24" wide): use standard radius elbow. Radius shall be 1-1/2
times width of fitting, unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
2.4.5.2 Elbows (24" wide and over): shall be square elbows with turning vanes. Elbows
less than 36" wide shall have single-bladed vanes. Elbows 36" wide and over shall
have double-bladed vanes in airfoil pattern.
2.4.5.3 Main Tee Connections shall be radius or square depending on size duct reduced to.
Adjustable splitter damper shall be provided ahead of the Tee in all cases.
2.4.5.4 Branch Tee Connections shall be 45° boot tap-in, with balancing damper.
2.4.5.5 Transitions, Raises and Drops shall be built so that change in direction of side of
duct does not exceed 30° angle to projected same side.
2.4.6 Accessories
2.4.6.1 Access Doors (AD): construction-steel with 1/2" of fiberglass insulation between
door and door pan. Sponge rubber gasketing to be on inside of door frame and
between duct and door frame. Door metals to be of sufficient gauge for minimizing
leakage at various duct pressures. Hinges not to exceed 12" apart and two
handle-type latches to be used for sides exceeding 12". Manufacturers:
Ventfabrics Ventlok Door; Buensod Stacey Type F; or approved equal.
2.4.6.2 Test holes shall be provided before and after coils, filters, mixing plenums, etc. Use
the pivoted type.
2.4.6.3 Turning vanes (single vane) shall be constructed and spaced as called for in
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
2.4.7 Housing or Casing (See HVAC Duct Construction Standards)
2.4.7.1 Single Wall: insulated
2.4.7.2 Single Wall: non-insulated
D&A#07103 15800-8 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.5 DAMPER – FIRE
2.5.1 General
2.5.1.1 Install where noted on Drawings or required by NFPA Pamphlet 90-A.
2.5.1.2 Locate where ducts pierce firewalls or where openings are provided in masonry
firewalls or return air.
2.5.1.3 These include walls of pipe shafts, mechanical equipment room walls, load bearing
partitions and floors of building over two stories high.
2.5.2 Requirements
2.5.2.1 All fire dampers shall be tested and listed by UL.
2.5.2.2 They shall have 1 1/2 hour rating unless noted otherwise.
2.5.2.3 All fire dampers shall be designed for dynamic closure in compliance with UL-555-
1990 Fourth Edition Fire Damper Test Standards. Springs shall be stainless steel,
constant tension design, with combined tension of springs being equal to at least 2-
1/2 times force required to closet damper curtain.
2.5.3 Low Velocity Construction (to 2000 FPM)
2.5.3.1 Curtain Blade (Type A) shall be constructed of blades arranged so they will be
stacked at one end of damper. Steel frame and blades shall be inside duct or
opening dimension. If duct height is 12" or less, blade stack shall be out of the
airstream.
2.5.3.2 Dampers shall be as manufactured by:
2.5.3.2.1 Nailor
2.5.3.2.2 Airstream
2.5.3.2.3 United Sheet Metal
2.5.3.2.4 Carnes
2.5.3.2.5 Ruskin
2.5.3.2.6 Greenheck
2.5.4 Installation Sleeve shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel. Sleeve shall extend past wall or
floor construction 2" on each side. Sleeve shall not be fastened to wall or floor
construction but shall be held in place by retaining angles that are large enough to allow
for damper expansion of 1/8" for each foot of length or width. Damper frame may be of
such design so as to function as sleeve.
2.5.5 Multiple Assemblies of dampers for openings which are larger than assemblies tested
by UL shall have steel dividing opening into areas within the tested sizes. Submit
Drawings giving sizes and location of these steel members for approval of
Architect/Engineer.
D&A#07103 15800-9 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.5.6 Demonstration: Mechanical Contractor shall demonstrate to Owner's Representative
that each fire damper is properly installed and will operate satisfactorily. With fan shut
off, fusible link should be removed to see that damper will close tightly. Damper should
be opened and fusible link replaced.
2.5.7 Fusible Link: UL listed and rated at 165°F.
2.6 DAMPER - VOLUME (MIXED AIR, SHUTOFF, ETC.)
2.6.1 Furnish and install in all openings or ducts the size damper as noted on Drawings.
2.6.2 Construction to contain painted steel frame, galvanized 16 gauge steel blades, metal
anti-leakage pressure plates or metal seat for sealing blade ends, oilite bearings. Blade
edges, top and bottom, to have continuous resilient gasket. Blades to be
interconnected by brass trunnions and 1/4" diameter galvanized rod.
2.6.3 Manufacturers:
2.6.3.1 Nailor
2.6.3.2 Air Balance Airfoil
2.6.3.3 Ruskin
2.6.3.4 Greenheck
2.7 DIFFUSER - SQUARE CEILING
2.7.1 Construction: aluminum or steel.
2.7.2 Air Pattern: adjustable from vertical or horizontal.
2.7.3 Panel assembly shall be removable for access to accessories.
2.7.4 Diffusers mounted in non-removable ceilings (plaster non-removable tile, etc.) to have
overlap type flange.
2.7.5 Diffusers mounted in removable type ceilings to have panels to fit into ceiling
suspension system. Panel size as shown on Drawings.
2.7.6 Volume damper operable from face without requiring special access to duct above.
2.7.7 Finish: factory enameled, color to be selected by Architect.
2.7.8 Manufacturers:
2.7.8.1 Titus TMSA
2.7.8.2 Price
2.7.8.3 Carnes
2.7.8.4 Nailor
2.8 GRILLES AND REGISTERS
2.8.1 Capacity and size as noted on Drawings.
D&A#07103 15800-10 St. Christopher Church Phase II
2.8.2 Constructed of heavy gauge steel or aluminum.
2.8.3 Finish in prime coat except where special finish is hereinafter specified or noted on
Drawings.
2.8.4 Metal plaster frames: for grilles mounted on plaster, masonry, fiber or metal
construction surfaces.
2.8.5 Volume Damper: opposed blade key or screwdriver operated through grille face.
2.8.6 Deflecting Blades: 3/4" deep, streamline. Single or double deflection as noted.
Horizontal blades always mounted nearest grille face.
2.8.7 Supply Grilles: sponge rubber gasket, double deflection. Provide optional opposed
blade damper immediately behind grille.
2.8.8 Return Grilles: single deflection blades fixed at 45° down. Volume damper.
2.8.9 Exhaust Grilles: single deflection blades fixed at 45° down. Volume damper.
2.8.10 Manufacturers:
2.8.10.1 Nailor
2.8.10.2 Titus
2.8.10.3 Price
2.8.10.4 Carnes
2.9 GRILLES – ALUMINUM EGGCRATE RETURN
2.9.1 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2" louvers.
2.9.2 Finish is baked enamel to match surrounding finish.
2.9.3 Where grilles are mounted in exposed (inverted) T bar ceilings, the grille flange to be
concealed leaving only the T bar exposed.
2.9.4 All other grilles to be complete with extruded aluminum border flange.
2.9.5 Manufacturers:
2.9.5.1 Titus Series 50F
2.9.5.2 Nailor
2.9.5.3 Carnes
2.9.5.4 Price
D&A#07103 15800-11 St. Christopher Church Phase II
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 Maintain ducts tight to walls, partitions and under-side of floors. Provide offsets to
accomplish this and avoid conflicts with other work.
3.1.2 Furnish, locate and set suitable sleeves where ducts pass through floors, walls and
other concrete or masonry materials.
3.1.3 Install dampers for automatic control furnished by others. Verify the exact damper size
with supplier.
3.1.4 Furnish and install fire dampers as required by National Fire Protection Assn.
Reference International Building Code and Indiana Amendments.
3.1.5 All duct dimensions shown on Drawings are inside dimensions, including ducts insulated
on inside.
3.1.6 Clean and lubricate all equipment. Cover air outlets with cheesecloth, if ready for
occupancy.
3.1.7 Location, size, capacity, mounting arrangement and electrical characteristics for
equipment shall be as noted on Drawings.
3.1.8 Motor starter for all single speed motors shall be furnished by Division 16 Contractor
unless otherwise noted in Specifications or on Drawings.
3.1.9 Provide for access to fire dampers, coil dampers, damper operators, filters, air flow
measuring stations, etc. or where noted on Drawings.
3.1.10 Access doors in plenum or housing shall be 24" x 60", unless otherwise noted on
Drawings.
3.1.11 All ductwork above floor at 7'-0" or less, plus any ductwork which may come near
ladders or walkways to have flattened seams. In addition, this ductwork shall have no
protrusions or sharp edges and corners shall be wrapped with 1" thick closed cell
elastomeric insulation.
3.1.12 Install flexible connections (FC) at each inlet and outlet duct connections to every piece
of fan equipment. Fabric fastened to metal with double lock seam. Fabric for ordinary
heating, ventilating and air conditioning uses to be waterproof, fire retardant and
suitable for temperatures of 200F. Manufacturers: Duro-Dyne; Ventfabrics or approved
equal.
3.1.13 Balance or Volume Dampers (VD): furnish and install as required to properly balance
system and where shown on Drawings. Construction to be galvanized steel, two
gauges heavier than duct. Shaft shall be steel with brass bearings. Blades shall not
exceed 12" wide and 48" long. Frames of same gauge metal are required where two
blades or more are used.
D&A#07103 15800-12 St. Christopher Church Phase II
3.1.14 Damper Operators:
3.1.14.1 Balancing dampers to have lock-type damper operator and linkage as best suits
construction and access conditions. Dampers with accessible operators to be
provided with locking damper quadrants complete with locking nuts and graduated
scale.
3.1.14.2 Dampers with non-accessible operators provided with Young Series 300 concealed
regulator and coverplate complete with worm gear or linkage as required for smooth
damper operation.
3.1.14.3 Dampers in under slab ducts provided with Young Series 335 adjustable cover
regulators.
3.1.15 Joint Sealing
3.1.15.1 Approved sealer shall be applied to the end of couplings, fittings and at all lateral
joints and seams. All supply, return and exhaust duct shall be sealed.
3.1.16 Duct sealer must be specifically formulated for the purpose of sealing field joints for low
and medium pressure systems. Samples of sealer and tape and specification data
sheets shall be submitted to Engineer for review.
3.1.17 Fan Speed Adjustment: the external resistance (static pressure loss) for each fan
system has been estimated and noted on Drawings. Fan speed and fan-to-motor drive
will be selected based on this estimated static pressure loss. Our static pressure loss is
only an estimate; the actual loss of the completed system may vary above or below the
estimate. The Contractor shall change pulleys or sheaves, as required, to suit the
actual job conditions, at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.1.18 Duct Leakage Testing
3.1.18.1 Sheetmetal Contractor shall perform duct leakage testing on all supply ductwork for
all AHU’s.
3.1.18.2 Notification and Observation
3.1.18.2.1 Owner, Architect and Engineer shall be notified a minimum of five (5) working
days prior to start of any duct leakage testing.
3.1.18.2.2 All preparations of ductwork shall be made available for inspection by Owner
and Engineer prior to testing.
3.1.18.2.3 All tests will be made available to Owner and Engineer for observation of actual
test.
3.1.18.3 Test Apparatus, Procedures and Reports
3.1.18.3.1 Test apparatus shall be as outlined in Section 5 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual.
D&A#07103 15800-13 St. Christopher Church Phase II
3.1.18.3.2 Testing procedures shall be as outlined in Section 3 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual.
3.1.18.3.3 Test reports shall be as outlined in Section 6 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual.
3.1.19 Shop Drawings
3.1.19.1 Duct Fabrication Drawings
3.1.19.1.1 The construction documents are not fabrications drawings and are not intended
to show all offsets as required for proper ductwork installation. Contractor to
field verify all existing conditions and prepare fabrication drawings based on
existing conditions. All additional offsets shall be included in bid price.
3.1.19.1.2 Contractor shall submit sheet metal fabrication shop drawings detailing all joints,
fittings, reinforcement, etc. for all ductwork and housings to be installed.
3.1.19.1.3 Floor plan drawings shall be submitted showing location, dimensions and
elevations of all main and branch duct runs. Scale of drawings shall be 1/4" = 1'
- 0". AutoCAD floor plan drawings may be available upon Contractor request.
3.1.19.1.4 Drawings shall show exact location of all grilles, registers and diffusers. Also
indicate routing of sprinkler piping, water piping, etc. that will need to be
avoided. Extensive coordination will be required.
3.1.19.1.5 Submit three copies to Engineer for review as soon as possible after award of
contract.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 15900-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 15900
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. Work Included
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating
Building Control System (BCS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls (DDC) as shown on the
drawings and described herein. The BCS shall provide HVAC system control, energy
management, alarming, monitoring, and reporting functions with operator interface as
described on the drawings or elsewhere in this specification.
B. Related Work
1. Products furnished but not installed under these sections:
a. Section 15060 –Hydronic Piping:
• Control Valves
• Flow Switches
• Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets
b. Section 15800 – Sheetmetal:
• Automatic Dampers (not specifically specified with the equipment)
c. Division 16000 – Electrical:
• Wiring and conduit required for dedicated 115 VAC outlets at the
Operator Interfaces and accessories.
• Duct Smoke Detectors with contacts for use by this contractor.
• Wiring of power feeds through all disconnects, starters, and variable
speed controllers to electric motors.
2. Products installed under this section:
a. Section 15900 – Application Specific or Product Integrated Controls (PIC) for
Equipment by this supplier
b. Interconnect PIC equipment to BCS bus
c. Section 15700 - Air Handling Equipment
d. Thermostats
C. System Description
1. General Requirements:
a. Provide and install a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers and a
stand alone Web Server complete with all required software and hardware as
described in the sections that follow.
b. The BCS system shall provide stand-alone, independent control, of all mechanical
systems.
c. The controls contractor shall assume complete single-source responsibility for the
entire controls system. He shall certify that he has on staff, under his direct employ,
certified factory trained technical personnel qualified to project manage, engineer,
commission, and service all portions of the control system.
D&A#07103 15900-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2. Basic System Features:
The BCS system shall provide:
a. Stand-alone independent control for all mechanical systems as described in the
sections that follow.
b. Complete energy management software and firmware that resides and executes in
networked field controllers. Operator workstation software shall not be utilized for
energy management execution.
c. Alarm management capability for all mechanical equipment described in the sections
that follow – including alarm occurrence, annunciation, email capability,
acknowledgement, problem diagnostics, and reporting functions.
d. Complete password protected system monitoring through a web server, or through
remote computers. Remote computers shall utilize Internet or Ethernet
communications links, as required.
e. Standard manual or automatic reports of trends, runtimes, consumables, alarms, and
system operator activities.
f. All DDC hardware and software shall be designed and manufactured by U.S.
corporations. All hardware shall be Listed Underwriters Laboratory for Open Energy
Management Equipment (PAZX) under the U.L. standard for safety 916, with integral
labels showing rating.
D. Quality Assurance
1. Responsibility: The supplier of the Building Control System shall be responsible for
inspection and Quality Assurance (QA) for all materials and workmanship furnished by
him.
2. Component Reliability: Each and every controller, sensor, and all other DDC
components shall be individually tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment. All
products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be
applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. Spare parts shall be available
for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.
3. Tools, Testing and Calibration Equipment: The BCS supplier shall provide all tools,
testing and calibration equipment necessary to ensure the reliability and accuracy of the
control system.
4. Installer experience: The installer shall have an established working relationship with the
BCS Manufacturer for not less than three years, have a minimum of five years
documented experience in BCS installations, and be approved and certified by the
Manufacture or their authorized Distributors.
E. Reference Standards
1. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of date
of supplier's purchase order, and any subsections thereof as applicable, shall govern the
design and selection of equipment and material supplied:
a. ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers) Standards 90.1 and 62.99
b. City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase
order.
c. Except as otherwise indicated, the system supplier shall secure and pay for all
permits, inspections, and certifications required for his work and arrange for
necessary approvals by the governing authorities.
D&A#07103 15900-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
F. Submittals
1. Drawings:
a. The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequences, bill of
materials, bus riser diagrams, hardware/software product data sheets, and
applicable valve and damper schedules for approval.
b. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 11” x 17” or 8 ½” x 11”
c. Six complete sets of submittal drawings shall be provided.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
Manuals will be provided prior to final acceptance and shall include:
a. Installation instructions.
b. Principles of operation and a detailed system description
c. Startup and operating instructions
d. System layout and interconnection schematic diagrams
e. Name, address and telephone number of the DDC Systems field representative.
G. Scheduling And Coordination
1. The vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time
markings and details for hardware items and software configuration phases.
2. The schedule shall show all the target dates for transmission of project information and
documents and shall indicate timing and dates for system installation, debugging, and
commissioning.
H. Warranty
1. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a
period of one year from completion and acceptance by the owner, except for damages
from other causes.
2. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-
site or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The
maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours
during normal business hours.
3. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software and be at no cost to the
owner.
I. Manufacturer
1. The installer shall only use products from these acceptable manufacturers:
Base Bid: Carrier Controls Local Office
Alternate: Novar Controls by Comfort Systems USA
Alternate: Johnson Controls Local Office
Alternate: Honeywell Building Systems Local Office
2. Engineer reserves the right to reject, at his option, any and all bids that do not meet the
specified requirements stated.
J. Examination
1. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such
work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.
2. Notify the Owners Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work.
D&A#07103 15900-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
K. Installation (General)
1. Install hardware and software in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and
configuration required to insure a complete operating system in accordance with the
sequences of operation and point schedules.
3. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices
shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.
4. Install equipment, piping, and wiring/raceways parallel to building lines (i.e., horizontal,
vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.
L. Location and Installation of Components
1. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 60 inches above
floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on
locations from Owner’s representative prior to installation.
2. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to
protect them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures.
3. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels.
4. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application and for
installation under other sections; sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow.
M. Interlocking and Control Wiring
1. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed in a neat and
professional manner in accordance with Specification Division 16 and all national, state
and local electrical codes.
2. Provide wire and wiring techniques recommended by equipment manufacturers.
3. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and
disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction
boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with
the Owner's representative prior to rough-in.
4. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed
in raceways. All other wiring to be installed in a neat and inconspicuous manner per local
code requirements.
5. When a cable enters or exits a building, a surge suppressor must be installed. The surge
suppressor shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
6. All sensor wiring shall be labeled to indicate the origination and destination of data.
N. Field Services
1. Prepare and start the control system under provisions of this section.
2. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning
prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.
3. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring. As a minimum, off-site facility shall be
capable of system diagnostics and software download. Owner shall provide LAN
connection for this service for 1 year or as specified.
4. Provide the Owners Representative an in warranty maintenance proposal.
O. Training
1. Provide training to the owner in the operation of systems and equipment.
2. Provide basic operator training for a minimum of 3 people on all functions of the Web
Server.
3. Provide training, as required, for up to 8 hours as part of this contract.
D&A#07103 15900-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
P. Demonstration
1. Provide systems demonstration of each sub-system.
2. Demonstrate a complete operating system to Owner's Representative.
3. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for proper
operation.
PRODUCTS
HARDWARE
A. Common Field Sensors
1. Space Temperature Sensors
Space Temperature Sensors shall be 5,000 or 10,000-ohm thermistors or resistance
temperature detector types with wall plate adapter and blank cover assembly. If so
indicated on the plans, the sensor shall include an integral occupancy override
button, an RJ11 communications port, and optional space temperature adjustment
slide.
2. Communicating Space Temperature Sensors
Communicating Space Temperature Sensors shall be powered by 24 Vac, wall
mounted, and control the room's HVAV (heating, cooling, and ventilation) equipment
through RS-485 bus communications. The sensing element shall be a 10,000-ohm
thermistor and enclosed in a plastic housing. Sensors shall be equipped with a liquid
crystal display (LCD) with 4 push-button user interface for configuring setpoints and
time schedules. Sensors shall store configuration parameters in non-volatile memory
and provide coordinated control of the HVAV equipment after a power outage.
3. Duct Temperature Sensors
Duct Temperature Sensors shall be 1000-ohm single point or averaging type as
need. Averaging sensors shall be RTDs, or 10,000-ohm averaging thermistors.
Single point sensors shall be 5,000 ohm or 10,000-ohm thermistors.
4. Outside Air Sensors
Outside Air Sensor shall be 5,000 or 10,000-ohm thermistor, with integral PVC
housing and ½” NPT conduit connector.
3. Water Temperature Sensors
Water Temperature Sensors shall be well mounted or pipe-clamp types as specified
on the plans. Sensors shall be 5.000 or 10,000-ohm thermistors, or 1,000-ohm
RTDs. Locate as shown on the plans, and provide extended neck wells where
applicable on insulated pipes.
Changeover thermostats shall be 10,000-ohm strap on thermistors with flexible
copper plate and screw clamp for externally mounting on the pipe.
4. Space and Duct Relative Humidity Sensors
Space Relative Humidity Sensors shall and have a range of 0-100% RH. The
measuring accuracy shall be between 2% and 5% as indicated on the plans over the
range of the device.
D&A#07103 15900-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
5. Outdoor Air Relative Humidity Sensors
Outdoor Relative Humidity Transmitters shall be enclosed in a weather-tight junction
box and measure outdoor air humidity from 0% to 100% with accuracy between 2%
and 5% as needed to fit the application. Transmitters shall not require calibration
and shall provide a 2-wire 4-20 mA, 3-wire 0-5 Vdc, or 3 wire 0-10Vdc output signal.
6. Space CO2 Sensor with Temperature Sensors
The wall mounted combination sensors shall contain a space temperature sensor
and Carbon Dioxide (CO2) sensor in a single. TheCO2 sensor shall use single-beam
absorption infrared diffusion technology and be self-calibrating. The CO2 range shall
be 0-2000 PPM with analog outputs of 4-20 ma or 0-10 v. with a power source of 18-
30 Vac, 50/60 Hz. The accuracy shall be +/- 100 PPM at 60F to 90F. The sensor
shall include an integral occupancy override button, a set point adjustment slidebar,
and an RJ14 communication port.
7. Space and Duct CO2 Sensors
The wall mounted, hand held, or duct mounted sensors shall utilize single-beam
absorption infrared diffusion technology, and be self-calibrating. The CO2 range shall
be 0-2000 PPM with analog outputs of 4-20 ma or 0-10 v. with a power source of 18-
30 Vac, 50/60 Hz. The accuracy shall be +/- 100 PPM at 60F to 90F.
8. Transmitters
d. Pressure Transmitters
Transmitters shall provide accessible zero and span adjustments, and shall
measure gauge or differential pressure of liquids or gases over several operating
scales extending from 30 inches vacuum to 2000-psig. The Transmitter shall vary
the output current in proportion to the input pressure, and shall operate with a
nominal supply voltage of 12 to 32 V dc as needed and provide a 4-20 mA output
signal.
e. Flow Transmitters
Transmitters shall be powered by 24 Vdc, and provide a digital display of gpm
and totalized flow. Transmitters shall convert a digital flow signal into a 4-20 mA
output signal for flow rate indication, and divide the digital input signal into a
selectable digital dry or electronic contact pulse output signal for flow totalization
indication. Transmitters shall provide excitation voltage for flow sensors and an
LED indication of pulse activity.
9. Current to Pressure Transducers
Current to Pressure Transducers shall convert the 4 to 20ma or 0 to 10 Vdc analog
output signal from the controller into a 3-15 PSI pneumatic output. It shall contain a
0-30 PSI manifold gauge indicating actual output air pressure.
10. Flow Sensors
Flow Sensors shall utilize differential pressure or a vane to measure water flow and
have an operating range with an adjustable setpoint as needed. Water flow types
shall be complete with safety shut-off valves and all necessary connections. Flow
sensors shall generate a 4-20ma or 0-10Vdc proportional signal as needed.
11. Status Indication
A current sensing or differential pressure device shall provide status indication for
fans and pumps.
D&A#07103 15900-7 St. Christopher Church Phase III
The current sensing device shall be installed at the motor starter or motor to provide
load indication. The device shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current
sensing circuit with adjustable trip point, and a solid state or contact switch. A red
light emitting diode (LED) shall indicate the ON OFF status of the unit. The switch
shall provide a N.O. contact for wiring back to the General Purpose Controller.
A differential pressure sensing device shall be installed across the fan or pump and
utilize two sensing elements to provide pressure indication. The device shall operate
a SPDT switch with adjustable trip point contact for wiring back to the General
Purpose Controller.
12. Filter / Status Switches
Filter Switch shall be a differential pressure type, adjustable across the range of the
device, with a single pole double throw switch. The range, in inches water column,
shall be as indicated on the plans.
13. Float Switches
Float Switches shall be equipped with a stainless steel float, magnetically actuated,
and capable of sensing fluids with a specific gravity of 0.7 and higher.
14. High Temperature Detection Thermostats
High Temperature Detection Thermostats shall be of the manual reset type with
sensing element arranged to insert into duct or casing and shall be set for 165F. The
device shall have double pole, NO, NC contacts for supply fan shutdown and remote
alarming.
15. Low Temperature Detection Thermostats
Low Temperature Detection Thermostats shall be of the manual reset, type unless
otherwise specified, with sensing element not less than 20 feet long. The device shall
have double pole, NO, NC contacts for supply fan shutdown and remote alarming. If
alarming is not required, the device shall have a single pole, NC contact.
16. Duct High Pressure Cutout Switches
Duct High Cutout Pressure Switches shall include a manual reset single pole double
throw pressure switch with a setpoint range of 1.4 to 5.5 inch water column, tubing
and tubing adapters.
17. Start/Stop and Status Relays
Start/Stop and Status Relays shall be designed to plug into a screw terminal-
mounting socket. Relays shall be single pole, or double pole as required with double
throw contacts rated for required duty. Magnetic Latching Type Control Relay coils
shall be activated by a pulsed input and shall maintain condition even during a power
failure. A built-in indicator shall show set/reset condition.
18. Power Supplies and Transformers
Power Supplies and Voltage Transformers shall convert 120 Vac primary supply
voltage into 24 Vac or 24 Vdc control voltage as needed.
D&A#07103 15900-8 St. Christopher Church Phase III
A. General Purpose Electronic Controller
a. Description
The factory-furnished General Purpose Controller shall be a solid state sixteen bit micro-
controller with pre-tested and factory configured software designed for controlling
building equipment using DDC closed-loop algorithms and facility management routines.
The controller shall be powered from standard, off-the-shelf, Class II, 24-volt
transformers, and be mounted in a standard NEMA 1 type enclosure. The controller shall
be UL, VDE, and CSA listed. The controller shall be capable of operating in either a
stand-alone mode or as part of a network, and shall be available in two models – a
GPEC and GPEX.
The GPEC controller shall include a maximum of eight inputs and eight outputs, and
shall support a limited combination of universal HVAC sensor input and output types.
The GPEX shall include eight inputs and eight outputs, and be capable of supporting
additional GPEX-I/O modules. Each GPEX-I/O module shall support an additional eight
inputs and outputs. The GPEX and GPEX-I/O modules shall support any combination of
universal HVAC sensor input and output types, and provide, as required, HAND-OFF-
AUTO (H-O-A) override switches for all output channels.
b. Supported Inputs and Output Sensor Types:
Supported outputs shall be discrete types and either 0–10 VDC or 4–20 mA analog
types. Supported inputs shall be dry or pulsed dry contacts, 0–10 VDC and 4–20 ma,
5K and 10K thermistors, and 1000-ohm Nickel RTD. Input and output devices shall be
wired to “quick-connect plug type” terminals to facilitate removal of the module without
disconnecting wiring from the plug type terminal.
c. Controller Software
Each controller shall include a 365-day real-time clock, and support time schedules,
setpoint schedules, and timed override functions. Timed overrides shall be initiated
through a space sensor push-button or a momentary contact switch. When initiated
during the unoccupied period, the associated time schedule shall become occupied for
0-1-2-3-4 hours (operator selectable).
Discrete and analog input points shall be monitored for status, alarm or consumable
data, and to provide input to a control loop. A library of standard resident algorithms shall
utilize configurable PID routines, and output points, to control discrete state (on/off) and
analog (modulating) HVAC associated devices. Systems, which require a host computer
to perform any analog algorithm functions, shall not be acceptable. The controller shall
also be able to collect point traces, runtimes, and consumable files in its memory.
The controller shall contain preprogrammed NightTime Free Cooling (NTFC), Adaptive
Optimal Start/Stop (AOSS), and Power Fail Restart type application software in its
resident memory.
All programming shall be stored in non-volatile memory, and the controller shall not
require a battery. Systems that require a battery to store data shall not acceptable. The
controller shall have separate RJ14 plugs for human interface through a hand held Local
Interface Device (LID), or a portable PC.
D&A#07103 15900-9 St. Christopher Church Phase III
d. Custom Programming
The controller shall contain a unique controller based programming language for the
purpose of creating complex control strategies for specific unique applications. Custom
programs shall be retained in controller memory and shall not require a host CPU to
operate. Programming languages such as BASIC or FORTRAN shall not be acceptable
for these applications. All custom programming point data shall be transferable from one
controller to another (if networked) directly without an on-line CPU or host computer.
e. Networking
The controller shall allow a dynamic exchange and sharing of information with other
system controllers located in a network without the addition of communication cards or
additional software. Systems that require a host or on-line computer to be in the system
architecture are not acceptable.
B. VAV Air Terminal Controller
f. Description:
Each VAV Air Terminal shown on the plans shall include a factory-mounted and wired
microprocessor-based Air Terminal Controller (ATC). ATC shall provide stand-alone
VAV operation or allow network interface with other ATCs without any additional
hardware. All configuration data shall be stored indefinitely in non-volatile memory, and
the ATC shall not require a battery.
ATC shall include a 365-day clock with holiday functions and support network
broadcasts for time synchronization. All networked ATC controlled VAV terminals
serviced by a common air handler, shall be “LINKED” together to form a single virtual
load and operate as a complete VAV system. One ATC shall be designated as a
Coordinator between the Air Handler Controller and its associated terminals. ATC shall
be UL listed.
g. Variable Air Volume Control Types:
ARC shall be factory-mounted and wired and provide terminal or baseboard heat for
pressure independent VAV air terminals. Terminals may be Single Duct, Parallel Fan
Powered, or Series Fan Powered type.
h. Terminal Control Components:
All wire required for all the items below shall meet all applicable codes and shall be
plenum rated. The ATC shall be factory-supplied and wired with the following standard
control hardware for each terminal, as applicable:
1. Air Flow Pick-up and Transducer (0 to 2.0 in. w.g.)
2. Leaving air temperature sensor (10,000 ohms thermistor or RTD)
3. Space Temperature Sensor: (10,000 ohms thermistor or RTD) with occupant
override, RJ11 communications port, and optional setpoint adjustment slide bar.
4. Zone IAQ (CO2) Sensor (self-calibrating 0-2000 PPM, with infrared diffusion
sampling)
5. Optional Space Relative Humidity Sensor (3% accuracy over 10 to 90% range)
6. Terminal Damper Actuator (factory-provided as part of the ATC)
7. ATC Enclosure (NEMA type panel consistent with the application)
8. Valve Assemblies (2-position or modulating)
D&A#07103 15900-10 St. Christopher Church Phase III
i. Software Requirements:
Multiple ATCs served by the same air handler shall provide the following control routines
through factory resident software:
1. Zone occupancy scheduling (through internal 365 day clock based, or network
communicated)
2. Zone setpoints (configurable High/Low occupied and unoccupied zone
temperature setpoints)
3. Zone VAV cooling and relative humidity control
4. Zone IAQ control (Demand Controlled Ventilation CO2 management as per
ASHRAE 62) with optional comfort override
5. VAV terminal or baseboard heating (including fan on fan powered box terminals)
6. Minimum and maximum primary air CFM control
7. Software interface “Linkage” with central source of air
8. Operation with non-linked air source (no “Linkage” software)
9. Alarm/Alert processing
10. Optional Dual-Duct control
SOFTWARE
A. Web Server Front End
a. Description: Operator Interface Via Web Browser
The control system shall be as shown and consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network
of DDC controllers and a stand alone Web Server. The stand alone Web server shall be
a compact device capable of routing peer to peer communications of devices on the RS-
485 network to an Ethernet LAN. The Web Server shall be capable of storing all system
device definitions within the Web server and shall not require an external system
manager, computer, or controller to define or access system control devices. The Web
Server will allow users to interface with the network via dynamic color graphics served
over the Intranet or Internet via a standard Web Browser. The Web server shall be
capable of tabular and graphic displays of mechanical systems, building floor plans, or
control devices depicted by point-and-click graphics.
b. Operator Interface
1. Furnish one compact Web server interface as shown on the system drawings.
Operators shall be able to access all necessary operational information in the
system via personal computer utilizing standard Web browser software.
Computer and Web browsing software shall not be furnished under this section.
The Web server shall reside on the same Peer-to-Peer network as the Building
Controllers.
2. Web Server shall connect via Ethernet to a LAN and be able to serve up
controller information to simultaneous operators connected via the Ethernet or
telephone with standard Web Browsers. Each standard browser connected to
server shall be able to access all system information.
3. In addition to the primary operator interface, the system shall include a
secondary interface compatible with a locally available commercial wireless
network and viewable on a commercially available wireless device such as a
Wireless Access Protocol (WAP) enabled cellular telephone or personal digital
assistant (PDA). This secondary interface may be text-based and shall provide a
summary of the most important data.
D&A#07103 15900-11 St. Christopher Church Phase III
c. Web Server Hardware:
Furnish one compact Web server router with ethernet port for operator computer access.
The web server shall have an integrated RS-485 port for connection to the peer to peer
controller network. The web server shall not require a permanent keyboard or monitor,
however shall have an integrated terminal port for connecting a terminal and keyboard
during installation and configuration. The Web server shall allow file transfer of files from
another system for use as graphics backgrounds or custom displays.
d. Web Browser Interaction
1. The Web server shall be capable of providing the operator, at a Web Browser, with
both tabular or graphical pages of controller data. An operator with the proper
password level shall be able to change setpoint and occupancy schedules or
override points and remove overrides. Dynamic objects shall include analog and
binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files. Graphics shall have the
ability to show animation by shifting image files based on the status of the object.
2. Custom Graphics: Custom graphic files may be created with the use of a graphics
generation package. Graphics may be downloaded to the Web server to use as
graphical backgrounds for Dynamic data sent to a Web browser.
3. Graphics Library: Furnish a library of standard HVAC equipment graphics such as
chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators. The library
shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation package
program. Upon connection to the controls system the Web Server shall have the
capability to learn the controls system and automatically present default web pages
for each controller found.
4. Alarms. An operator shall be able to access a tabular listing of the systems most
recent alarm messages from a standard Web browser. This listing shall allow the
operator to manage the alarms and acknowledge, print, delete and hyperlink to
trouble areas.
5. Display Information. An operator shall have the capability to perform setup of the
Web Server from a standard Web browser. Setup shall include learning new
controllers that are added to the controls system, setting the time in controllers and
changing the display units of the data presented between Metric and Imperial units.
e. Performance Standards
System shall conform to the following minimum standards over network connections.
1. Graphic Display. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current data
within 10 sec.
2. Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current data
within 10 sec. and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec.
3. Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or
tuning points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 10
sec.
4. Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a binary object within 2 sec.
Devices shall begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec.
5. Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the
web browser within 15 sec.
f. Operator Functions
Operator interface shall allow each authorized operator to execute the following
functions as a minimum:
D&A#07103 15900-12 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1. Log In and Log Out. System shall require user name and password to log in to
operator interface.
2. Point-and-click Navigation. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall
allow operators to access graphics for equipment and geographic areas using point-
and-click navigation.
3. View and Adjust Equipment Properties. Operators shall be able to view controlled
equipment status and to adjust operating parameters such as setpoints, PID gains,
on and off controls, and sensor calibration.
4. View and Adjust Operating Schedules. Operators shall be able to view scheduled
operating hours of each schedulable piece of equipment on a weekly or monthly
calendar-based graphical schedule display, to select and adjust each schedule and
time period, and to simultaneously schedule related equipment. System shall clearly
show exception schedules and holidays on the schedule display.
5. View and Respond to Alarms. Operators shall be able to view a list of currently active
system alarms, to acknowledge each alarm, and to clear (delete) unneeded alarms.
6. View and Configure Trends. Operators shall be able to view a trend graph of each
trended point and to edit graph configuration to display a specific time period or data
range. Operator shall be able to create custom trend graphs to display on the same
page data from multiple trended points.
7. View and Configure Reports. Operators shall be able to run preconfigured reports, to
view report results, and to customize report configuration to show data of interest.
8. Manage Control System Hardware. Operators shall be able to view controller status
and download new control modifications to each controller.
9. Manage Operator Access. Typically, only a few operators are authorized to manage
operator access. Authorized operators shall be able to view a list of operators with
system access and of functions they can perform while logged in. Operators shall be
able to add operators, to delete operators, and to edit operator function authorization.
Operator shall be able to authorize each operator function separately.
g. System Software
1. Operating System. Web server shall have an industry-standard professional-grade
operating system. Acceptable systems include Microsoft Windows XP Pro.
2. System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall include at
least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics for each chilled
water and hot water system, and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of
each building included in this contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan
summary graphics using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to
zone setpoint.
a. Functionality. Graphics shall allow operator to monitor system status, to view a
summary of the most important data for each controlled zone or piece of
equipment, to use point-and-click navigation between zones or equipment, and to
edit setpoints and other specified parameters.
b. Animation. Graphics shall be able to animate by displaying different image files
for changed object status.
c. Alarm Indication. Indicate areas or equipment in an alarm condition using color or
other visual indicator.
d. Format. Graphics shall be saved in an industry-standard format such as JPEG,
or GIF. Web-based system graphics shall be viewable on browsers compatible
D&A#07103 15900-13 St. Christopher Church Phase III
with World Wide Web Consortium browser standards. Web graphic format shall
require no plug-in (such as HTML and JavaScript) or shall only require widely
available no-cost plug-ins (such as Active-X and Macromedia Flash).
h. System Tools
System shall provide the following functionality to authorized operators as an integral
part of the operator interface or as stand-alone software programs. If furnished as part of
the interface, the tool shall be available from each workstation or web browser interface.
If furnished as a stand-alone program, software shall be installable on standard IBM-
compatible PCs with no limit on the number of copies that can be installed under the
system license.
1. Automatic System Database Configuration. Each web server shall store on its hard
disk a copy of the current system database. Stored database shall be easily updated
with each system configuration or controller firmware or software change.
2. Controller Download. Operators shall be able to download configuration from the
system database to each controller.
3. System Configuration. Operators shall be able to configure the system.
4. Online Help. Context-sensitive online help for each tool shall assist operators in
operating and editing the system.
5. Security. System shall require a user name and password to view, edit, add, or
delete data.
a. Operator Access. Each user name and password combination shall define
accessible viewing, editing, adding, and deleting functions in each system
application, editor, and object. Authorized operators shall be able to vary and
deny each operator's accessible functions based on equipment or geographic
location.
b. Automatic Log Out. Automatically log out each operator if no keyboard or mouse
activity is detected. Operators shall be able to adjust automatic log out delay.
c. Encrypted Security Data. Store system security data including operator
passwords in an encrypted format. System shall not display operator passwords.
C. System Diagnostics. System shall automatically monitor controller and I/O point operation.
System shall annunciate controller failure and I/O point locking (manual overriding to a fixed
value).
D. Alarm Processing. System input and status objects shall be configurable to alarm on
departing from and on returning to normal state. Operator shall be able to enable or disable
each alarm and to configure alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, alarm states, and alarm
reactions for each system object. Configure and enable alarm points as specified in Points
List. Alarms shall be BACnet alarm objects and shall use BACnet alarm services.
E. Alarm Messages. Alarm messages shall use an English language descriptor without
acronyms or mnemonics to describe alarm source, location, and nature.
F. Alarm Reactions. Operator shall be able to configure (by object) actions workstation or web
server shall initiate on receipt of each alarm. As a minimum, workstation or web server shall
be able to log, print, display messages, send e-mail, send page, and audibly annunciate.
G. Alarm Maintenance. Operators shall be able to view system alarms and changes of state
chronologically, to acknowledge and delete alarms, and to archive closed alarms to the
workstation or web server hard disk from each workstation or web browser interface.
H. Trend Configuration. Operator shall be able to configure trend sample or change of value
(COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system data object and shall be able to
retrieve data for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs. Controller shall
D&A#07103 15900-14 St. Christopher Church Phase III
sample and store trend data and shall be able to archive data to the hard disk. Configure
trends as specified in Points List. Trends shall be BACnet trend objects.
I. Object and Property Status and Control. Operator shall be able to view, and to edit if
applicable, the status of each system object and property by menu or on graphics.
J. Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create, and to print reports
and logs. Operator shall be able to store report data in a format accessible by standard
spreadsheet and word processing programs.
K. Standard Reports. Furnish the following standard system reports:
a. Reports shall be filtered based upon the selected equipment
b. Alarm Reports
• Alarm Summary - . Current alarms
• Alarm Sources – List of equipment and associated alarm conditions
• Alarm Actions – Configured alarm actions such as e-mail and alarm pop-
up
c. Schedule Reports
• Effective Schedules – Displays effective schedules for each equipment
• Schedule Instances – Displays all schedules entered
d. Security Reports – Maintains audit of all actions taken through user interface
e. Commissioning Reports – Provide equipment checkout status and notes
f. Equipment Reports – Provide reports showing trended points and available
network points
L. Custom Reports. Operator shall be able to create custom reports that retrieve data,
including archived trend data, from the system, then organize the data and present results in
tabular or graphical format. Reports shall be launched from the operator interface.
M. Graphics Generation. Graphically based tools and documentation shall allow Operator to
edit system graphics, to create graphics, and to integrate graphics into the system. Operator
shall be able to add analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files
to a background graphic using a mouse.
N. Graphics Library. Complete library of standard HVAC equipment graphics shall include
equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators.
Library shall include standard symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, coils,
valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. Library graphic file format shall be compatible with
graphics generation tools.
END OF SECTION 15900
D&A#07103 16000-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL INDEX
INDEX TO ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section Title Page
16000 Electrical Index ...................................................................................................1-1
16010 General Provisions ...........................................................................................1-15
16040 Labeling and Identification..................................................................................1-6
16042 Testing and Proof of Performance .....................................................................1-4
16110 Electrical Raceways ...........................................................................................1-6
16120 Electrical Wiring..................................................................................................1-4
16130 Electrical Outlet & Junction Boxes .....................................................................1-4
16140 Electrical Wiring Devices and Contactors ..........................................................1-3
16160 Electrical Motor Starters .....................................................................................1-3
16170 Electrical Safety Switches ..................................................................................1-2
16180 Overcurrent Protection .......................................................................................1-7
16450 Grounding...........................................................................................................1-5
16470 Branch Circuit Panelboards................................................................................1-4
16472 Distribution Panelboards ....................................................................................1-4
16510 Electrical Light Fixtures ......................................................................................1-3
16551 Electrical Lamps .................................................................................................1-2
16552 Electrical Ballasts ...............................................................................................1-3
16670 Lightning Protection System...............................................................................1-3
16740 Telephone and Data Conduit System.................................................................1-2
16921 Temperature Control and Interlocking................................................................1-1
16930 Lighting Control Equipment ................................................................................1-7
END OF ELECTRICAL INDEX
D&A#07103 16010-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 All sections contained in Specifications and as indicated on Working Drawings, including
Divisions 00 and 01.
1.1.2 Contractor shall thoroughly review entire bid documents, including all drawings and
specifications prior to bidding and include all required electrical work in his bid, even if
not shown on electrical plans and specification.
1.2 SCOPE
1.2.1 This section of Specifications contains instructions and information applicable to
Electrical Contractor or his Subcontractors.
1.2.2 In event of conflict of requirements detailed in Drawings any subsequent sections of
General Provisions and any subsequent sections of Specifications, the bidder shall
inform Engineer of such conflict in writing not later than five days before such bids are
due. If such notification is not provided, Contractor shall accept Engineer's decision of
resolvement of such conflict without any further compensation.
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1 All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes.
1.3.2 Applicable codes and standards shall include all state laws, local ordinances, utility
company regulations and applicable requirements of nationally accepted codes and
standards.
1.3.3 In case of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, local
ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations and contract documents,
the most stringent shall govern. Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer in writing of
such difference.
1.3.4 Non-compliance: should Contractor perform any work that does not comply with
requirements of applicable building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry
standards and utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting
the deficiencies.
1.3.5 Building Codes: Indiana Building Code; Indiana Plumbing Code; Indiana Mechanical
Code; Indiana Department of Fire & Building Services; National Electric Code (NEC);
Indiana Electric Code and American Disabilities Act Title III, including Appendix ADAAG.
1.3.6 These requirements are to be considered minimum and are to be exceeded when so
indicated on Drawings or herein specified.
D&A#07103 16010-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.3.7 Industry Standards, Code and Specifications
1.3.7.1 ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
1.3.7.2 ANSI American National Standards Institute
1.3.7.3 ASTM American Society of Testing Materials
1.3.7.4 CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers
1.3.7.5 ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
1.3.7.6 IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
1.3.7.7 IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Assn.
1.3.7.8 JIC Joint Industrial Council
1.3.7.9 NBS National Bureau of Standards
1.3.7.10 NECA National Electrical Contractors Assn.
1.3.7.11 NEMA National Electrical Mfrs. Assn.
1.3.7.12 NESC National Electrical Safety Code
1.3.7.13 NFPA National Fire Protection Assn.
1.3.7.14 OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Act
1.3.7.15 UL Underwriters Laboratories
1.4 COORDINATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS
1.4.1 Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall study all Drawings applicable to work, so
complete coordination between trades will be effected. Special attention shall be given
to points where ducts cross other ducts or piping, where pipes, ducts and conduit pass
through walls and columns, etc.
1.4.2 It is responsibility of each Contractor and Subcontractor to leave necessary room for
other trades. No extra compensation will be allowed to cover cost of removing piping,
conduit, ducts or equipment found encroaching on space required by others.
1.4.3 See item 3.4 in this section.
1.4.4 All power outages shall be scheduled in advance with the Owner. At least two weeks
advance notice is required for power transfers to allow for building user notification and
scheduling.
1.5 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
1.5.1 Provide all required labor, materials, equipment and Contractor's services necessary for
complete installation of systems required in full conformity with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction, all as indicated on Drawings and herein specified.
1.5.2 Finished job shall be functional and complete in every detail including any and all such
items required for complete system, whether or not these items be specified or shown
on Drawings.
1.5.3 Special attention shall be given to accessibility of working and controlling parts.
Adjustable parts shall be within easy reach. Removable parts shall have space for
removal.
1.5.4 Each Contractor shall acquaint himself with details of all work to be performed by other
trades and take necessary steps to integrate and coordinate his work with other trades.
D&A#07103 16010-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.5.5 It should be particularly noted that the terms "furnish", "provide" and "install" are
interchangeable and each of these terms means to provide, install and connect, unless
otherwise stated.
1.5.6 It is assumed that Electrical Contractor is familiar with standard first class installation
procedures. Therefore, Specifications do not attempt to include every detail or
operation necessary for complete installation.
1.5.7 Wherever tables or schedules show quantities of materials, they shall not be used as
final count. These figures serve only as a guide to Contractor. Each Contractor shall be
responsible for furnishing all materials indicated on Drawings and in Specifications.
1.5.8 Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the protection, safekeeping and cleanliness
of all existing equipment, material, etc. located in spaces to be remodeled in which he is
working. As part of his responsibility, he shall provide necessary covers, structures,
etc., as required to keep all dirt, water, moisture and dust from equipment. Method the
Contractor proposes to use in protecting equipment shall be coordinated with Engineer
and Owner's Representative for approval before any work is started. Any damage
sustained during construction shall be corrected or replaced by Electrical Contractor.
1.5.9 See item 3.4 in this section.
1.6 DRAWINGS
1.6.1 Conduit runs are not shown on Drawings. Care shall be taken to coordinate conduit
runs with piping, ductwork and other equipment to be installed by other trades. Routing
of large conduits or groups of conduits shall be approved by Engineers.
1.6.2 In general, junction boxes are not shown on Drawings. Contractor may install small
junction boxes, concealed above ceilings, at his discretion as long as they are
accessible. Large junction boxes or those exposed in walls or ceilings shall have
locations approved by Engineer.
1.6.3 In general, number of wires for electrical circuits are not shown on Drawings. Number of
wires required shall be installed to provide indicated functions. Verify all wiring
requirements.
1.6.4 Wiring requirements for special systems may vary between acceptable manufacturers;
conduit system or riser diagram shown will be that required by indicated manufacturer,
but it shall be Contractor's responsibility to obtain wiring requirements from
manufacturer of equipment he intends to use and include cost of this wiring in his bid.
1.6.5 Electrical work shall conform to requirements shown on Drawings. Existing structure
shall take precedence over Electrical Drawings. Because of small scale of Electrical
Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be
required. Contractor shall investigate structural and finish conditions and provide such
fittings and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions.
1.6.6 See item 3.4 in this section.
D&A#07103 16010-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
1.7.1 Review of Shop Drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for correct
ordering of material and equipment. Shop Drawings shall be reviewed by the
Contractor, Design Engineer and Owner.
1.7.2 Include all significant data on Shop Drawing submittals shown in Specifications and
Equipment Schedule.
1.7.3 Contractor review should insure that equipment will fit into available space.
1.7.4 Submit Shop Drawings in brochure form and include all related equipment in one
brochure.
1.7.5 Submit six copies more than Contractor needs for his use.
1.7.6 After award of contract, submit within 30 days.
1.7.7 Submit Shop Drawings of panels, wiring devices, starters, disconnects, transformers,
light fixtures and fire alarm system.
1.7.8 Contractor to affix his company name (in form of a stamp) and project name to all Shop
Drawings and submittals before submitting.
1.7.9 Refer to Section 01300 Series of this Specification for additional requirements.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.8.1 Contractor shall submit prior to 50% job completion four maintenance manuals.
Manuals are to indicate all information relative to maintenance and operating
instructions for all new electrical equipment.
1.8.2 Operations and Maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be provided for each item of
equipment. O&M submittals shall be submitted in expandable 3-ring binders. Binders
shall contain a sufficient number of dividers to permit an orderly filing of submittals.
Each divider shall be labeled as to contents. O&M submittals shall include but not be
limited to the following:
1.8.2.1 Installation instructions and schematic drawings.
1.8.2.2 Operating and maintenance instructions.
1.8.2.3 Complete parts list with manufacturer's model numbers.
1.8.2.4 Complete set of approved shop drawings.
1.8.2.5 Complete wiring diagrams showing all connections and internal wiring diagrams of
all equipment, including module diagrams. Factory typical wiring diagrams are not
acceptable.
D&A#07103 16010-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.8.3 Also, as part of maintenance manuals, furnish a list of all motors used on the project
with the following information: equipment served, manufacturer, horsepower, full load
nameplate amps, voltage at motor, actual amp draw at full load, fuse size, overload size,
type and size of starters, where fed from and how controlled.
1.8.4 Refer to Section 01700 Series of this Specification for additional requirements.
1.9 PERMITS
1.9.1 Contractor shall pay for all permits required to carry out his work.
1.9.2 Permits shall be posted in prominent place at building site, protected properly from
weather and physical damage.
1.10 MINOR DEVIATIONS
1.10.1 For purpose of clarity and legibility, Drawings are essentially diagrammatic, although
size and location of equipment and piping are drawn to scale wherever possible. Verify
contract document information at site.
1.10.2 Drawings may indicate required sizes and points of termination and suggested routes. It
is not intention of Drawings to indicate all necessary offsets. Install work in manner to
conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and keep openings and
passageways clear. Do not scale from Drawings.
1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS (AS BUILTS)
1.11.1 During construction, maintain complete and legible set of Drawings, showing changes
and deviations between actual construction and Engineer's Drawings. Submit
marked-up sets to Engineer for review.
1.11.2 Refer to Section 01700 Series of this Specification for additional requirements.
1.11.3 As Built Drawings shall show ALL conduit routings, junction boxes and wiring.
1.12 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.12.1 Contractor shall perform the following at time the building is determined to be complete
and ready to turn over to Owner:
1.12.1.1 All burned out or inoperative lighting lamps and ballasts shall be replaced with new
lamps or ballasts by this Contractor.
1.12.1.2 All equipment and systems shall be checked by respective Contractor for correct
adjustment and operation and made to function as intended.
1.12.1.3 All moving parts shall be lubricated and all oil reservoirs and grease cups filled.
1.12.1.4 All temporary wiring, conduit, etc., shall be removed by respective Contractors.
1.12.1.5 Refer to Section 01700 Series of this Specification for additional requirements.
D&A#07103 16010-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.13 GUARANTEE
1.13.1 Unless noted otherwise, all workmanship, materials and equipment (excluding lamps)
shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after final acceptance of Project by Owner.
1.13.2 Contractor agrees to make good damage to construction of building or site, or
equipment which, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, is a result of, or incidental to,
use of materials, equipment or workmanship which is inferior, defective or not in
accordance with the Specifications.
1.13.3 Contractor shall keep works in good repair during the guarantee period. In case such
repairs become necessary, Owner shall give written notice to Contractor to commence
such repairs. If after 30 days the Contractor has failed to make such repairs, the Owner
may make such repairs either by its own employees or by independent contract and
may thereupon recover from Contractor and his Sureties the cost of repairs so made,
together with the cost of supervision and inspection thereof. Owner shall have 60 days
after expiration of said guarantee period in which to notify Contractor of any such repairs
necessary.
1.13.4 Determination of the necessity for repairs shall rest entirely with the Architect/Engineer
whose decision upon matter shall be final and obligatory upon the Contractor.
Guarantee herein stipulated shall extend to whole body improvement and all its
appurtenances.
1.13.5 Include the guarantee in the Maintenance Manual.
1.14 INSPECTION
1.14.1 At the completion of the electrical installation, the Electrical Contractor shall notify the
local and state authorities to arrange the final inspection of Work. Include the inspection
certificate in the Maintenance Manual.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSIGNMENT OF MISCELLANEOUS WORK
2.1.1 Excavating and backfilling for electrical work shall be by Electrical Contractor.
2.1.1.1 Properly support banks of excavation with safety sheet pile. Install necessary
guards. Provide adequate pumping equipment and keep excavation free of water.
2.1.1.2 Excavate pipe trenches to proper depth. Where rock is encountered, excavate to 6"
below pipe and refill to 6" above pipe with compacted granular fill. Granular fill shall
consist of dune sand, gravel or other suitable material containing not more than 10%
by weight passing #200 sieve and 100% passing 1" sieve.
2.1.1.3 Excavation for utilities shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed
and approved by Engineer and Power Company.
D&A#07103 16010-7 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.1.4 Whenever underground feeders are run below footings and grade beams,
Contractor shall backfill the void with poured, steel-reinforced concrete to elevation
of bottom of footing or grade beam.
2.1.1.5 Backfill within building lines shall be made with granular fill or compacted backfill
material laid in 6" layers and tamped to specified compaction after each layer.
2.1.1.6 Backfill under paved area shall be made with granular fill compacted backfill material
laid in 12" layers and tamped to compaction after each layer.
2.1.1.7 Backfill under open yards or fields shall be made with non-compacted backfill laid in
layers not to exceed 24" deep. Sand trenches may be allowed to settle naturally
and shall be refilled back to grade as required during first year after final
acceptance.
2.1.1.8 Contractor shall refill, regrade and refinish any area that becomes unsatisfactory
due to settlement within one year after final acceptance.
2.1.1.9 Contractor shall verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles and
topographical conditions prior to any trenching, excavation or underground
installation. In event existing conditions are such as to prevent installation in
accordance with Drawings, Contractor shall immediately notify Engineer.
2.1.1.10 Provide appropriate plastic marker tape buried directly above underground electric
and communication lines continuously along length of lines. Marker tape shall be
located 12” below finished grade, but no closer than 12” above underground lines.
Tape shall be a minimum of 6" wide.
2.1.1.11 Refer to Specification Section 02300 for additional requirements. In event of conflict
between this section and Section 02300, Section 02300 shall apply, unless
otherwise indicated by Engineer.
2.1.2 Roof openings and flashing required by Electrical Contractor shall be the responsibility
of the Electrical Contractor; however, all roofing work shall be performed by the roofing
contractor. Electrical Contractor is responsible for correct size and location of openings.
Counterflashing by Electrical Contractor.
2.1.2.1 Coordinate exact roofing material and approved penetrations with the General
Contractor prior to the installation of penetrations. Provide components and
installation as specified below or as directed by the General Contractor.
2.1.2.2 Conduit Roof Penetration Curb:
2.1.2.2.1 Curb shall be pre-fabricated pipe portal type with molded cover from ABS plastic
with laminated acrylic coating. Rubber seal cap to accommodate pipe sizes
listed on drawings. Seal cap shall be compression molded of EPDM rubber with
high resistance to both ozone and ultra violet sun rays. Fasteners shall be
stainless steel snaplock swivel action clamps and shall fasten pipe molded cover
to form a water tight seal.
D&A#07103 16010-8 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.2.2.2 Conduit roof penetrations may be grouped with other electrical conduits, HVAC
piping, and plumbing piping where penetrations of roof are located in the same
area. Coordinate other trade penetrations with the MC and PC.
2.1.2.2.3 Where electrical equipment is to be installed on the roof to serve rooftop units,
condensing units, or other equipment, provide the following:
2.1.2.2.3.1 The electrical contractor shall provide supports constructed of minimum 1"
rigid conduit, bolted or welded to roof structural system, extending through
roof pre-fabricated curb and permanently attached to electrical equipment.
Install electrical equipment 1'-6" above roof (unless otherwise noted) to
bottom of equipment.
2.1.2.2.3.2 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with above requirements, provide pipe
roof penetration curb from one of the following: Pate Curb Co.; Roof
Products and System Corporation.
2.1.3 Concrete pads and bases for electrical work shall be formed and poured by Electrical
Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall install all anchoring devices.
2.1.3.1 Unless noted otherwise, 4" pads (projecting 3" on all sides beyond equipment) shall
be used for switchboards, control centers, unit substations, motor controllers, etc.
Set bolts in pipe sleeves from templates or actual measurements. Set equipment
level and grout in place. Anchor equipment to pad.
2.1.3.2 Concrete used on this project shall have maximum slump of 4" and shall attain
3000psi compressive strength after 28 days. Smooth out all rough edges and
surfaces.
2.1.4 Platforms and supporting stands for electrical equipment shall be furnished by Electrical
Contractor.
2.1.4.1 Each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above
floor level shall be provided with suitable structural support, platform or carrier, in
accordance with best recognized practice.
2.1.4.2 Contractor shall exercise extreme care that structural members of building are not
overloaded by such equipment. In all cases, details of such hangers, platforms and
supports, together with total weight of mounted equipment, shall be approved by
Engineer.
2.1.5 Cutting and patching for electrical equipment shall be by Electrical Contractor.
2.1.5.1 Cut structural materials where required after approval from Architect and Engineer.
2.1.5.2 Electrical Contractor shall do all his own cutting and patching in finished area.
2.1.6 Ceiling and wall access panels for electrical equipment shall be furnished and installed
by Electrical contractor.
D&A#07103 16010-9 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.6.1 Wherever any electrical outlet, junction box, or item of equipment is concealed or
enclosed above or behind walls, ceilings, floors, bulkheads, etc., an access panel or
door shall be provided.
2.1.6.2 When access through acoustic tile ceiling is required, this shall be accomplished
wherever possible by use of removable ceiling tiles.
2.1.6.3 All access panels, doors and removable ceiling tiles required for electrical
equipment shall be provided and installed by Contractor as required and as
approved by Engineer.
2.1.6.4 Access panels or doors shall be of design suitable to type of construction at each
location. Locks shall be flush, screw driver-operated, cam action type. Doors and
frames shall be furnished in prime coat of gray, rust-inhibitive paint unless otherwise
specified. These units shall be manufactured by Milcor or approved equal.
2.1.7 Lintels required by Electrical Contractor shall be furnished by Electrical Contractor.
Electrical Contractor shall notify General Contractor of correct location for all lintels prior
to wall construction.
2.1.8 Sleeves and small openings (not framed) for electrical equipment shall be furnished and
set by Electrical Contractor.
2.1.8.1 Where electrical conduits pass through walls, roofs, ceilings, or floors, Electrical
Contractor shall have sleeves set for them when floors, walls, ceilings or roofs are
constructed. If any holes are cut in finished work where sleeves have been omitted,
cutting shall be done with a concrete coring machine or other approved means and
only with consent of Engineer. All such holes are to be carefully cut and shall not be
larger than necessary. These holes are to be entirely covered by escutcheon plates
when work is completed. Sleeves shall be made of pipe or rolled sheet steel no
lighter than #18 gauge.
2.1.8.2 Where conduits pass through sleeves in exterior walls above grade, annular space
shall be caulked with oakum and filled inside and out with non-hardening, waterproof
sealant finished off flush with both faces of wall.
2.1.8.3 Provide penetration seals for all conduits penetrating the building wall below grade.
This shall include service entrance, site power and lighting circuits, etc.
2.1.8.3.1 Description: The pipe to wall penetration closures shall be "Link-Seal" or equal,
as manufactured by PSI/Thunderline Corporation – Houston, TX. Seals shall be
modular type, consisting of synthetic rubber shaped to continuously fill the
annular space between the pipe and wall opening. After the seal assembly is
positioned in the sleeve, the rubber sealing elements shall provide an absolutely
water-right seal between the pipe and wall opening. The seal shall be
constructed as to provide electrical insulation between the pipe and wall, thus
reducing changes of cathodic reaction between these two members.
2.1.8.3.2 Wall Opening: Provide “Century-Line” sleeves or equal as manufactured by
PSI/Thunderline Corporation – Houston, TX. Contractor shall determine the
required inside diameter of each individual wall opening of sleeve before
ordering, fabricating or installing. The inside diameter of each wall opening shall
D&A#07103 16010-10 St. Christopher Church Phase III
be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and Link-Seal to
assure a water-tight joint. Sizing (correct Link-Seal model and number of links
per seal) may be obtained through manufacturer's catalog. If pipe O.D is non-
standard due to coating, insulation, etc. consult Thunderline's factory for
engineering assistance and recommendation before proceeding with wall
opening detail.
2.1.9 Holes through Structural members: holes required for conduit of size 5" and smaller
shall be cut in field at expense of Electrical Contractor. Structural Engineer shall give
approval prior to any cutting.
2.1.10 Pitch Pockets: required for conduit penetrating roof by Electrical Contractor. Electrical
Contractor to seal sleeves and provide flashing.
2.1.11 Color Coding: responsibility for correct color coding shall be by Electrical Contractor.
2.1.12 Dust Protection: temporary partitions or barriers required to protect existing building or
facility shall be provided by Electrical Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate
necessity and location of such protection with Owner.
2.1.13 Painting of electrical equipment, conduits, etc., shall be in accordance with painting part
of the Specification. Painting shall be by others, except as indicated below, who will
paint work of Electrical Contractor; however, each Contractor shall thoroughly clean all
his own equipment, apparatus and piping in manner satisfactory to Architect and Owner.
Equipment furnished with factory applied finish shall be protected from injury and any
damaged surface shall be repaired by Electrical Contractor to match original finish or
shall be replaced before final acceptance. The Electrical Contractor shall provide color-
code painting as required to comply with Section 16040 of these specifications.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
2.2.1 Electrical equipment shall be new, listed by UL and shall conform to NEMA and IPCEA
standards.
2.2.2 Materials used for like service shall be by same manufacturer (i.e., all motor starters to
be by same manufacturer).
2.2.3 All materials and equipment, including any hangers, supports, fastenings or accessory
fittings, shall have corrosion protection suitable for atmosphere in which they are
installed, whether located indoors or out. Care shall be taken during installation to
assure integrity of corrosion protection.
2.2.4 All screws, bolts, nuts, clamps, fittings or other fastening devices shall be made up tight.
All bolts, screws, nuts and other threaded devices shall have standard threads and
heads so they may be installed and replaced when necessary without special tools.
2.3 PRODUCT AND MATERIAL APPROVAL
2.3.1 A Specification followed by one or more manufacturers is limited to those
manufacturers. Names of other manufacturers may be submitted for approval to
Engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to receiving bids. Approval will be issued by
Addendum if granted.
D&A#07103 16010-11 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3.2 A Specification followed by one or more manufacturers and "or approved equal" is open
to all equal products or materials; however, Contractor shall supply one of listed
manufacturers at no additional cost if Engineer finds substituted product unsatisfactory.
2.4 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY SCHEDULE
2.4.1 Submit upon request a schedule listing equipment and materials required for complete
installation, quantity ordered, date of placing order and promised delivery date.
2.5 MATERIAL STORAGE
2.5.1 Provide suitable protection from weather and vandalism for all materials and equipment
to be installed. Storage shall be dry, clean and safe. Any materials or equipment
damaged, deteriorated, rusted or defaced due to improper storage shall be fully
repaired, refinished or replaced as directed by Engineer.
2.6 TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT
2.6.1 Should it become necessary or desirable to operate any equipment before final
acceptance, Owner shall be allowed to do so, but only after proper adjustment and trial
operation by Contractor specified. Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for
instructing Owner or his Representative as to proper operation and care of equipment
so used. Owner shall be responsible for proper care and supervision of equipment
before acceptance and shall safeguard same in every way.
2.7 CAULKING AND FIRE STOPPING
2.7.1 All raceway and sleeve penetrations of fire barriers shall be sealed to achieve fire
resistance equivalent to fire separation.
2.7.1.1 Maintain fire rating per ASTM E-814 and UL 1479.
2.7.1.2 This assembly must also maintain a watertight seal between floor or wall and pipe.
2.7.1.3 Refer to Specification Section 07841.
2.7.2 For other penetrations through non-rated walls, partitions, floors and ceilings, caulk the
space between raceways and raceway sleeves with non-staining, waterproof gun grade
compound. Apply caulking compound by the gun method using nozzles of a proper size
to fit the width of joint. Prepare the joint for caulking by packing it tightly with a resilient
foam or rope yarn.
2.7.3 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
2.7.3.1 Penetration sealant:
2.7.3.1.1 3M Brand "Moldable Putty Pads": and "Moldable Putty Stix"
D&A#07103 16010-12 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.7.3.1.2 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk, Putty or Penetrating Sealing Systems
2.7.3.1.3 Dow Corning "Fire Stop Foam: and "Fire Stop Sealant" systems
2.7.3.1.4 Insta-Foam Products, Inc. "Insta-Fire Seal Silicone RTV Foam"
2.7.3.1.5 Standard Oil Engineering Materials Company, "Frye Putty"
2.7.3.1.6 Chase technology "Chase Foam #CTC PR-855"
2.7.3.2 Intumescent Sealant for use at openings and sleeves involving flexible cable.
2.7.3.2.1 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" caulk or putty, FS-195 Wrap Strip and CS-195
Composite Sheet.
2.7.3.2.2 Dow Corning "Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap Strip"
2.7.3.2.3 Fox Couplings, Inc. "The Fox Cast-in-Place Coupling"
2.7.4 Performance Characteristic: firestopping materials shall conform to both Flame (F) and
Temperature (T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814
or UL 1479 fire test.
2.7.4.1 F Rating shall be a minimum of one hour but not less than the fire resistance rating
of the assembly being penetrated.
2.7.4.2 Conduct the fire test with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01" of water
column.
2.7.5 Quality Assurance: installer qualifications - firm specializing in firestopping installation
with not less than two years of experience or trained and approved by firestopping
manufacturer.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 ATTACHING TO BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
3.1.1 Equipment raceway supports shall be attached to structural members (beams, joists,
etc.) rather than to floor or roof slabs. Do not attach to ceiling support wires.
3.1.2 Where equipment and raceway is suspended from existing concrete or masonry
construction, use expansion shields to attach supports to construction. Expansion
shield bolt diameter shall be same size as support rod diameter, hereinafter specified.
Expansion shields shall be Star Double, Star Gloxin, Star Loxin or approved equal.
3.1.3 Where existing masonry is not suitable to receive and hold expansion shield or where
other means of attachment is advantageous, Contractor shall submit alternate method
for approval by Engineer.
3.1.4 Equipment to be installed in groups shall not be mounted directly to masonry or
concrete walls. Mount 1" x 1" structural channel such as Unistrut, to wall and secure
equipment to these channels.
D&A#07103 16010-13 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.5 Where raceway is suspended from structural steel building framing or supporting
members, furnish and install beam clamps for attaching piping device to building
member.
3.1.6 Obtain approval from Owner or Structural Engineer before cutting or welding to
structural members, or before hanging heavy equipment.
3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
3.2.1 In event that supplier requires larger starter or disconnect than those indicated on
documents, he shall reimburse Contractor supplying these items for difference.
3.2.2 Connections and wiring diagrams shown on Drawings or described in Specifications are
typical and are for bidding purposes only. Detailed diagrams and instructions shall be
provided by Contractor supplying equipment if connections are different from those
shown on Drawings. Diagrams shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to
actual wiring.
3.2.3 Additional relays, switches, contactors, etc., which may be required for control purposes
in addition to those specified for and indicated on Drawings shall be provided by
Electrical Contractor and his Subcontractors. These devices shall be mounted by
supplier within 5'0" of apparatus to be installed. Electrical Contractor shall provide all
additional wire and electrical connections without additional charge to Owner.
3.3 ESCUTCHEONS
3.3.1 Install chromeplated escutcheons on exposed bare conduit, leaving and entering walls,
floors, ceilings, etc.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
3.4.1 All equipment must be installed such that maintenance and service may be properly
accomplished. If necessary, the Owner, at their option, may require the contractor to
demonstrate the service on any piece of equipment to determine sufficient service
space exists. If the service space is not adequate, the equipment shall be relocated at
no additional cost to the Owner such that sufficient service space is achieved.
3.5 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS
3.5.1 All work shall comply with current requirements of U.S. Department of
Labor-Occupational Safety and Health Administration, entitled Occupational Safety and
Health Standards; National Consensus Standards and Established Federal Standards.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16040-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16040
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 Scope of Work: Provide labeling and identification as described herein for all mentioned
equipment.
1.1.2 Work Included:
1.1.2.1 This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment and
installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components
including but not limited to the following:
1.1.2.1.1 Buried electrical line warnings.
1.1.2.1.2 Identification labeling for cables and conductors.
1.1.2.1.3 Operational instruction signs.
1.1.2.1.4 Warning and caution signs.
1.1.2.1.5 Equipment labels and signs.
1.1.2.1.6 Low voltage wiring color standards.
1.1.3 Painting
1.1.3.1 Painting shall be performed by the General Contractor as specified in Division I of
these specifications. However, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for
correct color-coding of raceways.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1 Reference Standard
1.2.1.1 Wire tags: Brady "PMW" Series
1.2.1.2 Nameplates: Hermes laminated plastic
1.2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Brady Labels, Ideal, AMP, Hermes Nameplates, Seton,
Panduit
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFICATION
2.1.1 Raceway System Labels
2.1.1.1 Pre-printed stick-on labels or indelible marker shall be used for labeling all
raceways; however, at Contractor's option, labels may be painted stencil letters
using black paint on light colored raceway for 2" trade size and larger.
D&A#07103 16040-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.1.2 Letters/numbers 1/2" high shall be used for raceway smaller than 2" trade size,
junction and pull boxes 4" x 4" and smaller.
2.1.1.3 Letters/numbers 1" high shall be used for raceway 2" trade size and larger, junction
and pull boxes larger than 4" x 4".
2.1.2 Nameplates
2.1.2.1 Nameplates shall be white core laminated plastic with black base having engraved
letters. Letter nomenclature and size shall be as hereinafter specified. Fasteners
for nameplates shall be self-tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32
stainless steel screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
2.1.2.1.1 Nameplates shall be black base for normal power system.
2.1.2.1.2 Nameplates shall be red base for emergency power system.
2.1.3 Wire Tags
2.1.3.1 Wire tags shall be self-adhesive type having letters and numerals indicating
panelboard and circuit number.
2.1.4 Rotation Tags
2.1.4.1 Rotation tags shall be brass or aluminum securely attached to equipment.
2.1.5 Underground Line Marking Tape
2.1.5.1 Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, plastic tape compounded for direct-
burial service and not less than 6" wide by 4 mils thick. Printed legend indicative of
general type of underground line below.
2.1.6 Lettering and Graphics
2.1.6.1 Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors and other designations used in electrical
identification Work with corresponding designations specified and with the Owner.
Install numbers, lettering and colors as approved in submittals and as required by
the Owner.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Surfaces
3.1.1.1 Surfaces to receive labels or nameplates shall be carefully prepared in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
D&A#07103 16040-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.2 APPLICATIONS
3.2.1 Raceway
3.2.1.1 All raceways, junction and pull boxes both exposed and concealed above accessible
ceilings shall be labeled identifying contents. Labels shall be applied every 20'-0" of
the raceway length; no portion of raceway within a space shall be unlabeled.
3.2.2 Wiring and Cabling
3.2.2.1 All cable not run in a raceway shall be grouped together by system, tie wrapped,
and labeled. Labels shall be applied every 20'-0", and no portion of the cable run
within a space shall be unlabeled.
3.2.3 Label Nomenclature and Color Coding for raceways and low voltage wiring shall be as
follows:
Item Raceway and Box Label Color Code
Power Raceway & Boxes DANGER (voltage contained)
(Normal power - black
letters, Emergency power-red
letters) Example: DANGER 480V
Category 5 Wiring "CAT 5" blue
Fire Alarm System "FA" red
Lighting Control "LIGHTS" yellow
Intercom System "INT" white
Sound System "SOUND" gray
Video System "VIDEO" black
Television System "TV" purple
Fiber Optics "FIBER" orange
Temperature Controls "TC" green
Telephone “TELE” beige
3.2.4 Branch Circuit Panelboards
3.2.4.1 In addition to permanent UL/NEMA nameplate, panelboards shall be labeled as to
panelboard identification, feeder source, feeder ampacity, voltage and equipment
served. Provide engraved micarta nameplate centered at top front of trim panel.
Minimum letter size shall be 3/16" high. Interior of panel shall be labeled with
indelible marker to identify panelboard when trim is removed.
3.2.4.2 Panelboards in finished, occupied areas shall be finished to match associated
surfaces.
3.2.4.3 Panelboards shall include correct, typewritten circuit directory cards identifying load
serviced by branch circuit protective devices and points, equipment or areas served.
Directories shall use Owner furnished room numbers, not Architectural room
numbers.
D&A#07103 16040-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.2.5 Distribution Switchboards and Panelboards
3.2.5.1 In addition to permanent UL/NEMA nameplate, distribution panelboards shall be
labeled as to distribution panelboards identification, feeder source, feeder ampacity,
voltage and equipment served. Provide engraved micarta nameplate with minimum
3/16" high letters.
3.2.6 Disconnect Switches, Motor Controls, Timers, Relays and Contactors
3.2.6.1 Disconnect switches, motor controls, timers, relays and contactors including remote
pushbuttons and toggle switches shall be labeled to identify circuit number, load
served, power source and any equipment interlock. Engraved micarta nameplate
with minimum 3/16" high letters.
3.2.6.2 Motor control centers shall be labeled similar to switchboard.
3.2.6.3 Starters with complex interlocks with other starters or controls shall be provided with
labels on the inside of cover stating the nature of the interlock. (i.e. "Interlocked
With Duct Smoke Detector"). Otherwise, simple interlocks shall be part of the
external nameplate.
3.2.7 Outlet Receptacles & Switches
3.2.7.1 Coverplate of each outlet receptacle shall be labeled on inside face with indelible
marker identifying the panelboard and branch circuit protective device servicing the
device. Contractor shall ensure that marker does not “bleed through” coverplate
such that it is visible from the finished space. Contractor shall replace coverplate if
this occurs.
3.2.8 Wiring
3.2.8.1 Self adhesive wire tags as specified herein shall be applied to each conductor in
switchboard, panelboards, junction boxes, pull boxes, outlets, disconnect switches,
motor controls, motor control centers, and other electrical equipment identifying
power source and branch circuit protective device serving the equipment.
3.2.8.2 Conductors shall be color coded using the same color for each conductor within a
system. Basic color code for 208/120 VAC wiring shall be green ground, white
neutral, and black, red, blue for Phases A,B,C, respectively; for 480/277 VAC wiring
yellow-taped green ground, gray neutral, and brown, orange, yellow for phases A, B,
and C respectively.
3.2.9 Multi-Phase Motors
3.2.9.1 Multi-phase motors shall be labeled to indicate direction of rotation using a brass,
aluminum or stainless steel rotation arrow tag securely attached.
3.2.10 System Cabinets and Wiring
3.2.10.1 Electrical system cabinets including fire alarm, sound and television cabinets shall
be labeled as to cabinet identification and area, unit, or building served by the
D&A#07103 16040-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
cabinet, as well as the equipment controlled, circuit feeding the device and any
interlocks.
3.2.10.2 Self-adhesive wire tags as specified herein shall be applied to each conductor or
cable in cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes, and outlet boxes uniquely identifying
each conductor or cable.
3.2.10.3 Loose system cables shall be grouped together by system, tie wrapped, and
labeled.
3.2.10.4 Provide typewritten directory or schedule with date, project name, project in each
cabinet. The directory or schedule shall list each wire identification number, terminal
strip and terminal number, device/station number served, room/area served, and
wire color code. Provide transparent sealable envelope or other acceptable holder in
each cabinet for the documents.
3.2.10.5 For existing system cabinets which are to be modified, wire labeling and
identification shall be updated as described above for the project area. Other wiring
within the cabinets shall be labeled as "not verified date" where applicable.
3.2.10.6 Submit system cabinet wire labeling and identification, directory, or schedules for
review by Architect/Engineer and include in operation and maintenance manuals.
3.2.11 Underground Electrical Line Identification
3.2.11.1 During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, signal and
communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located
directly above line at 12 inches below finished grade. Where multiple lines are
installed in a common trench or concrete envelope, and do not exceed an overall
width of 16" install a single line marker. If overall width exceeds 16”, install multiple
line markers spaced a minimum 12” apart. Coordinate with engineer.
3.2.12 Warning, Caution or Instruction Signs
3.2.12.1 Install warning, caution or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated,
or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical
systems and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated
instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are
needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing
for outdoor items.
3.2.13 Emergency Operating Signs
3.2.13.1 Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum
3/8" high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding or
other emergency operations.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16042-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16042
TESTING AND PROOF OF PERFORMANCE
1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 Scope of Work:
1.1.1.1 Perform all tests as specified herein under the supervision of the Owner's
representative and/or the Architect/Engineer.
1.1.2 Work Included:
1.1.2.1 Wire and Cable
1.1.2.2 Wiring Devices
1.1.2.3 Motor Controllers
1.1.2.4 Disconnects
1.1.2.5 Grounding
1.1.2.6 Transformers
1.1.2.7 Switchboards and Panelboards
1.1.2.8 Lighting Control System (including Dimming Systems)
1.1.2.9 Fire Alarm System
1.1.2.10 Sound Systems
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Reports
1.2.1.1 Accurately record and report the methods of testing, times and dates of the test,
witnesses to the test, and the results of the test. The test reports shall be neatly
typewritten on standard 8-1/2" x 11" sheets and submitted in five (5) copies to the
Architect/Engineer for review within five (5) days after the test has been performed
and shall be included as part of Maintenance Manuals.
1.3 CONDITIONS
1.3.1 Scheduling
1.3.1.1 As much as practical, tests shall be scheduled so as to allow a representative from
the Architect/Engineer's office to witness the test. In every case, the
Architect/Engineer shall be notified a minimum of seventy-two (72) hours prior to
anticipated testing.
1.3.1.2 Notify Owner seventy-two (72) hours prior to interruption of any services.
1.3.1.3 Before scheduling for testing the system shall be:
1.3.1.3.1 Functional and ready for testing.
D&A#07103 16042-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.3.1.3.2 Temperature, ventilation, control and interlocking wiring, humidity and other such
factors are at or near actual system operating condition.
1.3.2 Partial Testing
1.3.2.1 As much as practical, systems shall be tested complete as systems. Tests on
portions of a system are authorized to allow for proper progress scheduling. When
systems are tested in segments, a separate and complete report is required for each
segment. Segmented reports shall include a system diagram indicating portion of
system tested.
1.3.3 Concealed Work
1.3.3.1 Concealed work (including underground) shall be tested by the Contractor and shall
be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer prior to covering up.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TESTING EQUIPMENT
2.1.1 Instrumentation
2.1.1.1 Instruments used by the Contractor shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in
good working condition.
2.1.1.2 Products and test instruments used shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be
subject to acceptance by the Architect/Engineer.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING PROCEDURES
3.1.1 Wire and Cable
3.1.1.1 Record operating phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral voltages for all equipment
terminations (switchboard, motor controllers, panelboards, motors, etc.)
3.1.1.2 Record operating amperage on each phase and neutral conductor at switchboard,
and panelboards.
3.1.1.3 Verify phase balance at all panelboards. The phase balance shall be within + 10
percent. (Measure current on each phase and average the readings. Each phase
shall be within + 10 percent of average reading.)
3.1.1.4 All feeders and circuits rated 100 amps or more shall be megger tested prior to
energizing. Submit test results to Engineer prior to energizing.
3.1.2 Wiring Device
3.1.2.1 Verify voltage and polarity at each outlet.
D&A#07103 16042-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.2.2 Verify positive ground connection at each outlet.
3.1.3 Motor Controllers
3.1.3.1 Record operating amperage and phase-to-phase voltage for each motor.
3.1.3.2 Record thermal heater size in each phase.
3.1.3.3 Verify proper rotation of motor.
3.1.4 Disconnects
3.1.4.1 Record operating amperage and phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral voltage.
3.1.4.2 Record fuse size in each phase.
3.1.5 Grounding
3.1.5.1 Measure and record resistance for all service, equipment, and electronic grounds,
using the fall-of-potential method. Resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms.
3.1.6 Transformers
3.1.6.1 Record operating phase to phase and phase to neutral voltage on both primary and
secondary sides.
3.1.6.2 Record operating amperage on each phase and neutral on both primary and
secondary sides.
3.1.6.3 Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulators, tightness of connections, defective
wiring and general mechanical and electrical conditions as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.1.6.4 Verify proper grounding.
3.1.7 Switchboards and Panelboards
3.1.7.1 Record operating phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages.
3.1.7.2 Record operating amperage on each phase and neutral.
3.1.7.3 Inspect all mechanical connections and ensure bolted connections are tightened to
manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide written verification that all connectors
and overcurrent devices are properly installed.
3.1.7.4 Exercise all active components.
3.1.8 Light Control System
3.1.8.1 Verify proper operation of all dimming circuits.
D&A#07103 16042-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.8.2 Verify proper operation of all switched circuits.
3.1.8.3 Verify that all functions specified can be performed.
3.1.9 Fire Alarm System
3.1.9.1 Manually test each sending station for proper operation.
3.1.9.2 Manually test each smoke detector as indicated by the manufacturer and in
accordance with NFPA requirements.
3.1.9.3 Verify proper operation of each audible signal.
3.1.9.4 Verify proper zone annunciation by observation of annunciators as stations and
detectors are activated.
3.1.9.5 Provide a temporary "open" and "grounded" circuit in each zone and verify proper
operation of trouble bell.
3.1.10 Refer to specific specification sections for testing requirements of automatic transfer
switch and sound systems.
3.1.11 Engage services of the manufacturer’s local representative for testing of the Owner
provided emergency generator. Perform all normal and routine tests after installation.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16110-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16110
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Electrical Wiring: Section 16120
1.1.4 Electrical Outlet & Junction Boxes: Section 16130
1.1.5 Grounding: Section 16450
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
2.1.1 Rigid Steel Heavy Wall Type (rigid): full weight mild steel pipe of standard pipe
dimensions; uniform wall thickness; threaded with coupling on one end; hot dip
galvanized or sherardized; UL approved. Allied, Republic Steel, Wheatland or equal.
2.1.2 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): hot dip galvanized or sherardized steel with
biochromate finish inside and outside; standard pipe dimensions, threaded; UL
approved. Allied, Republic Steel, Triangle or equal.
2.1.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT-Thinwall): galvanized or sherardized steel type; UL
approved. Allied, Republic Steel, Wheatland or equal.
2.1.4 Flexible Type: galvanized, grounding and single strip type with smooth wiring channel;
UL approved; neoprene jacketed in moist locations and for connections to motors.
American Brass Sealtite Type EF, Electri-Flex, H.K. Porter, O.Z. or approved equal.
2.1.5 Non-Metallic Rigid Conduit (PVC): virgin C300 type; Schedule 40 or 80 (90oC).
Constructed in accordance with NEMA TC2 and Federal Specifications W-C-1094A.
2.1.6 Surface Raceway (Wiremold): one piece metallic surface raceway system, complete
with all fittings. Wiremold #700 Series or equal.
2.2 FITTINGS
2.2.1 Steel Conduit Bodies: threaded, or compression type, steel or malleable iron for rigid
steel, copper free aluminum alloy for aluminum; fittings shall be standard pipe
dimensions and maintain continuity of ground. Steel City, Raco, Thomas & Betts, or
equal.
D&A#07103 16110-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.2.2 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): all fittings shall be rain-tight, concrete-tight
compression type thin-wall, steel. Fittings shall maintain continuity of ground. Steel
City, Raco, Thomas & Betts or equal.
2.2.3 Flexible: liquid-tight connectors shall have insulated throats, steel or malleable iron
body, neoprene gasket and maintain continuity of ground. Connectors shall be
compression type. O.Z., Thomas & Betts or equal.
2.2.4 Non-Metallic Conduit: fittings shall be of the same type and manufacturer as the
raceway, connected in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
2.2.5 Bushings: metallic or insulated, as required; steel or malleable iron construction of
standard pipe dimensions. Steel City, Raco, Thomas & Betts or equal.
2.2.6 Lock Nuts: case hardened steel or malleable iron. Lock nut shall insure continuity of
ground. Steel City, Raco, Thomas & Betts or equal.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
2.3.1 Hangers: pinch type standard conduit hanger with stove bolts. For use on rigid and
EMT conduit. Minerallac, Raco or equal.
2.3.2 Straps: one hole type, malleable iron, rugged construction. Raco, Thomas & Betts or
equal.
2.3.3 Racks and Supports: metal framing channel of cold rolled steel, continuous slot with
inturned clamping ridges, case hardened nuts with serrated grooves. Channel shall be
hot dipped galvanized. Globe Strut, Power Strut, Unistrut or equal.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY USAGE
3.1.1 Raceways inside the building: EMT.
3.1.2 Exposed raceways in Moist Locations or Exposed to Weather: rigid steel.
3.1.3 Final Connections to Motors, Transformers or Other Equipment Requiring Movement or
Subject to Vibration: flexible raceway neoprene jacketed.
3.1.4 From Outlet Box to Recessed Lighting Fixture: flexible raceway.
3.1.5 Short Connections and in other Locations where use of Rigid Raceway is Impractical:
flexible raceway (maximum length shall not exceed 6 feet).
3.1.6 Underground Service Feeders and branch Circuits or raceways below slab on grade:
PVC.
3.1.7 All other Locations unless noted otherwise on Drawings: EMT.
3.1.8 For Mechanical Protection: rigid steel.
D&A#07103 16110-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2.1 Cut all conduit ends square, ream smooth and draw up tight with conduit fittings.
3.2.2 Raceway shall be terminated with locknuts and bushings. Conduit shall enter squarely
and locknuts shall be installed so dished part is against the box. Two locknuts, one
inside and one outside the box, shall be used to facilitate the termination and to make it
secure. Provide insulated bushing on end of conduit sized 1 1/4" and larger.
3.2.3 When terminating in threaded hubs, the conduit or fitting shall be screwed tight into the
hub so that the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. When chase nipples are
used, the raceway and coupling shall be square to box and chase nipple tightened with
no exposed threads.
3.2.4 Raceway fittings shall be compatible with type of conduit used, approved for use and
location. All fittings shall be made up tight. Where field conditions are such that tight
connections cannot be made, bonding jumpers shall be installed to insure continuity of
conduit system. When terminations are subject to vibration, bonding jumpers or wedges
shall be used to insure electrical continuity.
3.2.5 Unless otherwise indicated, raceways shall be installed above ceilings or in walls (i.e.,
do not install raceway in floors). Each device shall be individually fed from above from a
junction box located above the ceiling. (i.e. Do Not route multiple circuit through conduit
drops to devices or through device boxes. This is to facilitate future troubleshooting.)
This requirement shall not apply to circuits refeeding existing devices.
3.2.6 Raceway installed below concrete slabs on grade shall maintain a minimum depth of
12" below top of slab. Conduit may be installed in crushed stone base if adequate
space is available.
3.2.7 Conduit shall be supported by wall brackets, pipe straps or trapeze hangers spaced not
more than 10'0" on center or as required by code, and at each elbow and within 3'0" of
each outlet box, junction box, cabinet and fitting, or as required by code. In no case
shall weight of conduit runs be supported by junction boxes, conduit fittings,
panelboards, etc. Use only one hole strap hangers at elevations less than 8'6" above
floor line for single conduit support.
3.2.8 All pipe straps and concrete inserts shall be galvanized. Hangers and rods shall be
prime coated. Clamps for conduits installed exposed to damp locations shall be
provided with backs to prevent accumulation of moisture around raceway.
3.2.9 Raceway above ceilings shall be supported from building structure, not from ceiling
suspension system.
3.2.10 Conceal raceways in walls, ceilings, or furred spaces in finished areas where possible.
Install raceways in slabs only where specifically indicated or approved. For devices
being installed on existing walls, contractor shall provide recessed box and conceal
raceways in existing walls from overhead. However, majority of exterior block walls are
filled with insulation, in which case surface raceway (“Wiremold”) shall be used. Verify
all field conditions.
D&A#07103 16110-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.2.11 Use steel compression type fittings for EMT raceways.
3.2.12 No conduit smaller than 3/4" shall be used. All conduit shall be of standard pipe sizes.
3.2.13 Fittings similar to condulet type shall be used as required to keep conduits close to
building surfaces. Exposed raceway shall be run parallel to walls, floors and ceilings and
shall be located to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3.2.14 Protect conduits during construction with temporary plugs and caps. Clean out all
raceway prior to installation of wiring as required.
3.2.15 No outlets shall be installed back-to-back through a wall. There shall be a minimum
separation of one stud space between boxes (i.e., boxes on opposite sides of wall shall
be installed in different stud spaces). All raceway shall be installed to drain to outlet
where possible. Refrain from "U" shaped installations as much as possible. Exposed
convenience outlets, switches, etc. shall be serviced from the ceiling unless otherwise
instructed.
3.2.16 Install expansion fittings where raceway crosses building expansion fittings.
3.2.17 A separation of at least 6" shall be maintained between conduits and hot water lines.
3.2.18 All raceways on exterior of building or passing through exterior walls, floors, or roof shall
be made water-tight and openings through which they pass shall be grouted, flashed,
counterflashed and caulked water- tight. Pierced vapor barriers shall be repaired
vaporproof. No raceway shall be run in location subject to excessive heat, such as
under boiler or incinerator.
3.2.19 Slide-on one piece escutcheon plates shall be used where exposed conduit passes into
walls, ceilings and floors. Escutcheon plates shall cover sleeves.
3.2.20 Exposed raceways suspended from structure shall be installed no lower than 7'-0" AFF.
If raceway must be installed lower than this, Contractor shall wrap raceways with
padding and yellow/black striped warning tape.
3.2.21 Raceways shall be installed at right angles or parallel to building construction.
3.2.22 All spare conduits shall include a nylon pull cord.
3.2.23 There shall not be more than the equivalent of three 90o bends in any single run of
conduit between outlet boxes or fittings.
3.2.24 Mount all conduits a minimum of seven inches above any accessible ceiling or with
spacing as required to permit relocation of recessed light fixtures to any location.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3.3.1 Hangers
D&A#07103 16110-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.3.1.1 Approved hangers and stiff leg supports shall be installed in quantity and size as
required to carry the weight of raceway and contents and shall be arranged to
prevent vibration transmission to the building and allow for raceway movement.
3.3.1.2 Hangers shall be supported by means of uncoated solid steel rods which are
threaded to allow vertical adjustments. Lock nuts shall be provided in sufficient
number and location to lock all rod adjustments permanently at the adjusted height.
Two lock nuts shall be used unless the nut tightens against a threaded socket.
Minimum rod diameters shall be as follows:
NOMINAL RACEWAY SIZE ROD DIAMETER
1/2" thru 2" 1/4"
2-1/2" thru 3" 3/8"
4" and 5" 1/2"
3.3.1.3 Hanger spacing shall be as required for proper and adequate support of raceway,
but in no case shall be less than one hanger per 8'-0" of raceway length except that
conduit less than 1" diameter shall be supported at least every 6'-0".
3.3.1.4 Where numerous raceways are run in parallel to one another, they may be
supported from a trapeze type hanger arrangement with strut bottom.
3.3.1.5 Anti-vibration type hangers shall be provided for all equipment (i.e., transformers,
etc.) and elsewhere as required to minimize vibration transmission to building
structure or as directed by Architect/Engineer.
3.3.1.6 Installation of hangers shall be approved by Engineer. Refer to drawings for special
notes and details. Contractor shall install special hangers as directed by Engineers
at no additional cost.
3.3.2 Supports
3.3.2.1 Support of hangers shall be by means of sufficient quantities of individual after set
steel expansion shields, or beam clamps attached to structural steel.
3.3.2.2 Stiff legs shall be furnished and installed in cases where support from overhead
structure is not possible.
3.3.2.3 Where "lay-in" type fluorescent fixtures are interfaced with ceiling tees, Contractor
shall provide seismic clips to T-Bars. Support fixtures per Section 16510,
paragraph 3.1.7.
3.3.2.4 Furnish and install complete any additional structural support steel, brackets,
fasteners, etc., as required to adequately support all piping, equipment, etc.
3.3.2.5 Support of hangers from concrete slabs shall be by means of sufficient quantity of
"U" brackets attached with after set expansion shields and bolts.
3.3.2.6 Support of hangers from concrete tees shall be by means of sufficient quantity of
angle iron brackets attached with after set expansion shields and bolts.
D&A#07103 16110-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.3.2.7 Hangers for cable tray, bus duct, raceway and such other electrical equipment shall
be independently supported from structure. The hangers supported from other
equipment or support shall not be acceptable.
3.3.2.8 Support vertical raceway within three feet of outlet box and maximum eight feet on
center by metallic fasteners attached to stud system.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16120-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16120
ELECTRICAL WIRING
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.4 Electrical Raceways: Section 16110
1.1.5 Electrical Outlet and Junction Boxes: Section 16130
1.2 SCOPE
1.2.1 This section of Specifications is intended to cover electrical wiring, wiring devices,
miscellaneous equipment, materials and installation.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRE
2.1.1 Wiring system shall be installed in accordance with NEC.
2.1.2 All wire shall be brought to job in unbroken packages, shall bear date of manufacturing
and shall not be older than 12 months.
2.2 CABLE LUGS AND TAPS
2.2.1 Lugs for termination of conductors in distribution panels, motors, etc., either provided by
manufacturer or by Contractor, shall be T&B compression type or equal, Series 53100
for conductors #8 AWG to 4/0 and Series 53200 for conductors 250 KC mil and larger.
All lugs and contact surfaces where lugs are installed shall be silverplated.
2.2.2 Terminal for control wire shall be tinned ring tongue type: Buchanan Termend, T&B
Stakon or approved equal.
2.2.3 Splices and connections to conductors larger than #8 AWG shall be by means of
compression type T&B Series 53500 for 2-way and Series 53300 for 3-way connections,
or equivalent Burndy connectors. Splices and taps shall have at least equivalent
mechanical strength and insulation as the conductors.
2.2.4 Splicing of Conductors #10 AWG or Smaller: shall be by the following methods:
2.2.4.1 Preinsulated spring pressure connectors such as Scotchlok types Y, R and B, Ideal
Wingnut or equal.
D&A#07103 16120-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3 WIRE AND CABLE (UP TO 600 VOLTS)
2.3.1 Insulation: color coded thermoplastic type rated 600 volts, except where otherwise
noted.
2.3.2 Conductors: soft drawn copper, 98% conductivity, each strand individually tinned or
coated with approved alloy (Class B stranding).
2.3.3 Conductors #10 and Smaller: for final connections to motors and all locations where
vibration or movement is present, Class B, stranded conductors. For all other locations,
solid conductors.
2.3.4 Conductors #8 and Larger: double braid, Class B, stranded.
2.3.5 Minimum Wire Size: General-#12; over 100' - #10; over 150' - #8; Control - #14; Signal
- #18; or as detailed in appropriate section of Specifications or as shown on Drawings.
2.3.6 Types and Uses (unless otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings)
2.3.6.1 Service, Feeders, and Branch Circuits: Up to and including 100 amp circuits-
THWN or THHN, rated at 60°C ampacities. Greater than 100 amp circuits- THWN
or THHN, rated at 75°C ampacities.
2.3.6.2 Control Wiring: THWN or THHN
2.3.7 Manufacturers: Essex; Pirelli; South Wire; Hi-Tek; Okonite; or equal.
2.3.8 Wire Tags: main and feeder cables shall be tagged in all pull boxes, wireways and
wiring gutters of panels. Tags shall identify wire or cable number and/or equipment
served as shown on Drawings. Tags shall be metal or of flame-resisting adhesive
material, T&B type WSL, or approved equal.
2.4 WIRE CONNECTORS
2.4.1 Screw-on spring type connectors with flexible plastic jacket. Scotchlok or Ideal Wing
Nut.
2.5 PULLING CABLES
2.5.1 Steel Conduit: nylon.
2.6 TAPE
2.6.1 Electrical tape shall be as manufactured by 3M Company, Scotch #33 or equal.
D&A#07103 16120-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Run all wires in approved raceways, unless otherwise specified, shown on Drawings or
directed.
3.1.2 Run all wires of same circuit in same raceway. For parallel circuits installed in separate
metal raceways, group different phase conductors together in each conduit to limit
induced currents.
3.1.3 Pull no thermoplastic wire at temperatures lower than 33°F and until raceway installation
is complete.
3.1.4 Use approved pull-in compound similar to Wire Lub or Y-Er-Ease, to facilitate pulling of
wire. Grease or oil not permitted.
3.1.5 Splice and connect wires only in readily accessible boxes.
3.2 WIRES AND CABLES IDENTIFICATION
3.2.1 Train and lace wiring inside equipment and panelboards with plastic tie wraps for neat
appearance.
3.2.2 Make all spare wires in cabinet or panelboards of adequate length for connections.
Terminate with insulating tape or tag.
3.3 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES
3.3.1 Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors so joint will carry full
capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.
3.3.2 Use lugs or connectors of sufficient size to enclose all strands of conductors.
3.4 PULLING CABLES
3.4.1 Insert nylon pulling cables with carbon dioxide, compressed air or vacuum.
3.5 NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS
3.5.1 A separate neutral shall be installed with each 120 volt branch circuit. No sharing of
neutrals is allowed.
3.6 CIRCUITS
3.6.1 Do not install conductors for more than three circuits in any raceway.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16130-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16130
ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
AND JUNCTION BOXES
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.4 Electrical Raceways: Section 16110
1.1.5 Electrical Wiring: Section 16120
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
2.1.1 General: stamped steel, code gauge, galvanized minimum 2 1/8" deep: Appleton,
Raco, Steel City or equal.
2.1.2 In Masonry or Tile Walls: rectangular boxes without external ears and with square
corners or 4" outlet boxes with raised covers having square corners, all minimum 2 1/8"
deep.
2.1.3 Wall Brackets: with fixture stud, except where box accommodates lampholder only.
2.1.4 Exposed Boxes for Exterior Use or Wet Locations: cast aluminum type with threaded
hubs. Crouse-Hinds.
2.2 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
2.2.1 Code gauge sheet steel, galvanized, sized in accordance with NEC. Appleton,
Crouse-Hinds or equal.
2.2.2 Covers: screw attached, except as noted.
2.2.3 Exterior or moist locations boxes shall be cast aluminum or material meeting the NEMA
requirements for the environment.
2.3 FLOOR BOXES
2.3.1 Concrete floor boxes shall be 10" x 12" x 6" deep, with capability of installing 8 single
gang devices. Provide 1/4" brass carpet flange suitable for installation in concrete floor
slab.
D&A#07103 16130-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3.1.1 Reference Standard: FSR FL-500P series
2.3.2 Stage floor box shall be 10" x 12" x 6" deep, with capability of installing 4 single gang
devices. Provide black steel cover.
2.3.3 Reference Standard: FSR FL-1000 series.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 OUTLET BOXES INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Set box square and true with finished building surfaces and trim.
3.1.2 Secure boxes firmly to building structure.
3.1.3 Verify location of outlets and switches in finished rooms with Architectural Drawings of
interior details and finish. In centering outlets and locating boxes, allow for overhead
pipes, ducts and mechanical equipment, variations in fireproofing and plastering,
windows and like and correct any inaccuracy from failure to do so without expense to
Owner.
3.1.4 Maintain symmetry of all outlets as closely as possible within Architectural Section
contained. For example, center light fixture in small rooms or receptacle in section of
masonry wall, if shown in that approximate position. If receptacle is shown in same
location as counter or bench, determine countertop height and set receptacle to clear
top and trim of counter and render outlet easily accessible. Lights, speakers and similar
equipment mounted in ceiling tiles shall be mounted in center of such tiles.
3.1.5 In event of conflict between locations of electrical outlets as shown on Electrical
Drawings and on Architectural Drawings, outlets shall be installed in accordance with
latter.
3.1.6 Locate light switches on latch side of door and verify door hinge location in field prior to
switch outlet installation.
3.1.7 Protect devices or outlets in locations where outlets are subject to injury, by means of
wire guards or other approved means of protection.
3.1.8 Where wall outlets for separate systems (i.e., lighting and signal) are shown, mount
outlets in vertical alignment.
3.1.9 Cap all outlets not used under this contract with blank coverplates.
3.1.10 Owner or his Representative reserve right to change location of any outlet up to
distance of 10'0" at no extra charge providing necessary instructions are given prior to
roughing in outlet.
3.1.11 Locations of all floor outlets shall be verified before rough-in.
3.1.12 Electrical Contractor shall verify whether telephone instruments are desk or wall
mounted before rough-in.
D&A#07103 16130-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.13 In general, all receptacles shall be mounted vertically. Coordinate with field conditions.
3.1.14 "Back-to-back" outlets shall not be allowed. Maintain a minimum of one stud space (16"
min.) between boxes (to minimize sound transfer from one box to another.)
3.1.15 Outlet boxes to be installed in fire-rated walls must be separated by a minimum of 2'-0"
per UBC Article 4304, Paragraph E. Refer to Architects drawings for location of rated
walls.
3.1.16 Outlet boxes shall be of a type appropriate for the use and location. Adjacent devices
shall be ganged in multiple gang boxes under a common finish plate. Boxes shall be
securely and rigidly attached and supported plumb, level and true to building lines using
any of the following methods:
3.1.16.1 Double bars installation for metal stud walls. Bar hanger punch, mounting clips and
retainer clips shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Factory prepunched stud holes shall not be used to support the bar hangers.
3.1.16.2 Steel stud installed behind box for support without caddy-type mounting clips or
"installation wire" for metal stud wall construction.
3.1.16.3 Caddy screw gun bracket installed behind box for support. Installation shall be per
manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.17 Finish plates shall not span different types of wall finishes either vertically or
horizontally. Plates shall cover mortar joints and cut openings completely.
3.1.18 Outlet, junction and pull boxes and their covers shall have corrosion protection suitable
for the atmosphere in which they are installed. Provide gaskets for all boxes installed
outside and other wet or damp locations (tunnels, crawl spaces, pits, etc.).
3.2 HEIGHTS OF OUTLETS
(Heights given are to center of outlet and generally as follows:)
3.2.1 Receptacles, General: 1'6".
3.2.2 Wall Switches, General: 3'10".
3.2.3 Receptacles over Workbenches, Tables, etc., except as indicated: 4" above backsplash
to bottom. (Coordinate prior to rough-in.)
3.2.4 Adjust above listed heights as required to avoid junctions of different materials,
moldings, masonry or tile coursing, etc. Verify prior to rough-in.
3.3 JUNCTION AND PULL BOX INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Provide pull boxes wherever necessary and as indicated to facilitate pulling of wire.
D&A#07103 16130-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.3.2 Locate junction and pull boxes as approved, generally not exposed in finished space
unless otherwise indicated. Where necessary, reroute conduits or make other
arrangements for concealment, as approved by Engineer.
3.3.3 Covers shall be accessible.
3.3.4 Provide ground bus in pull and junction boxes and bond in accordance to latest edition
of N.E.C., Article 250.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16140-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16140
ELECTRICAL WIRING DEVICES
AND CONTACTORS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.4 Electrical Raceways: Section 16110
1.1.5 Electrical Wiring: Section 16120
1.1.6 Electrical Outlet and Junction Boxes: Section 16130
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TOGGLE SWITCHES
2.1.1 Switches shall be single pole, two pole, three-way, four-way, momentary or pilot lighted
as required and shall be heavy duty toggle or key operated, specification grade, rated
20 amps, 120/277 volt.
2.1.2 Manufacturers - Acceptable Series: Hubbell 1221; Arrowhart 1991; Pass & Seymour
20ACI; Leviton 1221-2
2.2 KEY SWITCHES
2.2.1 Key switches shall be 110VAC, 10 amp, SPST, on-off control. Switch shall be
removable key core compatible with the Best Keying System used for door hardware.
Provide core for room light switch to match core in door to room.
2.2.2 Manufacturer: Best Electric Switch Lock Series.
2.3 RECEPTACLES
2.3.1 All receptacles shall be grounding type and shall be duplex 120 volt; 120/208-240 volt,
single phase; or 208-240 volt, 3 phase as required.
2.3.2 Duplex receptacles shall be 20 amp, 120 volts, heavy duty, specification grade,
grounding type.
2.3.2.1 Manufacturers - Acceptable Series: Hubbell 5362; Arrowhart 5362; Pass &
Seymour 5362A; Leviton 5362A.
D&A#07103 16140-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3.3 Ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles shall be duplex with built-in GFI set to trip at a
5 milliampere maximum ground fault. Receptacle shall be rated 20 amps, 120 volt.
2.3.3.1 Manufacturers – Acceptable Series: Hubbell GF5352, Arrowhart GF5352; Pass &
Seymour GF5352.
2.3.4 Special power receptacles shall be as indicated on Drawings.
2.3.4.1 All wiring devices shall be specification grade, not commercial series (i.e. Hubbell
catalog numbers shall have “HBL” prefix).
2.4 COLOR OF WIRING DEVICES
2.4.1 Color of all wiring devices in finished areas shall be gray to match existing unless
otherwise noted or selected by Architect and shall correspond to catalog numbers
hereinbefore specified.
2.4.2 Color of receptacles at computer and teacher desk locations shall be white.
2.4.3 Color of wiring devices connected to emergency generator circuits shall be red.
2.5 DEVICE PLATES
2.5.1 Non-magnetic brushed finish type 302 stainless steel. 0.40" thick.
2.5.2 Weatherproof cover plates shall be “in-use” type with lid hinged at top.
2.6 CONTACTORS
2.6.1 Contactors shall be mechanically held with number of poles and ratings as specified on
the Drawings. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure and appropriate control relays and power
supply to interface with control devices shown. Provide hand-off-auto selector switch in
cover.
2.6.2 Manufacturers: ASCO 917 Series; G. E. CR360ML2 Series; Square D 8903 Series.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
3.1.1 Install switches and receptacles of adequate rating and capacity for loads served.
3.1.2 Install single wall plates for multiple outlet boxes.
3.1.3 Receptacles shall be grounded by means of an insulated, green equipment grounding
conductor run with circuit wires and connected to panel board ground bus. Receptacle
straps, coverplates and mounting screws shall maintain grounding to metallic raceway.
3.1.4 Mount grounding type receptacles with ground pin at top where vertically mounted, on
left where horizontally mounted.
D&A#07103 16140-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.5 Receptacle Installation – GFI Protection
3.1.5.1 Any receptacle within six (6) feet of a water source or outside shall be GFI type or
shall be GFI protected. In addition, comply with the most recent edition of the NEC
regarding GFI protection.
3.1.5.2 All receptacles within elevator equipment rooms and shafts shall be GFI protected.
3.2 120 VOLT RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS
3.2.1 Perform operational testing.
3.2.2 Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200 or equal tester for proper connection of ground,
correct polarity and faults in wire.
3.3 WIRING OF GFI RECEPTACLES
3.3.1 Do not wire GFI receptacles in "feed-thru" arrangement. Each receptacle indicated on
plans to be GFI protected shall actually be a GFI receptacle.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16160-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16160
ELECTRICAL MOTOR STARTERS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.4 Electrical Wiring: Section 16120
1.1.5 Overcurrent Protection: Section 16180
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR STARTERS
2.1.1 General:
2.1.1.1 Motor horsepower and equipment sizes shown and/or specified are estimated. Size
of wire, conduit and circuit protection devices are based on said estimate.
Contractor shall ascertain actual horsepower and current requirements of motors
and equipment to be installed prior to beginning installations of feeders for same,
and shall install wire, conduit and circuit protection devices compatible with actual
requirements.
2.1.1.2 Starters shall be installed in enclosures and equipped with auxiliary control devices,
as indicated on Drawings.
2.1.1.3 Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specifications, motors smaller than 1/2
hp shall be 120VAC, motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be 208, 240, 480 volt, etc.
2.1.2 Manual motor starters shall be toggle type snap switch with thermal overload device.
Manual starters shall be similar to Square D Class 2510.
2.1.3 Magnetic motor starters shall be 3 phase across-the- line type rated in accordance with
NEMA standards. Coils shall be of molded construction. Overload relays shall be solid
state. Provide one spare auxiliary interchangeable contact. Control devices (stop/start,
H-O-A, pilot light), shall be mounted in cover of enclosure. Unless otherwise noted,
provide an H-O-A selector switch. Pilot lights shall be red unless otherwise indicated.
Magnetic starters shall be similar to Square D Class 8536.
2.1.3.1 Combination magnetic motor starters with fused (or non-fused) disconnect switch
shall be 3 phase across-the-line type rated in accordance with NEMA standards.
Disconnect switch shall consist of visible blades. Disconnect handle shall be clearly
marked as to whether disconnect device is "on" or "off". The motor starters in
D&A#07103 16160-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
combination magnetic motor starters shall meet requirements of magnetic motor
starters previously outlined. Combination magnetic motor starters shall be similar to
Square D Class 8538.
2.1.3.2 Control stations shall contain heavy duty type devices. Pushbutton and selector
switches in control stations shall be base mounted with double break silver contacts.
Pilot lights shall be transformer type using 6-8 volt miniature bulb. Colored pilot light
lenses shall be interchangeable.
2.1.3.3 Indoor enclosures to be Nema 1. Wet location enclosures to be Nema 3R with rain
tight hubs.
2.1.3.4 Manufacturer: Square D; Siemens; General Electric; Cutler Hammer.
2.2 CONTROL CIRCUITS
2.2.1 Control circuit voltage shall not exceed 120 volts and be obtained through use of control
circuit transformers.
2.2.2 Transformers shall be sufficient size to serve control devices connected thereto.
2.2.3 Control circuit shall be made in following manner:
2.2.3.1 One side of secondary transformer shall be fused, other side shall be grounded.
Provide fuses on primary.
2.2.3.2 One side of all operating coils of control devices shall be connected to grounded
side of control circuits.
2.2.3.3 All contacts of relays, limit switches, etc. shall be connected in series on line side of
control circuits.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 MOTOR STARTER INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Motor starters furnished under other sections to be mounted by Electrical Contractor.
3.1.2 Mount on walls or on approved type floor stands.
3.1.3 Floor stands to be constructed of mild steel angle iron or channel such as Unistrut or
equal. Bolts shall not project more than necessary for structural purposes.
3.1.4 Starter interlocked with other starters or controls to be provided with labels on inside of
cover stating nature of interlock system. (i.e., interlocked with 120 volt circuit from
exhaust fan).
3.1.5 Rotation:
3.1.5.1 Check motors for correct rotation before they are connected to driven load.
D&A#07103 16160-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.5.2 Repair or replace (at Engineer's option) motors and equipment damaged because of
incorrect motor rotation.
3.1.6 Install overload relay heater elements and ascertain that size of heater element
corresponds to motor full load current and that motors will start and operate
immediately.
3.1.7 Mount pushbuttons 4'0" above finished floor.
3.1.8 Mount individual starters 5'0" from finished floor to top of starter.
3.1.9 Multi-speed units shall be interlocked so both speeds cannot be energized together.
These units shall have a deceleration circuit to prevent motor from changing directly
from high speed to low speed.
3.1.10 Each phase of a motor shall have an overload relay. Each speed of multi-speed motor
shall have separate set of overload relays.
3.1.11 Control circuits shall be checked for proper operation, interlocking and continuity.
3.1.12 Contractor shall be available during operation of balancing and adjusting mechanical
systems and shall make such changes in wiring, heater sizes and other adjustments as
are required to permit proper balancing of mechanical system.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16170-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16170
ELECTRICAL SAFETY SWITCHES
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.4 Overcurrent Protection: Section 16180
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SAFETY SWITCHES (DISCONNECTS)
2.1.1 Safety switches shall be heavy duty, fused or unfused, with number of poles, electrical
characteristics, ratings and modifications as required (i.e., horsepower rating, short
circuit interrupting rating, etc.).
2.1.2 Switching mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break, with handle that is padlockable
in “off” position.
2.1.3 Enclosure shall be suitable for area in which it is to be installed and shall have
defeatable door interlock which prevents door from being opened when the switch in
“on”.
2.1.4 Fusible units which are to be equipped with current limiting fuses shall have fuseholders
with rejection clips to prevent other type fuses from being installed.
2.1.5 Indoor enclosures to be Nema 1. Wet location enclosures to be Nema 3R with rain-tight
hubs.
2.1.6 Manufacturers: Square D, General Electric,Siemens, Cutler-Hammer.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 SAFETY SWITCHES INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Switches shall be mounted on a nearby wall, on the equipment served or on an
adequately constructed metallic framework. Switches shall be mounted within sight of
the equipment served. Mounting height shall be +72 inches above finished floor height
to the top of the switch.
3.1.2 Floor stands to be constructed of mild steel angle iron or channel type such as Unistrut
or equal. Bolts shall not project more than necessary for structural purposes.
D&A#07103 16170-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.3 Install HP rated non-fused, motor disconnect switch at each motor location that is not
within sight of its motor controller.
3.2 VFD APPLICATIONS
3.2.1 All safety switches at motors being controlled by a variable frequency drive shall have
an auxiliary contact which is wired to the VFD’s emergency shutdown circuitry to signal
the drive when the disconnect is in the “OFF” position.
3.3 ELEVATOR APPLICATIONS
3.3.1 All safety switches at elevators, that have a battery-powered lowering device, shall have
an auxiliary contact which is wired to the elevator’s controller per the elevator
manufacturer’s requirements.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16180-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16180
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.4 Electrical Panels: Section 16134
1.1.5 Electric Motor Starters: Section 16160
1.1.6 Electrical Safety Switches: Section 16170
1.2 RELATED ITEMS
1.2.1 All accessories and auxiliary materials required for complete installation shall be
included.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 Short circuit interrupting ratings shall be equal to or greater than maximum short circuit
currents possible in circuit location where devices will be installed and larger where
indicated.
1.3.2 Where used for other than motor circuits, devices shall be sized same as or next
standard size above conductor ampacity.
1.3.3 Where used for motor circuits, size shall be in accordance with NEC Table 430-152 and
time delay characteristics shall be suitable for motor's acceleration time.
1.3.4 All devices shall be of time delay on nominal overloads and instantaneous operation on
high fault current type unless otherwise noted.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPD), GENERAL
2.1.1 Provide OCPD’s in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards, distribution
panelboards, switchboards and motor control centers; and, as individually enclosed and
mounted single units.
D&A#07103 16180-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.2.1 General: UL 489, “Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures”, and
NEMA AB 1, “Molded Case Circuit Breakers”.
2.2.2 Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers 225 ampere frame size and larger may be
plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for
removal.
2.2.3 Characteristics: Indicated frame size, trip rating, number of poles and a short-circuit
interrupting capacity rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical, unless a greater rating is
indicated.
2.2.4 Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay
and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole.
2.2.5 Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: For frame sizes over 100 amps, factory adjusted
to low-trip-setting current values.
2.2.6 Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in
switchboard or panelboards where indicated.
2.2.7 Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as otherwise
indicated or required to suit environment where located.
2.2.8 Combination Circuit Breakers and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters:
2.2.8.1 UL 943 “Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters”, arranged for sensing and tripping for
ground fault current in addition to overcurrent and short-circuit current. Provide
features as follows:
2.2.8.1.1 Match features and module size of panelboard breakers and provide clear
identification of ground fault trip function.
2.2.8.1.2 Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as a Class
A, Type 1 device.
2.2.8.1.3 Trip setting for ground fault as indicated.
2.3 ELECTRONIC TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.3.1 General: Circuit breakers shall be constricted in accordance with UL 489 “Molded Case
Circuit Breaker Enclosures” and NEMA AB1 “Molded Case Circuit Breakers”.
2.3.2 Circuit breaker trip system shall be microprocessor-based true RMS sensing design with
accuracy through the 7th harmonic. Frame/sensor ampere shall be provided as
indicated on the Drawings.
2.3.3 The integral trip system shall be independent of any external power source and shall
contain electronic components to measure ampacity, time the output from internal
current sensors and initiate automatic tripping action.
D&A#07103 16180-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3.4 Circuit breakers shall be 80% or 100% rated as shown on the Drawings.
2.3.5 Provide a means to seal the rating plug and trip unit adjustments.
2.3.6 Provide local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit and ground fault
occurrences.
2.3.7 Provide the following time/current curve profile adjustments to maximum system
selective coordination:
2.3.7.1 Adjustable long time ampere rating and delay.
2.3.7.2 Adjustable short time pickup and delay.
2.3.7.3 Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
2.3.7.4 Adjustable ground fault pickup and delay.
2.3.8 Provide voltage sensing phase failure and undervoltage relay with adjustable settings
from 75% to 100% of normal voltage. The relay shall be UL listed with socket. The
relay contacts shall change-state upon phase failure, undervoltage, phase reversal or
phase inbalance of 10% or greater. Response time shall be 3 seconds. Wire contacts
to shunt-trip main breaker upon sensing any of the listed abnormal conditions.
2.4 INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT BREAKER ENCLOSURES
2.4.1 Enclosures shall be NEMA type required for environment in which it is located, made of
code gauge steel with hinged cover and mechanical interlock to prevent opening unless
circuit breaker is in "off" position. (To be defeatable with proper tool). Enclosure shall
be thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized and painted with manufacturer's standard finish.
2.5 COMBINATION UNITS
2.5.1 Where combined current limiting fuses and circuit breakers are required, fuses shall be
Class L, silver sand type, coordinated and integrally mounted with circuit breaker.
Operation of one or more fuses shall trip all poles of circuit breaker.
2.6 MANUFACTURERS
2.6.1 Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers - Acceptable Series
Type
General
Electric
Siemens
Square D
Cutler-Hammer
100A frame size in
branch circuit
panelboard
THQB or
TEY
BL or
BQDH
QOB or
EHB
BAB or
GHB
D&A#07103 16180-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
100A frame size in
distribution panelboard
TEB or
TED
ED2 or
ED4
FA EHD
225A frame size
TFJ
FXD6
KA
JDB
400A frame size
TJJ
JXD6
LA
KDB
600A frame size
TJK
LXD6
MA
LA
800A frame size
TKM
MXD6
MA
MC
Note: Series numbers listed are for standard short circuit rating. Adjust series as required for
specified short circuit ratings.
2.6.2 Electronic Type Circuit Breakers - Acceptable Series
Type
General
Electric
Siemens
Square D
1000A frame size and above
AKR
-
SE
Note: Series numbers listed are for standard short circuit ratings. Adjust series as required for
specified short circuit ratings.
2.7 FUSES
2.7.1 General: Provide fuses of types, classes and current ratings as indicated. Voltage
ratings shall be consistent with the circuit on which they are used.
2.7.2 The following fuse requirements are general in nature. All conditions shall be verified so
that fuse selection will provide adequate protection and coordination. Fuses shall be as
follows unless otherwise indicated or required by field conditions.
2.7.3 Above 600 amps: UL Class L, current limiting type, with 200,000 amp interrupting
capacity. (4 second time delay with 500% current). Bussman Hi-Cap KRP-C or equal.
2.7.4 Fuses protecting circuit breakers or circuit breaker panels: UL Class RK-1, dual
element, current limiting (10 second time delay with 500% current). Bussman Low Peak
LPN-RK and LPS-RK or equal.
2.8 CARTRIDGE FUSES
2.8.1 Comply with ANSI/IEEE Standard FU1, “Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses”, nonrenewable
cartridge type except as indicated, UL Class RK-1, 10 second time delay at 500% rating,
200,000 amp interrupting capacity, current limiting, dual element. Bussman Low Peak
D&A#07103 16180-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
LPN-RK and LPS-RK or equal. Motor circuits: Fuses for individual motor running
protection shall be sized at 125% or motor nameplate rating unless otherwise indicated
or recommended. Fuses for control circuits shall be Bussmann FNQ for control
transformer primary and Bussman Fusetron FRN for secondary or equal.
2.9 SPARE FUSE CABINET
2.9.1 Wall mounted, 18 gauge minimum steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door
with key coded cam lock and pull.
2.9.2 Provide for orderly storage of all spare fuses of this project plus 15% spare capacity.
2.9.3 Gray baked enamel finish.
2.9.4 Cabinet door shall bear the legend “Spare Fuses” in 1 1/2" high letters.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Locate independently mounted OCPD’s as indicated and install in accordance with
manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
3.1.2 OCPD’s in distribution equipment shall be factory installed.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
3.2.1 Identify components in accordance with Section 16040 - Labeling and Identification.
3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Install wiring between OCPD’s and control/indication devices as specified in Section
16120 - Electrical Wiring for hard wired connections.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
3.4.1 Check connectors, terminals, bus joints and mounting for tightness. Tighten field-
connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s
torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
tightening torques specified in UL 486A and 486B.
3.5 GROUNDING
3.5.1 Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as
indicated and as required by NEC. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening
torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
D&A#07103 16180-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.6 CLEANING
3.6.1 Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPD’s. Remove paint spatters and other
spots, dirt and debris. Touch-up paint scratches and mars of finish to match original
finish.
3.7 FUSES
3.7.1 Application: Generally, apply fuses as indicated and as follows:
3.7.1.1 New Fusible Switches: Apply the following class and types:
3.7.1.1.1 20-600 amperes: Class RK1, time delay, current limiting.
3.7.2 Fuses shall be of correct type and size to fit holders.
3.7.3 Fuseholders shall be clean and undeformed with original spring temper and pressure.
Fuseholders which have been overheated and do not provide proper contact pressure
shall be replaced.
3.7.4 Manufacturer's recommendations for fuse types and sizes shall be followed whenever
available.
3.7.5 Fuses shall be fully inserted in holders and if of bolted type, shall be held with silicon
bronze bolts and nuts with belleville washers.
3.7.6 Install spare fuse cabinet in Electrical Room with three spare fuses of each size used on
the project.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
3.8.1 Training:
3.8.1.1 Arrange and pay for the service of factory-authorized service representatives to
demonstrate OCPD’s and train Owner’s maintenance personnel.
3.8.1.2 Conduct a minimum of one-half day of training in operation and maintenance as
specified in the “Project Closeout” section of these specifications. Include both
classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and maintenance
procedures.
3.8.1.3 Schedule training with at least seven (7) days advance notice.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16450-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.3 Electrical Raceways: Section 16110
1.1.4 Electrical Wiring: Section 16120
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
2.1.1.1 ITT Blackburn
2.1.1.2 Brundy
2.1.1.3 Ideal Industries, Inc.
2.1.1.4 O-Z/Gedney Company
2.1.1.5 Raco, Inc.
2.1.1.6 Thomas & Betts Corp.
2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
2.2.1 Where required, grounding electrodes shall be 5/8" diameter copper clad steel rods 10'
long, unless otherwise required.
2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
2.3.1 Grounding conductors shall be copper wire, bare or with green insulation sized per
NEC.
2.4 GROUND CONNECTORS
2.4.1 Ground connectors shall be high strength copper alloy, U-bolt type for parallel or
right-angle connections. Ground bushings shall be insulated type with lay-in ground
connector and adjustable aligner ring.
2.4.2 Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific
types, sizes and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected.
D&A#07103 16450-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 Entire installation to be grounded in accordance with requirements of NEC.
3.1.2 Equipment shall be grounded through one of following paths to ground.
3.1.2.1 Bonding jumper.
3.1.2.2 Separate grounding conductor connected to main grounding conductor or
panelboard ground bus.
3.1.2.3 Separate grounding conductor connected to ground rod installation.
3.1.3 At all electric panels, install grounding bushings on all conduits and bond to panel
ground bus using bare #4 AWG copper conductor. At junction boxes in feeder conduit
runs, install grounding bushings on all conduits, and lug on junction box and bond
conduits and box together using bare #4 AWG copper conductor. Every panelboard
shall have a ground wire installed from the distribution system.
3.1.4 Unless otherwise indicated, all circuits and equipment shall be grounded by means of
an insulated green grounding conductor connected to switchboard and/or panelboard
ground bus and installed in each conduit run. Conduits and raceways shall only be
considered as an "additional" grounding means and shall not be relied upon as the sole
grounding means. All conduits and raceways shall be installed in a manner to maintain
continuity.
3.1.5 At motor locations, motor frames shall be bonded to ground system by means of
separate conductor pulled from panel ground bus or bonding jumper from conduit to
motor frames.
3.1.6 For telephone, alarm, communications systems, etc., a #10 AWG copper conductor
from electrical ground system to each terminal cabinet or equipment location shall be
considered sufficient unless otherwise indicated.
3.1.7 Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Ground pole to a grounding electrode
as indicated in addition to separate equipment grounding conductor run with supply
branch circuit.
3.1.8 Resistance to ground at any point shall not measure more than 5 ohms.
3.1.9 Ground system tests shall be performed by independent testing concern, normally
employed in this field. All test reports shall be certified.
3.1.10 Refer to drawings for special grounding notes.
3.1.11 For grounding of branch circuits at existing electrical panels that do not contain an
existing ground bar (because they used the raceway system as the ground conductor),
the contractor shall provide a grounding bar kit bolted to the existing panel tub. Quantity
D&A#07103 16450-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
of connections shall be as required, plus 50% spare capacity, with a minimum of 15
connections. Contractor shall verify continuity and resistance of existing panel
grounding and make corrections, as required, to obtain a 5 ohm or less reading.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Ground Rods
3.2.1.1 Interconnect ground rods with bare conductors buried at least 24" below grade.
Connect bare-cable ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic
welds except as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging the
copper coating or exposing the steel. Use 3/4" by 10' ground rods except as
otherwise indicated. Drive rods until tops are 6" above finished floor except as
otherwise indicated.
3.2.2 Metallic Water Service Pipe
3.2.2.1 Provide insulated copper ground conductors, sized as indicated, in conduit from the
building main service equipment, or the ground bus, to main metallic water service
entrances to the building. Connect ground conductors to the main metallic water
service pipes by means of ground clamps. Where a dielectric main water fitting is
installed, connect the ground conductor to the street side of the fitting. Do not install
a grounding jumper around dielectric fittings. Bond the ground conductor conduit to
the conductor at each end.
3.2.2.2 Install braided-type bonding jumpers to connect ground clamps on water meter
piping to bypass water meters electrically.
3.2.3 Ground Ring
3.2.3.1 Provide ground ring around entire building. Connect to foundation reinforcement
bars and available structural steel at corners of building additions.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
3.3.1 General
3.3.1.1 Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or
electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors and connection
methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
3.3.1.2 Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make
contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
3.3.1.3 Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.
3.3.1.4 Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red
lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
D&A#07103 16450-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.3.2 Exothermic Welded Connections
3.3.2.1 Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections except
those at test wells. Install at connections to ground rods. Comply with
manufacturer’s written recommendations. Welds that are puffed-up or that show
convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
3.3.3 Grounding Bushings
3.3.3.1 Terminate equipment grounding conductors for panelboard, switchboard and
distribution panelboard feeders with pressure-type grounding lugs. Terminate each
conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare
grounding conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond conduits at both
entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors.
3.3.4 Tightening
3.3.4.1 Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and
bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for
connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated,
tighten connections to comply with torque tightening value specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
3.3.5 Connections at Test Wells
3.3.5.1 Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped-
type connections between conductors and ground rods.
3.3.6 Compression-Type Connections
3.3.6.1 Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for
compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of
the connector. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a
visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground
conductor.
3.3.7 Isolated Ground Connections
3.3.7.1 Isolated ground receptacles shall be grounded by means of an isolated ground
conductor, isolated from all metal boxes and raceways and wired back to serving
panel isolated ground bus. Insulation shall be green with yellow stripe.
3.3.7.2 Panelboard isolated ground wire in feeder shall be wired back to transformer XO
connection.
3.3.7.3 Provide safety ground wires for grounding of raceways, boxes, etc.
3.3.8 Moisture Protection
D&A#07103 16450-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.3.8.1 Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods, insulate the
entire area of the connection and seal against moisture penetration of the insulation
and cable.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16470-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16470
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.4 Electrical Raceways: Section 16110
1.1.5 Electrical Wiring: Section 16120
1.1.6 Overcurrent Protection: Section 16180
1.1.7 Grounding: Section 16450
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections:
1.2.1.1 Product data for each type panelboard, accessory item and component specified.
1.2.1.2 Shop drawings from manufacturers of panelboards including Dimensioned Plans,
Sections and Elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features and
voltage rating. Include the following:
1.2.1.2.1 Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1.
1.2.1.2.2 Bus configuration and current ratings.
1.2.1.2.3 Short-circuit current ratings of panelboard.
1.2.1.2.4 Features, characteristics, ratings and factory settings of individual protective
devices and auxiliary components.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 NFPA Compliance: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, “National
Electrical Code”.
1.3.2 NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA PB1, “Panelboards”.
1.3.3 UL Compliance: Comply with UL 61, “Panelboards” and UL 50, “Cabinets and Boxes”.
D&A#07103 16470-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.4 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS
1.4.1 Keys: Furnish six spare keys of each type for panelboard cabinet locks.
1.4.2 Touch-up paint for surface mounted panelboards: One quart container.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS, GENERAL
2.1.1 Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPD): Provide type, rating and features as indicated.
Comply with Section 16180 - Overcurrent Protection, with OCPD’s adapted to
panelboard installation. Tandem breakers shall not be used. Multiple-pole breakers
shall have a common trip handle.
2.1.2 Enclosures
2.1.2.1 Cabinets, flush or surface mounted as indicated on the drawings. NEMA Type 1 or
Type 3R enclosures where indicated on the drawings.
2.1.2.1.1 NEMA Type 1 Front
2.1.2.1.1.1 Secured to box with concealed trim clamps except as indicated. Front for
surface mounted panels shall have same dimensions as box. Front for flush
panels shall overlap box except as otherwise specified.
2.1.2.1.1.2 Hinged front cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
2.1.3 Directory Frame: Mounted inside each panel door.
2.1.4 Phase, Neutral and Ground Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98% conductivity.
2.1.5 Neutral Bus: Provide full size neutral bus.
2.1.6 Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical compression type.
2.1.7 Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment ground
conductors. Bonded to box.
2.1.8 Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections and
necessary appurtenances for the OCPD ampere ratings indicated for future installation
of devices.
2.1.9 Manufacturers: Square D "NQOD"; General Electric; Siemens; Cutler Hammer.
D&A#07103 16470-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PANELBOARD INSTALLATION
3.1.1 General: Install panelboards and accessory items in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1,
“General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards
Rated 600 Volts or Less” and manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
3.1.2 Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in
accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, “Application Guide for Ground
Fault Circuit Interrupters”.
3.1.3 Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6'-0" above finished floor, except as indicated.
3.1.4 Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush panels uniformly flush
with wall finish.
3.1.5 Circuit Directory: Typed and reflecting final circuit changes required to balance panel
loads. Obtain approval before installing.
3.1.6 Filler Plates: Install filler plates in unused spaces.
3.1.7 Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Mounted Panelboards: Stub four 1" empty conduits
from panel into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in
future.
3.1.8 Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle and wrap with wire
ties after completion of load balancing.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
3.2.1 Identify field-installed wiring and components, and provide label in accordance with
Section 16040 - Labeling and Identification.
3.3 GROUNDING
3.3.1 Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated and
required by Section 16450 - Grounding.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
3.4.1 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in
accordance with manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL
486B.
3.5 BALANCING ELECTRICAL LOAD
3.5.1 Care shall be exercised in connecting various electrical loads to panelboards in order to
arrive at reasonable balance between loads on each phase at each panelboard. It will
D&A#07103 16470-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
be responsibility of Electrical Contractor to make tests and adjust loads at each
panelboard to result in reasonably balanced load condition, satisfactory to Engineer.
3.6 CLEANING
3.6.1 Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove
paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris. Touch-up paint scratches and mars of
finish to match original finish.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16472-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16472
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.4 Electrical Raceways: Section 16110
1.1.5 Electrical Wiring: Section 16120
1.1.6 Overcurrent Protection: Section 16180
1.1.7 Grounding: Section 16450
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections:
1.2.1.1 Product data for each type distribution panelboard, accessory item and component
specified.
1.2.1.2 Shop drawings from manufacturers of distribution panelboards including
Dimensioned Plans, Sections and Elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices,
major features and voltage rating. Include the following:
1.2.1.2.1 Enclosure type with details for other types other than NEMA Type 1.
1.2.1.2.2 Bus configuration and current ratings.
1.2.1.2.3 Short-circuit current ratings of panelboard.
1.2.1.2.4 Features, characteristics, ratings and factory settings of individual protective
devices and auxiliary components.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 NFPA Compliance: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, “National
Electrical Code”.
1.3.2 NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA PB1, “Panelboards”.
1.3.3 UL Compliance: Comply with UL 61, “Panelboards” and UL 50, “Cabinets and Boxes”.
D&A#07103 16472-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
1.4 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS
1.4.1 Keys: Furnish six spare keys of each type for distribution panelboard cabinet locks.
1.4.2 Touch-up paint for surface mounted panelboards: One quart container.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS, GENERAL
2.1.1 Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPD): Provide type, rating and features as indicated.
Comply with Section 16180 - Overcurrent Protection, with OCPD’s adapted to
panelboard installation. Tandem breakers shall not be used. Multiple-pole breakers
shall have a common trip handle.
2.1.2 Enclosures
2.1.2.1 Cabinets, surface mounted as indicated on the drawings. NEMA Type 1 or Type 3R
enclosures where indicated on the drawings.
2.1.2.1.1 NEMA Type 1 Front
2.1.2.1.1.1 Secured to box with concealed trim clamps except as indicated. Front for
surface mounted panels shall have same dimensions as box.
2.1.2.1.1.2 Hinged front cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
2.1.3 Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panel door.
2.1.4 Phase, Neutral and Ground Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98% conductivity.
2.1.5 Neutral Bus: Provide full size neutral bus.
2.1.6 Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical compression type.
2.1.7 Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment ground
conductors. Bonded to box.
2.1.8 Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections and
necessary appurtenances for the OCPD ampere ratings indicated for future installation
of devices.
2.1.9 Manufacturers: Square D; General Electric; Siemens; Cutler Hammer.
D&A#07103 16472-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3 EXECUTION
3.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD INSTALLATION
3.1.1 General: Install panelboards and accessory items in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1,
“General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards
Rated 600 Volts or Less” and manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
3.1.2 Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount panels on walls of a steel
reinforced concrete housekeeping pad as shown and having overall dimensions 4"
larger on all four sides than the panelboard.
3.1.3 Circuit Directory: Typed and reflecting final circuit changes required to balance panel
loads. Obtain approval before installing.
3.1.4 Filler Plates: Install filler plates in unused spaces.
3.1.5 Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle and wrap with wire
ties after completion of load balancing.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
3.2.1 Identify field-installed wiring and components, and provide label in accordance with
Section 16040 - Labeling and Identification.
3.3 GROUNDING
3.3.1 Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated and
required by Section 16450 - Grounding.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
3.4.1 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in
accordance with manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL
486B.
3.5 CLEANING
3.5.1 Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove
paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris. Touch-up paint scratches and mars of
finish to match original finish.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16510-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16510
ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURES
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Labeling and Identification: Section 16040
1.1.3 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.4 Electrical Raceways: Section 16110
1.1.5 Electrical Wiring: Section 16120
1.1.6 Electrical Outlet and Junction Boxes: Section 16130
1.1.7 Electrical Lamps: Section 16551
1.1.8 Electrical Ballasts: Section 16552
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
2.1.1 Construction: constructed sheet steel, die-formed to provide structural strength.
Louvers to be constructed of spring steel (22 GA minimum).
2.1.2 Painting: fixtures to be properly treated for acceptance for finish coats. Finishes to be
baked white high reflectance enamel or porcelain enamel.
2.1.3 Shielding: as indicated in "Light Fixture Schedule" on drawings.
2.1.4 Lens Panel Frames: lens panels for surface box type fixtures and for recessed troffers
shall be framed, hinge and latch. Frames and louvers shall be equipped with retaining
means to support frame during relamping.
2.1.5 Lampholders: porcelain, turret-type for industrial fixtures, tombstone-type for
commercial fixtures.
2.1.6 Wires: heat resisting type in accordance with NEC.
2.1.7 Ballast Mounting: fixture to be designed in such a manner that case temperature of
ballast does not exceed 90oC. All ballast mounting studs to be welded to fixture.
2.1.8 Fixtures manufactured with pre-painted steel to be painted. No unpainted edges of
fixture housing will be accepted.
D&A#07103 16510-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.2 INCANDESCENT AND H.I.D. FIXTURES
2.2.1 Mounting: units to be furnished, complete with all mounting accessories required,
unwired or prewired, as desired by Contractor.
2.2.2 Wiring: high temperature wiring in accordance with NEC.
2.2.3 Lampholders: porcelain type.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Fixtures to be equipped with lamps of proper size and type, as scheduled or
recommended by manufacturer.
3.1.2 Tandem fixtures may be used in continuous rows providing finished appearance
conforms to appearance of individual units.
3.1.3 All rows of light fixtures to be properly aligned and plumbed.
3.1.4 Schedule of Lighting Fixtures on Drawings contains written description of fixture and
manufacturer's catalog numbers. Numbers provided are intended to indicate design
and quality desired. Fixtures must meet requirements of this Specification and of
description contained in Schedule.
3.1.5 If outlet does not have fixture symbol, install fixture of same type used in similar
locations elsewhere on Drawings.
3.1.6 Provide additional trim as required for neat mounting of recessed fluorescent lights
mounted in patterns.
3.1.7 Fluorescent light fixtures shall not be supported from suspended ceiling system. It is
responsibility of Electrical Contractor to ensure adequate supports for fluorescent light
fixtures are furnished. Install size 12 single jack cadmium plated chain supports at all
four corners of fixtures, connected to at least two building support anchors.
3.1.8 Light fixtures must be suitable for mounting in or on type of ceiling to be furnished.
Contractor must verify type of ceiling and provide appropriate fixtures prior to ordering
fixtures.
3.1.9 Coordinate with other trades so lights are properly aligned with diffusers, grilles,
speakers, etc. If necessary, relocate lights as directed so there will be no conflict with
other trades' equipment.
3.1.10 Samples: bidder shall undertake to submit samples of all fixtures required for inspection
by Owner and Engineer prior to award of Contract. Request by Owner or Engineer for
samples of fixtures shall not be construed by bidder as indication of award of contract.
3.1.11 All fixtures to be clean and lamped at time of acceptance by Owner.
D&A#07103 16510-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.12 Remove all conspicuous trade labels.
3.1.13 Replace lamps used for temporary lighting during construction with new lamps prior to
acceptance by Owner.
3.1.14 Fixtures to be installed on or recessed in plaster ceilings shall be supported from
building structure above and independent of ceiling support system.
3.1.15 In large mechanical equipment rooms having exposed ceilings, light fixtures shall be
hung from chain or stem.
3.1.16 Fixtures to be recessed in fire-rated ceilings shall have fire-rated construction or have
fire-rated protective housings installed as part of ceiling construction.
3.1.17 Fixtures with hinged door frames shall be hinged from same side within same room.
3.1.18 Square light fixtures, such as 2x2 and 4x4 lights, shall be installed so that all fixtures
within the same room or space have their lamps oriented in the same direction.
3.1.19 Fluorescent and H.I.D. fixtures shall be seasoned by a minimum 100 hour continuously-
on burn-in period with warranty replacement of failed lamps or defective ballasts.
3.1.20 Recessed light fixtures shall be clipped to supporting T-bar per N.E.C. Article 410.
3.1.21 Fixtures to be installed in Tectum ceilings shall be manufactured for the thickness of
these ceiling panels. Also, fixtures to be installed in ceilings with rough surface, such as
Tectum, shall be provided with gaskets or screw together trims to minimize light leaks.
Contractor shall verify ceiling types and ensure that all necessary fittings and
components are provided.
3.1.22 All aluminum poles shall be equipped with integral internal vibration dampeners.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16551-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16551
ELECTRICAL LAMPS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.3 Electrical Lighting Fixtures: Section 16510
1.1.4 Electrical Ballasts: Section 16552
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
2.1.1 Type: rapid start, T-8 bi-pin type, wattage, specified on Drawings.
2.1.2 Color: 3500oK, such as G.E. SP35, CRI of 75 unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.1.3 Low mercury content, TCLP compliant.
2.1.4 Manufacturers: General Electric; Philips; Sylvania.
2.2 INCANDESCENT LAMPS
2.2.1 Type: extended service type unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.2.2 Voltage: 130 Volts, unless otherwise noted.
2.2.3 Bulbs: clear or inside frosted as recommended by fixture manufacturer.
2.2.4 Manufacturers: General Electric; Sylvania; Philips.
2.3 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) LAMPS
2.3.1 Bulbs: clear or phosphor coated as recommended by manufacturer.
2.3.2 Manufacturers: General Electric; Sylvania; Philips; Venture.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 Install proper number, type and size lamps in light fixture as indicated on Drawings.
3.1.2 Replace all burned out lamps at time of acceptance.
D&A#07103 16551-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.3 Contractor shall furnish to Owner a chart listing size and type of lamps required by each
type of light fixture. This chart shall utilize the full lamp ordering code.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16552-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16552
ELECTRICAL BALLASTS
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.1.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.1.2 Testing and Proof of Performance: Section 16042
1.1.3 Electrical Lighting Fixtures: Section 16510
1.1.4 Electrical Lamps: Section 16551
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUORESCENT ELECTRONIC BALLASTS
2.1.1 Quality: ballasts shall be UL listed and meet requirements of the Federal
Communications Commission Rules and Regulations, Part 18, for use with rapid start
lamps.
2.1.2 Voltage: suitable for use on 120 volt, 1 phase supply, unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
2.1.3 Noise rating: approximately 75% quieter than standard sound "A" rated ballasts.
2.1.4 All ballasts shall be Class P, thermally protected, automatic reset type with protective
circuitry to guard against line transients, voltage sag, overheating, incorrect lamps and
installation errors.
2.1.5 Ballasts shall be of integrated circuit design with silicon chip "brain" to control overall
ballast operation. Ballasts shall maintain constant light output over operating ranges of
90 to 145 volts.
2.1.6 Input current third harmonic content shall not exceed 6%. Total harmonic distortion
shall not exceed 10%. Average lamp current crest factor shall be 1.5. Ballast factor
shall be 0.875 or above.
2.1.7 Ballast shall meet minimum efficacy standards of Public Law #100-357, National
Appliance Energy Conservation Amendments of 1988.
2.1.8 Ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats cathode filaments and
then ignites the lamp.
2.1.9 Ballasts shall withstand line transients as defined in IEEE Publication 587, Category A.
2.1.10 Ballast case temperature shall not exceed 25oC temperature rise over 40oC ambient.
D&A#07103 16552-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.11 Ballast shall have a frequency of operation of 20 kHz or greater and operate without
visible flicker.
2.1.12 Ballast shall have a power factor of 95% or above.
2.1.13 Ballast shall not contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's).
2.1.14 Ballast shall have a full three year warranty.
2.1.15 Manufacturers: Advance Mark V; Magnetek "Triad"; Motorola.
2.2 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS
2.2.1 All HID ballasts shall be high power factor having minimum power factor of 90%.
2.2.2 These units shall be constant wattage, conventional or autotransformer type.
2.2.3 Lamp wattage shall be maintained within 6% for an input voltage variation of 10%.
2.2.4 Each ballast shall be individually fused to provide short circuit isolation in case of ballast
failure. This fuse shall be sized according to manufacturer's recommendations.
2.2.5 Manufacturers:
2.2.5.1 Advance
2.2.5.2 Magnetek
2.2.5.3 Valmont
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 Provide proper size, type and number of ballasts as indicated on Drawing Schedule of
Light Fixtures.
3.1.2 Verify temperature rating of ballast corresponds to environment for which fixture is
installed.
3.1.3 Contractor shall verify that the voltage and frequency connected to the ballast is within
limits as recommended by Manufacturer.
3.1.4 Contractor shall ensure proper grounding of ballast case to fixture housing.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16670-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
1.1.1 The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all design,
materials, labor and items of service required for the completion of a functional lightning
protection system as approved by the Architect/Engineer, and in strict accordance with
this section of the specifications and the applicable contract drawings.
1.1.2 If any departure from the contract drawings of submittal drawings covered below are
deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and reasons therefore
shall be submitted as soon as practicable to the architect for approval. No such
departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect.
1.1.3 The following specifications and standards of the latest issue form a part of this
specification:
1.1.3.1 Underwriters Laboratories UL96, 96A
1.1.3.2 National Fire Protection Code NFPA 780
1.1.3.3 Lightning Protection Institute (LPI-175)
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1 The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements of the U.L. and NFPA
Standards for Lightning Protection Systems.
1.2.2 The system to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and
shall be the manufacturer’s latest approved design. The equipment manufacturer shall
also be U.L. listed and approved manufacturer and a fully certified manufacturer
member in good standing of the Lightning Protection Institute. All materials specified for
this work shall be supplied by VFC, Inc., 90 North Cutler Drive, North Salt Lake, Utah
84054; Harger Lightning Protection, Inc., 301 Ziegler Drive, Grayslake, Illinois 60030; or
approved LPI equal. For approval of LPI manufacturer other than specified, proposed
material data and installation drawings must be submitted for review not less than 10
days prior to bid.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Complete shop drawings showing the type, size and locations for all equipment,
grounds, cable routings, etc., shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
start of work.
1.3.2 Samples and pertinent catalog data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
D&A#07103 16670-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARDS
2.1.1 All equipment used in this installation shall be factory inspected, approval and properly
labeled in accordance with U.L. requirements.
2.1.2 All equipment shall be new, the product of a single manufacturer as outlines above, and
of a design and construction to suit the applicable where it is used in accordance with
accepted industry standards and U.L. and NFPA Code requirements for Class I
structures and as per manufacturer recommendations.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
2.2.1 All materials shall be copper or copper alloy and of the size, weight, and construction to
suit the application where used in accordance with U.L. and NFPA Code requirements
for Class I structures and as per manufacturer recommendations.
2.2.2 Conductors shall be copper, of 32 strands 16 gauge minimum, VFC Catalog No. 32 or a
specified in contract drawings.
2.2.3 Air terminals shall be solid, round copper bar of a minimum of 3/8” x 12” VFC Catalog
No. 3812CUAT, and shall project 10” minimum above the object to be protected. Locate
and space according to UL and NFPA requirements. Use aluminum points of ½” x 12”,
VFC Catalog No. 1212ALAT, only when required for corrosion prevention.
2.2.4 Air terminal bases shall be of cast bronze with bolt pressure cable connections and shall
be securely mounted with stainless steel screws or bolts. Crimp type connectors are not
acceptable. VFC Catalog No. CUBU381, CUBS38, etc. as required.
2.2.5 Ground rods shall be a minimum ¾” in diameter and 10’-0’ long. VFC Catalog No.
3410. They shall be connected to the system by exothermic weld.
2.2.6 Cable fasteners shall be substantial in construction, electrolytically compatible with
conductors and mounting surface and shall be spaced according to LPI and NFPA Code
requirements. VFC Catalog No CCC2, 262, etc. When using adhesive supports,
adhesives must be compatible with roof material, and shall be approved by roofing
manufacturer prior to installation.
2.2.7 Bonding devices, cable splicers and miscellaneous connectors shall be by exothermic
weld or of cast bronze with bolt pressure connections to cable. Cast or stamped crimp
fittings are not acceptable. Splicers similar to Catalog No. 204, 208 etc., bonding
devices similar to VFC Catalog No. 213, 216, CPC-152, etc.
2.2.8 Equipment on stacks and chimneys shall be protected from corrosion and sized in
accordance with U.L. and NFPA requirements.
2.2.9 All miscellaneous bolts, nuts and screws shall be brass, bronze or stainless steel.
D&A#07103 16670-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installer who is a Certified
Master installer of the LPI or working under the direct supervision of the LPI
manufacturer as listed above or his authorized LPI Certified Master Installer
representative.
3.1.2 All equipment shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner in the most
inconspicuous manner possible. The system shall consist of a complete cable network
on the roof involving all air terminals, splices and bonds with cable downleads routed
concealed either directly in the building construction in conduit to ground.
3.1.3 Downlead cables shall be brought down concealed within exterior walls of the structure.
3.1.4 Copper equipment shall not be connected to aluminum surfaces except by means of an
U.L. approved bimetal transition fitting.
3.1.5 This specification applies to the base bid of the Phase III building. Provide alternate
prices for the existing Phase I and Phase II buildings.
3.2 COORDINATION
3.2.1 The lighting protection installer will work with other trades and ensure a correct, neat
and unobtrusive installation.
3.2.2 It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to assure a sound bond to
the main water service and to assure interconnection with other building ground
systems, including both telephone and electrical. Proper arresters shall be installed on
the power and telephone service by either the utility or the electrical contractor as
applicable.
3.3 COMPLETION
3.3.1 The lightning protection installer shall secure and deliver the U.L. Master Label “C” to
the Engineer for the owner upon completion of the installation.
3.3.1 The Contractor shall also submit copies of as-built shop drawings.
END OF SECTION 16670
D&A#07103 16740-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16740
TELEPHONE AND DATA CONDUIT SYSTEM
1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 Provide a conduit and outlet box system for installation of the wiring for the telephone
and data system.
1.2 RELATED WORK
1.2.1 Section 16047 – System Identification.
1.2.2 Section 16050 – Basic Materials and Methods.
1.3 WORK BY OTHERS
1.3.1 The Owner will furnish and install all requirements for a complete computer
networking and telephone system unless otherwise specified in Section 16745. This
Division 16 Contractor will provide all conduit wiring to locations shown on drawings
Cat. 6.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PLATES
2.1.1 Plates shall be one-hole, jack type or as required by the outlet locations, or as
specified in Section 16742. Plates shall have finish to match device plates.
2.2 BACKBOARDS
2.2.1 Equipment backboards as required shall be ¾” A-C grade plywood finished with two
coats of good grade light beige enamel. (4 ft. by 8 ft. unless otherwise noted.)
2.3 BOXES
2.3.1 All telephone/computer boxes shall be 4” square and 2–1/8” deep with ½” raised
single cover.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Unless noted otherwise, all telephone and computer/data outlets shall be installed at
the same height as duplex receptacles.
3.1.2 Equipment backboards shall be installed just above the base and securely anchored
to the wall with toggle bolts or other approved anchors.
D&A#07103 16740-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
3.1.3 A pull wire shall be installed in each conduit run in slab, underground or over 90’
between junction points.
3.1.4 Minimum conduit size for the telephone and data system shall be 3/4”c.
3.1.5 Conduit for the telephone and data outlets shall run from the outlet box to terminate
at on points shown on drawings.
3.1.6 The ends of all conduits shall have bushings to prevent damaging wire insulation.
3.1.7 Telephone and data boxes shall be 2 gang by 2-1/8” deep with one 2 gang cover
plate to house the telephone and data jacks as outlined in their respective sections.
3.1.8 Install one double duplex power outlet in upper right hand corner of backboard and
connect to a dedicated 120 volt, 20 amp circuit.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16921-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16921
TEMPERATURE CONTROL AND INTERLOCKING
1 GENERAL
1.1 Description
1.1.1 Division 16 contractor must provide power wiring for temperature control panels and
must coordinate and verify locations and quantities with Division 15 contractor. (No
extra will be paid for any panels because Division 16 did not coordinate with Division
15.)
1.2 Related Work
1.2.1 Division 15 – Mechanical.
1.2.2 Section 16050 – Basic Materials and Methods.
1.2.3 Section 16723 – Fire Alarm System.
1.3 Work by Others
1.3.1 The wiring required to connect the electrical control devices and T.C. panels
furnished under the Temperature Control Sections of the Specifications which
includes wiring for E.P. relays, P.E. switches, freeze-stats, limit controls, relays, flow
and pressure switches, etc., will be provided under Division 15, Mechanical.
Interlock wiring outlined in Division 15 shall be provided under Division 15
Mechanical. Division 16 contractor will provide the 120 volts only.
2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Install in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s recommendation.
END OF SECTION
D&A#07103 16930-1 St. Christopher Church Phase III
SECTION 16930
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this and all Sections of
Division 16.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This Section includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and performing all
operations necessary to fabricate, deliver and install dimmers and dimming systems and
all related work indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.3.1 General Provisions: Section 16010
1.3.2 Electrical Raceways: Section 16110
1.3.3 Electrical Wiring: Section 16120
1.3.4 Electrical Outlet and Junction Boxes: Section 16130
1.3.5 Electrical Light Fixtures: Section 16510
1.3.6 Electrical Lamps: Section 16551
1.3.7 Electrical Ballasts: Section 16552
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL BOX DIMMERS (IF SHOWN ON DRAWINGS)
2.1.1 Wall box dimmers and switches shall be Lutron Vareo (Nova T*) series or pre-approved
substitute and shall meet the following specifications.
2.1.2 Dimmers shall use linear sliders for control of light intensity and shall be installed in
flush mounted wall boxes. Dimmer slide shall be captured in place by the faceplate.
Faceplate shall completely cover cooling fins on the front of the device. One seamless,
multi-gang faceplate shall be provided where more than one dimmer, switch or other
electrical devices are to be mounted together and in the color as selected by the
Architect.
2.1.2.1 Dimmer capacity to be 125% of connected load. Dimmers to be installed without
breaking off fins or derating.
D&A#07103 16930-2 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.1.2.2 Where the load on a dimmed zone exceeds 1000 Watts, provide HP-2, 4, 6 high
power dimmer modules. Provide a wall mounted 600 Watt Vareo for control of the
HP unit. Provide power dimmer modules as follows:
2.1.2.2.1 HP-2 for loads up to 1800 Watts
2.1.2.2.2 HP-4 for loads up to 3600 Watts
2.1.2.2.3 HP-6 for loads up to 5400 Watts
2.1.3 All switches and dimmers shall be UL listed for the specific load to be controlled.
Dimmers to contain an air gap switch and meet the limited short circuit test of UL
standard 20.
2.1.4 Dimmers and switches to have power failure memory so that lights will return to the
same state as before a power failure.
2.1.5 Dimmers shall withstand surges of 6000 volts and 200 amps without damage per
ANSI//IEEE standard C62.41-1980.
2.1.6 Dimmers shall be voltage regulated so that a 10% change in line voltage shall result in
no more than a 5% change in output voltage, as measured with the dimmer operating at
5% light intensity.
2.1.7 The number of dimmers per control zone shall be the minimum required to fulfill all
specifications.
2.1.8 Provide an external filtering network (lamp debuzzing coil) for each dimmer. The Lamp
Debuzzing Coil (LSC) shall be connected in series with the dimmer. For loads less than
1000 Watts, provide a 10 amp LDC, for loads 1000 Watts to 2000 Watts provide a 16
amp LDC. The LDC shall be UL listed and mounted in a NEMA enclosure. Install LDC
in a location remote from the dimmer, such as in an electrical closet or above the ceiling.
The LDC shall provide sufficient filtering so that current rise time shall be at least 350
microsec at 50% rated dimmer capacity as measured from 10-90% of the load current
waveform at a 90o conduction angle, and at no point rise faster than 30mA/microsec.
2.1.9 Exact location of wall box dimmers per Drawings.
2.1.10 Contractor shall provide separate neutrals for load circuits.
2.1.11 Manufacturers:
2.1.11.1 Lutron
2.2 DIMMER PANELS (IF SHOWN ON DRAWINGS)
2.2.1 Dimmer panels shall contain all components necessary to perform the specified function
of the system including, but not limited to the following:
2.2.1.1 Dimmers and non dim modules.
D&A#07103 16930-3 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.2.1.2 Dimmer panel main circuit breakers
2.2.1.3 Dimmer bypass jumpers
2.2.1.4 20 amp branch circuit breakers
2.2.1.5 Control circuit breaker and power supplies
2.2.1.6 Additional components as required
2.2.2 All components shall be completely pre-wired and tested as a system by the
manufacturer.
2.2.3 Dimmer Panels shall be assembled of NEMA-1, 16 gauge steel or aluminum and
securely welded or fastened at all joints. The panels shall be louvered or pierced where
necessary to provide ventilation to the interior. Where specified, provide wide-swing
hinged doors made of formed steel or aluminum over panels and components. Shop
prime the frames, panels and doors with zinc chromate and paint with baking enamel.
Prime paint all surfaces with zinc chromate and finish with baked enamel.
2.2.4 Contractor to reinforce walls as required for wall mounted panels.
2.2.5 Electrical service to the dimmer panel is as shown on the Drawings. Contractor to
provide incoming feeder, load circuit wiring and control wiring.
2.2.6 Dimmer panels shall contain an input circuit breaker to provide primary line side
protection and disconnect for each dimmer module. Circuit breakers shall have the
following performance characteristics:
2.2.6.1 Be UL listed under UL 489 as a molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting
circuits.
2.2.6.2 Contain a visual trip indicator and shall be rated at 10,000 AIC (120V) or 14,000 AIC
(277V), unless otherwise noted.
2.2.6.3 Be thermal-magnetic in construction for both overload and dead short protection.
2.2.6.4 Be switching duty (SWD) rated so that the loads can be switched off via the
breakers.
2.2.6.5 Circuit breakers have a visible trip indicator.
2.2.7 Dimmer panel shall contain terminals at which a jumper can be installed to completely
bypass a dimmer module. Jumpers shall be copper or brass and shall be rated to carry
the full load current of the dimmer bypass. Dimmer panel shall be shipped from the
manufacturer with the bypass jumpers installed.
2.2.8 Dimmer panel shall be cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans, and capable of
continuous operation to all specifications within an ambient temperature range of 0oC
(32oF) to 40oC (104oF). If fans are necessary for the proper cooling of the dimmer
panel, all dimmer modules shall be oversized as indicated in the dimmer module
D&A#07103 16930-4 St. Christopher Church Phase III
specifications, and each dimmer shall have individual over temperature shut off.
Shutting off of the entire dimmer panel is not acceptable.
2.2.9 Where heat gain within an enclosure would affect the proper operation of components
therein, provide quiet running fans to draw in air at the bottom of the enclosure and
exhaust it at the top through louvers or grilles fitted with dust filters.
2.2.10 Panels shall provide the capability to electronically assign each circuit to any zone in the
dimming system. Multiple panels shall be capable of operating in one system, up to a
maximum of 32 panels and 768 dimmers.
2.2.11 Legends on control panels may be engraved or silk screened. The silk screen process
shall be such that the graphic material chemically bonds so that it resists removal via
commercial cleaning solutions or scratching by fingernails. In general and unless
otherwise specified, legends should be located above or alongside the devices
identified. Character size should vary according to relative importance of functions
described or identified.
2.2.12 Manufacturers:
2.2.12.1 Lutron
2.2.12.2 ETC
2.2.12.3 Leviton
2.3 DIMMER MODULES
2.3.1 Quantities of dimmer modules shall be provided to control each type of load shown on
the load schedule and/or the Drawings.
2.3.2 Dimmer module capacity shall be 125 percent of the connected load. Two or more
dimmer modules may be controlled together to achieve required capacities.
2.3.3 The dimmers shall be solid state, utilizing thyristors for the controlling device. The
dimmer shall be both designed and tested to withstand surges, without impairment to
performance, of 6000V, 3000A as specified by ANSI/IEEE standard C62.41.
2.3.4 The dimmer module shall be designed and UL listed for the load they are scheduled to
control. The dimmer module shall be designed to operate properly in ambient
temperatures up to 40oC, with line voltage variations of plus or minus ten percent from
nominal. Dimmers shall be rated at carrying their full load indefinitely. Under full-load
conditions in a 40oC environment, all silicon thyristors shall operate at a minimum 20oC
safety margin below the component temperature rating.
2.3.5 The output of the dimmer shall be at all times symmetrical with no more than one volt
DC output. The output voltage of a dimmer at full intensity shall be set at 90% of the
incoming line voltage to prolong lamp life. Outputs of different dimmers with equal loads
and equal control voltage shall not vary more than six volts.
2.3.6 Dimmers shall provide a smooth and continuous Square Law dimming curve throughout
the entire dimming range. Dimmers shall incorporate circuitry to prevent momentary
D&A#07103 16930-5 St. Christopher Church Phase III
flashing when the dimmer is turned on or off. Dimmers shall contain a maximum and
minimum light output adjustment.
2.3.7 The dimmers shall be voltage regulated so that a plus or minus ten percent change in
line voltage will result in no more than a plus or minus three percent change in output
voltage.
2.3.8 An air gap relay shall be employed with each dimmer module so that power to the
dimmer’s load circuit is completely shut off when a control station “off” button is pressed.
2.3.9 The dimmer module shall accommodate incandescent, magnetic low voltage
incandescent, electronic low voltage incandescent, fluorescent, neon, cold cathode
lamps or non dim loads as listed in the dimmer schedule.
2.3.9.1 Incandescent and low voltage dimmer modules shall contain an inductive type filter
to eliminate lamp filament singing and radiated RF in the system. Filtering shall be
provided in each dimmer module so that current rise time shall be at least 350
microsec at 50% rated dimmer capacity as measured from 10-90% of the load
current waveform at a 90o conduction angle. The rise time portion of the curve shall
approximate a straight line, and shall be free from peaks, valleys, and spikes and at
no point rise faster than 30mA/microsec. The manufacturer shall supply
oscillographic evidence in support of the rise time feature of the dimmer.
2.3.9.2 Low Voltage/Electronic transformer Dimmer modules. Dimming shall not adversely
affect sound rating of the electronic transformers. In addition, no flicker or
interaction shall occur at any point in the dimming range. Electrical Contractor shall
be responsible for coordinating the compatibility of the transformers with the dimmer
modules.
2.3.9.3 Fluorescent dimmer modules shall have a dimming range of full to one percent light
output for T-8 lamps (5% for compact fluorescent T-5 lamps). Fixtures shall be
supplied with compatible electronic dimming ballasts as specified in the fixture
specification and listed on the fixture schedule. All lamps shall track evenly in light
output, with no perceptible flicker or striations. Different length lamps shall track
evenly together. Electronic dimming ballasts shall be inaudible. Ballasts shall meet
the electrical interference limitations as specified by FCC Pat 18. No electrical noise
shall be generated which could interfere with any other properly installed electrical
equipment. One manufacturer shall manufacture both the lighting controls and the
ballasts. Electrical Contractor shall run a three-wire circuit (two hots and one
neutral) for each circuit.
2.3.9.4 Dimmers for neon and cold cathode shall have a dimming range of full to ten
percent without flicker. Electrical Contractor to ensure that low power factor
transformers are supplied for dimming.
2.3.10 Non dim modules shall use an air gap relay for on/off switching and shall be rated to
switch 16A of resistive, inductive capacitive and electronic loads.
2.3.11 Each dimmer shall have a primary circuit breaker which shall protect the dimmer against
overloads and short circuits and which shall serve as a disconnect switch.
D&A#07103 16930-6 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.3.12 Each dimmer shall incorporate an electronic “soft-start” default at initial turn-on that
smoothly ramps the lights up to the desired levels within 0.5 seconds.
2.3.13 The power efficiency of the dimmer modules at any setting and with any load shall
exceed ninety-five percent
2.3.14 The outputs of the dimmers at any setting shall not vary more than one volt for any
change in load from a minimum of ten watts to full rated load.
2.3.15 All dimmer and non dim modules shall be clearly identified with the manufacturer’s
name and address, the dimmer rating in amperes and volts, and the catalogue or serial
number.
2.3.16 Manufacturers:
2.3.16.1 Lutron
2.3.16.2 ETC
2.3.16.3 Leviton
2.4 DIMMING SYSTEM CONTROL STATIONS (IF SHOWN ON DRAWINGS)
2.4.1 Control faceplates shall be in the color and finish as selected by the Architect. Controls
shall be engraved with appropriate zone and/or scene descriptions, furnished to the
manufacturer prior to fabrication. Legends on control faceplates to be engraved to
resist removal by cleaning or scratching. Font, type size and color to be as selected by
the Architect.
2.4.2 Controls shall fasten to a flush mounted standard wall box with no visible fasteners.
Faceplate shall be held securely with set screws or similar mechanical devices,
attachment by Velcro or magnets is not allowed.
2.4.3 Controls shall operate at low voltage, powered from a UL listed Class 2 transformer in
the dimmer or control panel.
2.4.4 Controls to have power failure memory so that if power to the control stations, control
panel or the dimming panels is disrupted, the lights will return to the same state when
power is restored.
2.4.5 Where controls use electronic memory they shall be capable of withstanding surges and
electrical noise on the power line of 6000V, 3000A as specified by ANSI/IEEE standard
C62.41 without loss of memory or impairment to performance. Memory shall be
protected without reliance on backup or data reloading systems.
2.4.6 Provide the following remote control stations for use with the preset control station(s) as
shown on the Drawings:
2.4.6.1 Four Scene Remote Control Station(s) shall be capable of recalling any one of four
preset scenes plus OFF.
D&A#07103 16930-7 St. Christopher Church Phase III
2.4.7 Manufacturers:
2.4.7.1 Lutron
2.4.7.2 ETC
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Provide any additional relays, transformers, power supplies or other necessary or
auxiliary devices not specifically listed in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings
but needed to affect the functional requirements of the control system.
3.1.2 Provide ten percent minimum spare conductors in all conduits and raceways, control
cables and control cable connectors. Spare conductors shall be indicated and labeled
on shop drawings and shall be terminated on barrier terminal strips and in connectors
and labeled in the same manner as active conductors
3.1.3 Field termination in these systems shall be made to numbered screw terminals on circuit
breakers or switches or on numbered barrier terminal blocks. Wire nuts and crimped
connectors are not acceptable.
3.1.4 The Electrical Contractor shall run separate neutrals for all branch load circuits.
3.1.5 Upon completion of the installation and prior to removal of the bypass jumpers, the
Electrical Contractor shall completely test all line voltage power and low voltage control
wiring for continuity and accuracy of connections. The jumpers shall remain in place
until all loads have been fully tested and found to be free of miswires, short circuits or
other wiring defects.
3.2 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
3.2.1 Manufacturer to assemble and test the dimming system at full load for a minimum of five
hours before shipment.
3.2.2 System shall be commissioned by a factor based engineer. The commissioning will be
performed upon notification by the Electrical Contractor that the system installation is
complete and that all loads have been tested live for continuity and freedom from
defects and that all control wiring has been connected and checked for proper
continuity. The Electrical Contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the
Architect/Engineer with ten working days notice of the scheduled commissioning date.
Factory engineer to demonstrate the operation and maintenance of all system
components to the Owner’s representative.
3.2.3 Provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual to the Owner’s representative
containing a set of record drawings, operation instructions, maintenance and trouble
shooting information and parts lists.
3.2.4 Manufacturer shall provide access to qualified personnel able to address problems with
the dimming system 24 hours per day, 365 day per year.
D&A#07103 16930-8 St. Christopher Church Phase III
END OF SECTION
31 11 00 - SITE PREPARATION
PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08
SECTION 31 11 00: SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, equipment, and services necessary for the completion of all site
preparation work, including clearing and site demolition, required for the project as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 31: Earthwork
B. Division 32: Exterior Improvements
1.03 SITE INSPECTION
A. Visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions. Refer to
Specification Sections 00 21 00 - Instructions to Bidders and 00 30 00 Information
Available to Bidders for site examination requirements and procedures.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect all buildings, sidewalks, pavements, curbing, planting, trees, landscaping and
other improvements that are on or adjacent to the site and are not to be removed or
replaced as part of this project. Provide shoring and bracing as required to complete
the work.
B. Removal or relocation of existing utilities as required for completion of the project
shall be done by the respective contractor(s). Notify the Architect of any improper or
concealed conditions uncovered during the progress of the work.
1. Existing utilities made obsolete by demolition, and not interfering with new
construction, shall be terminated by capping, plugging, or similar method.
2. Obsolete underground utility lines may be abandoned in place except where
removal is required to avoid interference with the work of the project.
31 11 00 - SITE PREPARATION
PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08
3. Existing utility lines scheduled to remain shall be protected to avoid utility
service interruptions.
C. Utility outages must be scheduled in advance with the Utility in question.
D. Location of gas lines, underground telephone cables, underground electrical cables and
conduit, storm lines, sanitary waste, water lines, and valve boxes must be marked
before performing any work which may damage such underground utilities.
E. Strip topsoil to a depth of 8" from all areas of new construction and from all areas
where the existing grade is to be cut or filled.
2.02 SITE CLEARANCE
A. Remove existing trees, stumps, roots, brush, undergrowth, vegetation, trash and debris
within the Project limits, as noted on the Drawings and as required to complete the
work.
1. Tree stumps within the area of building construction, drives and walks shall be
entirely removed. All other tree stumps shall be removed to a minimum depth
of 8" below finish grade.
2.03 PROTECTION
A. Existing valve boxes, utility tunnels and manholes should be protected so they will not
be crushed, buried with earth or covered with construction material and made
inaccessible.
B. Trees, Shrubs and Groundcover:
1. Existing trees, shrubs and ground covers are to be protected to their driplines
from project work. Trees shall be fenced with 6' high chain link fencing
installed in the ground to avoid trespass. Shrubs shall be protected from falling
debris.
2. Trees immediately adjacent to any work shall have their limbs tied back for
clearance. The Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the University's
Physical Plant for pruning required for clearance.
31 11 00 - SITE PREPARATION
PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08
3. Vehicles, equipment, and materials are not to be stored under driplines. Travel
under driplines is not permitted except as necessary to perform the work.
4. Damage to plant material designated to remain, either by removal, injury, or
excessive pruning will be assessed for value loss and will be accountable by the
Contractor for the project. The "Guide for Plant Appraisal" by the International
Society of Arboriculture, most recent edition, will be used to establish such
values. Any costs of repairs and replacements will be the sole responsibility of
the Contractor.
2.04 FILLING
A. Filling of all open holes or depressions resulting from clearing and site demolition
operations is included under Division 31 - Earthwork.
B. Areas to be filled shall be free of debris before fill material is placed.
2.05 DISPOSAL
A. All removed vegetation, topsoil and demolished materials shall be properly and legally
disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed.
END OF SECTION
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 1 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
SECTION 31 23 00: EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the
completion of all earthwork in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 01 45 24: Testing Agency Services
B. Section 02 32 00: Geotechnical Report
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D-698 test methods for moisture-density relations of soils and soil-aggregate
mixtures (Standard Proctor).
B. ASTM D-1557 test methods for moisture - density relations of soils and soil aggregate
mixtures (Modified Proctor).
C. ASTM D2922: Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in-place by Nuclear Methods
(shallow depth).
D. Indiana Department of Transportation (INDOT) Standard Specifications: Latest
Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Results or Certificates: Submit evidence that the following items comply with
this specification.
1. Drainage fill stone.
2. Soil proposed for fill areas.
3. All proposed fill materials.
4. If the selected contractor's proposed method of excavation requires shoring and
bracing to support existing structures or temporarily retain slopes, submit shoring
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 2 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
and bracing plans, details and calculations, signed and stamped by a structural
engineer registered in the State of Indiana.
5. Compaction levels of all fills placed below foundations, building slabs, exterior
slabs and pavements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL
A. Structural fill shall be used for all backfill located in the zone-of-influence between the
bottom of the structure's foundation and the surface of suitable, undisturbed material
soil beneath.
B. Structural fill shall be: as recommended by the Testing Agency.
C. The above listed fill material shall extend beyond the building foundations by 5' with a
1:1 slope beyond that point.
D. Compact to 95% of the soils modified proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-1557).
2.02 SOIL FILL MATERIAL BENEATH BUILDING SLAB
A. Fill materials placed above the natural undisturbed soil bearing materials [or, the
structural fill materials] shall consist of:
1. Refer to Geotech Report and recommendations of the Testing Agency.
B. Fill material used beneath exterior slabs and pavements shall conform to the above
requirements.
C. Fill shall be placed to within 10" of the finish elevation of the slab above.
D. All material placed beneath the floor slab areas are to be compacted to a density of
93% of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D-1557.
2.03 COMMON FILL
A. Common fill materials are to be placed outside the structures zone-of-influence and in
areas not beneath slabs and pavements.
B. Common fill shall consist of material obtained from excavations, on-site materials, or
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 3 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
off-site borrow locations. Material shall be free of trash, rubble, tree stumps, or rocks
over 6" in sizes. The organic content shall not exceed 5%. Do not permit rocks
greater than 1" in the upper 12" of fill.
2.04 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE FILL
A. Crushed aggregate layer beneath floor slab and vapor barrier shall be a 6" (min.) layer
of #53 stone conforming to INDOT standards.
2.05 DRAINAGE FILL AND BACKFILL
A. Backfill used at foundations and below grade walls and at other locations indicated on
the Drawings shall consist of No. 9 crushed stone conforming to INDOT standards.
B. Compact as recommended by the Testing Agency of the materials standard proctor
maximum dry density (ASTM D-698).
2.06 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Non-woven Geotextile Filter Fabric complying with ASTM D-4355-500:
Approved Products:
1. Polyfelt TS 650
2. Amoco 4551
3. Mirafi 160N
2.07 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Provide erosion control materials and techniques as required by the Drawings and the
local drainage authority.
B. Silt traps.
C. Strawbale dams.
D. Soil stabilization fabric.
E. Jute netting.
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 4 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
F. These materials shall be utilized as required, maintained during the course of
construction, and removed upon completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all site
conditions.
B. The Contractor shall lay out the work, establish all lines and elevations in accordance
with the Drawings, and verify same with the Architect prior to start of excavation
work.
C. The Contractor shall take care to protect all existing structures, landscaping and
improvements to remain.
D. Utilities:
1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the Drawings
or otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to excavating. If damaged,
repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or
otherwise made know to the Contractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure
that service is not interrupted.
3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately
restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the
Owner.
4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being
constructed under this Section, immediately notify the Architect and secure his
instructions.
5. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities until written instruction are
received from the Architect.
E. Dewatering and Surface Water Control:
1. Remove all water, including rainwater, encountered during trench and sub-
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 5 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
structure work to an approved location by pumps, drains and other approved
methods.
2. The Contractor shall keep the site free of standing water. The Contractor shall
construct all necessary temporary ditches, swales and other means to keep
stormwater away from work. When the permanent storm drainage system or
portions thereof are constructed, stormwater shall be directed to the permanent
stormwater collection systems. Upon completion of the work and when
necessary during construction operations, the permanent stormwater collection
system shall be cleaned of all sediment or debris which may enter the system.
F. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors,
and to other work being performed on or near the site.
G. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Perform excavating of every type of material encountered within the limits of the work
to the lines, grades and elevations indicated and specified herein.
1. Excavation shall extend a sufficient distance from basement walls, floors and
footings to allow for temporary shoring and bracing, placing and removal of
forms, application of waterproofing, installation of drainage systems services,
and examination.
2. Excavation bottoms shall be left clean and free of rocks, loose materials, debris
and trash.
B. Notify the Architect immediately if soft pockets are encountered in footing, concrete
slab-on-ground or foundation wall excavations. When authorized by the Architect, the
undesirable material shall be removed and the proposed elevation re-established by
backfilling with approved fill material. Fill shall extend outward and downward on a
one-to-two slope from the base perimeter of the footing, concrete slab, or foundation
wall. Such conditions shall be considered a "Concealed Condition: and shall be
governed by the GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article 4.3.6. Determination of
elevations and measurements of approved excavation below grades indicated shall be
done under the direction of the Architect.
C. Excavating for structures:
1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of 0.10 ft., and
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 6 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing
and removing concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction
required, and for inspection.
2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of
excavation:
a) Excavate by hand tools to final grade just before concrete is placed.
b) Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive
concrete.
3. Excavate for footings and foundations only after general site excavating, filling,
and grading are complete.
D. Excavating for Pavements:
1. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross sections, elevations and
grades.
E. Cold Weather Protection:
1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is
less than 35° F.
F. Surplus Materials:
1. Dispose of surplus excavated material away from the site at disposal areas
arranged and paid for by the Contractor.
2. Satisfactory excavated materials may, at the Contractor's option, be stored on
site provided such storage does not conflict with other requirements of the
Contract Documents.
G. Unauthorized Excavation:
1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of material beyond indicated
subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific instruction from the
Architect.
2. Under footings, foundations or retaining walls:
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 7 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
a) Fill unauthorized excavations by extending the indicated bottom elevation
of the footing or base to the excavation bottom, without altering the
required top elevation.
b) When acceptable to the Architect, lean concrete fill may be used to bring
the bottom elevation to proper position.
3. Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations elsewhere as specified for
authorized excavations, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
H. Stability of Excavations:
1. Slope sides of excavations in residual soil, rock or weathered rock to 1:1 or
flatter, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
2. Where soft fill is exposed in cut slopes, its slope configuration shall be flatter
than 1:1 and is subject to the requirements of the Soils Engineers.
3. Shore and brace where required by safety regulation, or where sloping is not
possible because of space restrictions or instability of the materials being
excavated.
4. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
I. Shoring and Bracing:
1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing as may be necessary for safety of
personnel, protection of work, adjacent structures and compliance with
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of the time period
excavations will be open.
3. Carry shoring and bracing down as excavation progresses.
3.03 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. Preparation of subgrade below slab-on-ground floors, walks and pavements areas:
1. After rough grade has been established in cut areas and prior to placement of fill
in fill areas, the exposed subgrade will be inspected by the testing agency. Any
topsoil or other organic material still in place, frozen, wet, soft or loose soil and
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 8 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
other undesirable surface materials shall be removed.
2. The exposed subgrade shall be compacted under the observation of the soils
technician. Any unsuitable material thus exposed shall be removed and replaced
with approved fill, as directed by the Architect. Such conditions shall be
considered a "Concealed Condition" and shall be governed by the GENERAL
CONDITIONS, Article 4.3.6.
3. Subgrade shall be compacted to meet requirements listed elsewhere in this
Section.
B. Reconditioning of subgrades: Approved compacted subgrades that are disturbed by
construction operations or adverse weather shall be scarified, reshaped and compacted
to the required density prior to further construction thereon. Recompaction over
underground utilities and heating lines shall be by hand tamping.
3.04 PLACING AND COMPACTION
A. Backfill excavations promptly as progress of the work permits, but not until
completion of the following:
1. Inspection and approval of bottom of excavation and bottom of footings by Soils
Engineer.
2. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including waterproofing and
drainage systems.
3. Inspecting, testing, approving and recording locations of underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing shoring and bracing and backfilling of voids with satisfactory
materials.
6. Removing trash and debris.
7. Placement of horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Placing and compaction shall be subject to the following:
1. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated
closer to the foundation than a distance equal to the height of backfill above the
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 9 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
top of the footing; the areas remaining shall be compacted in layers not more
than 8" in compacted thickness with power-driven hand tampers suitable for the
material being compacted.
2. Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to seven (7) days after
completion of the walls and after basement and first floor slabs have been
placed. As far as practicable, backfill shall be brought up evenly on each side of
the wall and sloped to drain away from the wall.
3. Material containing excess water so the specified compaction limits cannot be
attained should be spread and dried to a moisture content, which will permit
proper compaction.
4. All footing and basement excavations shall be inspected by the testing agency to
ensure that the footings and concrete slabs on grade will bear on satisfactory
material. Concrete footings and slabs on grade shall not be poured until
approval of bearing surfaces has been received from the Architect.
C. Structural Fill
1. Only structural fill material per paragraph 2.01 shall be used beneath the
footings and foundations.
2. Structural fill shall extend outward away from the base of the foundation
element 5' horizontally, then at a 1:1 slope.
3. All fill shall be placed on an approved subgrade. Each lift shall not exceed 8" in
loose thickness.
4. Each layer shall be uniformally compacted by means of suitable equipment of
the type required by the fill material. Under no circumstances should a bulldozer
or similar tracked vehicle be used as compacting equipment.
5. Compact per paragraph 2.01 above.
D. Soil Fill Beneath Building
1. All fill material used between building slab and the approved subgrade or, where
required, structural fill shall be per paragraph 2.02 above.
2. The fill material should be placed in layers not to exceed 8" in loose thickness
and should be sprinkled with water as required to secure specified compactions.
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 10 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
3. Each layer should be uniformly compacted by means of suitable equipment of
the type required by the materials composing the fill.
4. Under no circumstances should a bulldozer or similar tracked vehicles be used
as compacting equipment.
5. Material containing an excess of water so the specified compaction limits cannot
be attained should be spread and dried to a moisture content, which will permit
proper compaction.
6. All fill should be compacted to the specified percent of the maximum density
obtained in accordance with paragraph 2.02. Should the results of the in-place
density tests indicate that the specified compaction limits are not obtained, the
areas represented by such tests should be reworked and retested as required until
the specified limits are reached.
E. Drainage fill material for underslab drainage layer.
1. Material shall be as recommended by the Testing Agency. Densify with
appropriate compaction equipment until there is not further settlement.
F. Drainage Backfill against basement, foundation and site retaining walls.
1. Material shall be as recommended by the Testing Agency. Densify to within
24" of finished grade.
2. Line bottom of excavation with filter fabric. Carry up side of foundation 24"
and the entire cut slope. Lap and tape joints 6" minimum.
3. Place stone in layers not to exceed 8", taking care not to disturb the filter fabric.
4. Densify each fill layer with appropriate compaction equipment until there is no
further settlement.
5. Prior to placing soil fill, cover stone fill with filter fabric.
G. Common Fill
1. Fill site to 8" below final grade with approved soil fill material, subject to the
following:
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 11 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
a) Allow for thickness indicated on drawings for base course as required for
asphaltic concrete paving and exterior slabs on ground.
b) The fill material should be placed in layers not to exceed 8" in loose
thickness. Fill material may require the addition of water or aeration as
required to secure specified compaction. Each layer should be uniformly
compacted by means of suitable equipment of the type required by the
materials composing the fill. Under no circumstances should a bulldozer
or similar tracked vehicles be used as compacting equipment.
H. Special Requirements for Geotextile Filter Fabrics:
1. Filter fabrics vary in their ability to withstand exposure to ultraviolet radiation.
2. Coordinate work to minimize exposure of filter fabric to sunlight. Keep
protected until installation and cover as soon as possible.
3. Verify and follow manufacturer's recommendations on exposure to sunlight.
4. Portions of filter fabric exposed to sunlight in excess of manufacturer's
recommendations shall be patched with a layer of fresh filter fabric.
3.05 TESTING AND OBSERVATION
A. Testing services shall be performed by an independent commercial testing agency.
Costs of all earthwork testing shall be paid by the Contractor.
B. Before any fill or backfill work is started, the testing agency shall determine in the
laboratory the moisture-density relationship curve for each type of fill material to be
used. Samples of fill material for testing shall be furnished to the testing agency by the
Contractor. Test reports, indicating the optimum moisture content and maximum
density of the fill material will be made available to the Contractor and Architect.
C. A soils technician shall inspect cut slopes to determine if shoring or bracing will be
required.
D. A soils technician shall be present whenever backfill work is in progress. He shall
inspect all fill material to verify compliance with specification. Field dry density tests
and percent Proctor Compaction Tests shall be performed as necessary to ensure that
adequate compaction is achieved. Daily reports shall be submitted to the Architect.
E. The Contractor shall notify the Testing Agency at least forty-eight (48) hours in
advance of the start of any fill or backfill work and prior to other required testing and
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 12 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
observation.
3.06 GRADING
A. Finish grades shall be brought to levels indicated on the Drawings and shall be sloped
to drain water away from the building. Allow for distribution of topsoil to a maximum
depth of 8" on areas, which have been cut or filled. The building site shall be
maintained so as to provide natural drainage without the ponding of water.
3.07 PREPARATION FOR TOPSOIL
A. Areas to be sodded and all lawn areas, which have been cut or filled, shall be
B. Subgrade shall be clean and free of waste material and debris.
3.08 EROSION CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all control measures necessary to prevent
erosion and sedimentation damage to on-site and off-site areas resulting from
construction operations, weather and existing conditions.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible to remove all excess water from the site and the
excavations as is necessary to avoid deterioration of structural fill and subgrade soils.
3.09 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
A. General: Protect newly graded areas from the actions of the elements. Any settlement
or washing that occurs prior to acceptance of the work, shall be repaired, and grades
re-established to the required elevations and slopes. Fill to required subgrade levels in
areas where settlement occurs.
B. Protect drive and parking area subgrades from tuck or other equipment until base
course of paving has been installed.
C. Maintain all of the work of this section as needed until the work has been accepted by
the Owner.
D. At the completion of the project all areas outside the work limits, disturbed by the
Contractor during the execution of his work, shall be returned to as near its original
condition as possible.
31 23 00 - EARTHWORK
PAGE 13 OF 13 SCEC-III/08-08
3.10 DISPOSAL
A. All removed subgrade materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site
by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed.
END OF SECTION
31 23 33 - TRENCHING
PAGE 1 OF 5 SCEC-III/09-08
SECTION 31 23 33: TRENCHING FOR STORM SEWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the
completion of all trenching works in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 31 11 00: Site Preparation
B. Section 31 23 00: Earthwork
1.03 REFERENCE
A. ANSI/ASTM C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
B. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Tests for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-
Aggregate Mixture using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 inch Drop.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods
required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.
B. Underpin adjacent structures, which may be damaged by excavation, work, including
service utilities and pipe changes.
C. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in affected
area until notification to resume work.
D. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost.
E. Grade excavation to perimeter to prevent surface water run-off into excavation.
F. No sewers, drains, culverts, water pipe, gas pipe or other structures shall be removed
without the review of the Architect; and where such structures cross or extend within
the boundaries of the work of the Contractor, these pipes shall be securely hung,
braced, and supported in place until the work is completed. No existing facility shall
be removed from service, either temporarily or permanently, without the review of the
31 23 33 - TRENCHING
PAGE 2 OF 5 SCEC-III/09-08
Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Fill and backfill material shall be structural fill in accordance with Section 31 23 00 –
Earthwork when trench is within 5’ or underneath any asphalt or concrete pavements.
Fill and backfill material may be either structural fill or soil fill material in accordance
with Section 31-23 00 – Earthwork when trench is not within 5’ or underneath any
asphalt or concrete pavements.
B. Pipe bedding material shall be Size Number 8 sand in accordance with Indiana
Department of Transportation Specification Standard Specification 2008 Revision
C. Warning Tape: Metallic-lined Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick,
solid colors with warning continuously printed caption in black letters.
Colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
D. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage
geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following
minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard
test methods:
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110lbf (490N); ASTM D 4632.
2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf (178N); ASTM D 4533.
3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf (222N); ASTM D 4833.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify stockpiled fill to be reused has been approved.
B. Verify foundation drainage system installation has been inspected.
C. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice, or water, and surfaces are
not frozen.
31 23 33 - TRENCHING
PAGE 3 OF 5 SCEC-III/09-08
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.
B. When necessary, compact subgrade surfaces to density requirements for backfill
material.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. Contractor shall excavate the trench to the required width and depth necessary to
construct the work in accordance with the Drawings.
B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of piping and allow inspection.
C. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. Hand trim for bell and spigot
pipe joints.
D. Where rock or boulder formation is encountered at the required elevation of the
bottom of the pipe, the trench bottom shall be excavated at least 12" deeper, backfilled
with suitable material in accordance with Section 02200, shaped and then compacted
in accordance with Section 02200 to form a firm uniform bed.
E. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
F. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner.
G. Fill over-excavated areas under pipe bearing surfaces in accordance with directions
from the Architect.
H. Trenches shall have walls as nearly vertical, as possible, from the bottom of the
excavation to the top of the pipe, with as little sloping of the sidewalls above the top of
the pipe as consistent with the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
I. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess subsoil not
being reused, from site.
J. All trenches shall be kept free from water.
K. Excavate trenches for PVC pipe to a depth 4" below the pipe and backfill with 4" of
fine granular fill.
31 23 33 - TRENCHING
PAGE 4 OF 5 SCEC-III/09-08
3.04 PIPE BACKFILL
A. Do not start backfilling until services have been inspected.
B. Backfill systematically and early as possible to allow maximum time for natural
settlement and compaction.
C. Backfill shall be placed by hand, uniformly on each side of the pipe and compacted in
layers not exceeding 6". Do not backfill on muddy or frozen soil.
D. Backfill trench with specified fill. Layers shall not exceed 12" (loose measure) except
in areas within 5’ or underneath asphalt or concrete pavements. In areas within 5’ or
underneath asphalt or concrete pavements fill layers shall not exceed 8" (loose
measure). Backfill shall be compacted as specified in Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork.
F. Backfill PVC pipe trench with pipe bedding fill to a compacted depth of 1' over the
pipe.
G. Removal and disposal of excess or unsuitable material shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
H. Backfilling under unsurfaced areas (beyond the limits of streets, drives, walks, etc.)
shall be carried out to a sufficient height above the original grade and neatly mounded
to prevent depressions in the backfill after settlement.
I. Under no condition shall backfilling material be allowed to drop on the pipe or
structures. When backfilling over the tamped layers is done by a bucket, the bucket
shall be lowered to prevent shock or possible injury to the pipe or structure.
Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the pipe during backfilling and/or
compacting fill.
3.05 COMPACTION
A. Percentage of maximum density requirements.
1. Compact each layer of fill or backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 00 -
Earthwork.
2. If the density of the adjacent soil is more than the density specified, compact to a
density not less than the density of the adjacent soil.
B. Compact soil materials using equipment suitable for materials to be compacted in
work area locations. Use power-driven hand tampers for compacting materials
31 23 33 - TRENCHING
PAGE 5 OF 5 SCEC-III/09-08
adjacent to structures.
C. Provide equipment capable of adding moisture to the soil material as determined by
moisture-density tests.
D. Where required, uniformly apply water to the surface of subgrade or layer of soil
material in such manner as to prevent free water appearing on the surface, either
during or subsequent to compaction operations.
3.06 TOLERANCE
A. Top surface of backfilling: +1"
3.07 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner-provided Testing Agency shall perform testing under provision of Section
01 45 23 - Testing Agency Services.
B. Testing Agency shall:
1. Perform compaction testing.
END OF SECTION
31 31 16 - SOIL TREATMENT
PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08
SECTION 31 31 16: SOIL TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the
completion of all soil treatment work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 31: Earthwork
B. Division 32: Exterior Improvements
1.03 SITE INSPECTION
A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing
conditions.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. EPA - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act.
B. All Local, State and National codes having jurisdiction.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Termite Control
1. Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, and
intended application rate.
2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section
013300 - Submittals and Substitutions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Termite Control
1. Applicator: Company specializing in soil treatment for termite control with five
31 31 16 - SOIL TREATMENT
PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08
(5) years documented experience.
2. Materials: Provide certification that toxicants conform to requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Material Packaging: Manufacturer's intact labels and seals identifying content.
4. Conform to State and Federal requirements for application licensing and
authority to use toxicant chemicals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Use only water-based emulsion soil chemicals.
B. Use working solutions containing either of the following chemicals at the
manufacturer's listed minimum rate of application: Dursban T.C., Pryfon 6, FMC
Dragnet FT or approved equal.
C. Store materials in a cool, dry place away from other pesticides, fertilizers, food and
building materials, and keep all materials locked and out of reach of the public.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TIME OF APPLICATION
A. Begin soil treatment work only after all preparations for slab placement have been
completed. Do not apply when surface water is present.
B. Do not apply soil treatment if the soil or building components are frozen.
3.02 MIX CONCENTRATIONS AND RATE OF APPLICATION
A. Mix and apply in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for locations where
used. If combinations of toxicants are used, one of them must be at the manufacturer's
listed rate of application.
B. Adhere to local and federal requirements for application, handling, disposal and
procedures.
C. Apply soil treatment materials with low pressure spray.
31 31 16 - SOIL TREATMENT
PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08
D. Application shall be by trained applicators.
3.03 AREAS TO BE TREATED
A. Apply soil treatment mix to all areas below new concrete floor slabs within the
building lines, along the exterior and interior sides of all new perimeter foundation
walls and grade beams, and around plumbing, utility services and other elements that
will penetrate the foundations and slabs.
3.04 GUARANTEE
A. Upon completion of soil treatment and as a condition of final acceptance, furnish the
Architect a written insured guarantee stating that the application was made at the
concentration, rates and methods which comply with these specifications.
B. The effectiveness of the treatment shall be guaranteed for not less than five (5) years,
without additional cost to the Owner.
C. Re-treatment, if necessary, shall be at no charge to the Owner and in accordance with
accepted trade practices.
D. Damage to the building caused by failure of the soil treatment shall be corrected
without cost to the Owner.
E. The guarantee shall be non-cancelable by all parties to the contract except the Owner.
3.05 DISPOSAL
A. All debris, contaminated items and waste materials shall be properly and legally
disposed of off the site by the Contractor.
3.06 CLEANUP
A. Do not contaminate water sources by cleaning of equipment or disposal of waste
materials.
B. Follow all manufacturers written instructions for cleaning methods.
END OF SECTION
32 12 17 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING (INSIDE INDIANA)
PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
SECTION 32 12 17: ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the
completion of all asphaltic concrete paving work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 00 30 00: Information Available to Bidders, Geotechnical Report
B. Section 31 23 00: Earthwork
C. Section 32 13 00: Concrete Walks, Ramps and Curbing
D. Section 32 17 23: Pavement Marking
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Indiana Department of Transportation (INDOT): Standard Specifications, Latest
Edition, with current supplements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: In accordance with pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 00 -
Submittals, submit:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
2. Certificates, signed by the asphaltic concrete paving materials producer and the
asphaltic concrete paving subcontractor, stating that materials meet or exceed the
specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this
32 12 17 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING (INSIDE INDIANA)
PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
Section.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 60 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ASPHALTIC CONCRETES
A. Dense graded base shall comply with INDOT Standard Specification Section 301,
Compacted Aggregate #53 Base, Thickness: 8″ or as shown on the Drawings.
B. Intermediate course shall comply with INDOT Standard Specification Section 402,
Mix Type A, Thickness: 3″ or as shown on the Drawings.
C. Tack coat shall comply with INDOT Standard Specification Section 406.
D. Surface course shall comply with INDOT Standard Specification Section 402, Mix
Type A. Thickness: 1-1/2″ or as shown on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 FINAL PREPARATION OF SUBGRADES
A. After preparation of subgrade as specified in other sections of these Specifications,
thoroughly scarify and sprinkle the entire area to be paved, and then compact to a
smooth, hard, even surface of 90% compaction to receive the aggregates.
3.03 PLACEMENT
A. Placement of dense graded base and intermediate course shall be in accordance with
INDOT Standard Specification Sections 301 and 402, respectively.
32 12 17 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING (INSIDE INDIANA)
PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
B. Do not apply tack coat or surface course until there is no danger of damage from
further construction activity.
3.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner-provided Testing Agency shall perform testing under provision of Section 01
45 23 - Testing Agency Services.
B. Testing Agency will:
1. Perform the following tests during the placement of asphaltic concrete paving:
a) Asphalt temperature
b) Estimated loose asphalt thickness
2. Perform tests as required by INDOT Test Method IND-577-90, "Determination
of Target Density...by a Nuclear Test Device."
a) Supervise preparation of a test strip as described in the standard.
b) Perform nuclear density tests until the density has peaked as defined in the
standard.
c) After the target density has been established by the test-strip, perform tests
at the rate of one per five-thousand square feet of paving area, per INDOT
Standard Specification Section 401.12, a and b.
d) Coring shall not be required.
3.05 FLOOD TEST
A. Prior to application of seal coat, perform a flood test in the presence of the Architect.
B. Method:
1. Flood the entire asphaltic concrete paved area with water by use of a tank truck
or hoses.
2. If a depression is found where water ponds to a depth of more than 1/8″ in six
feet, fill or otherwise correct to provide proper drainage.
3. Feather and smooth the edges of fill so that the joint between fill and original
surface is invisible.
3.06 APPLICATION OF TACK COAT AND SURFACE COURSE
32 12 17 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING (INSIDE INDIANA)
PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
A. Application of tack coat and surface course shall be in accordance with INDOT
Standard Specification Sections 406 and 402, respectively.
B. Final grades shall match design grades within 1/2″ at any point.
3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled
asphalt materials.
B. Protection:
1. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt concrete pavement
until it has cooled and hardened and in no case sooner than 6 hours.
2. Provide barricades and warning devices as required to protect pavement and the
general public.
3. Cover opening of structures in the area of paving until permanent coverings are
placed.
END OF SECTION
32 13 00 - CONCRETE WALKS, RAMPS, STEPS AND CURBING
PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
SECTION 32 13 00: CONCRETE WALKS, RAMPS, STEPS AND CURBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the
completion of all concrete walks, ramps, steps and curbing work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 31 11 00: Site Preparation
B. Section 31 23 00: Earthwork
C. Section 32 12 17: Asphaltic Concrete Paving
D. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete
E. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealant
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Concrete mix design including test cylinder breaks and statistical data as supporting
information and in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Manufacturer's literature for all related materials specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate Base:
1. Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag, and sand, stone or
slag screenings - ASTM D-1241, Type I.
2. Gradation - Comply with local highway standards.
B. Concrete: 4000 psi air entrained; complying with all requirements of
Section 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
32 13 00 - CONCRETE WALKS, RAMPS, STEPS AND CURBING
PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
C. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.
2. Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, 6 x 6 - W1.4 x W1.4.
D. Sealant: Type 3, as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealant.
E. Joint Filler: Premolded, non-extruding, closed cell polyethylene, ASTM C-1621-T.
Expand-O-Foam by Williams Products or approved equal.
F. Curing and Sealing Compound. Clear styrene acrylate type, 30% solids content such
as:
1. "Super Rez Seal", Euclid Chemical Company.
2. "Dress & Seal 30", L & M Chemical Company.
3. "Masterrule", Masterbuilder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Construct the subgrade true to grade and to cross sections shown on Drawings.
Compact subgrade to the density in accordance with Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install concrete in accordance with the Indiana Department of Transportation (INDOT)
Standard Specifications.
1. Set forms to line and grade.
2. Set reinforcing steel.
B. Deposit concrete in forms on compacted subgrade.
1. Level concrete off and tamp sufficiently to bring mortar to the surface. Finish off with
a wood float afterward.
32 13 00 - CONCRETE WALKS, RAMPS, STEPS AND CURBING
PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
2. After floating walks and curbing, round edges with an approved edger. Score
concrete walks transversely at intervals not exceeding width of walk or as shown
on the Drawings. Place contraction joints in the concrete curbing at not greater
than 10' o.c.
3. Broom finish the final finish of concrete walks, ramps and curbing after floating.
C. Install premolded expansion joint filler one-fourth inch (1/4") thick around all
appurtenances such as manholes, inlets, utility poles, etc., that fall within the limits of
Portland Cement Concrete pavement, sidewalk.
D. Install premolded expansion joint filler one-half (1/2") thick, between Portland
Cement Concrete pavement or sidewalk and any fixed structure such as buildings
intersecting walks, curbs and pavement or retaining walls.
E. Install premolded expansion joint for sidewalk that extend to the full depth of the
sidewalk.
F. Expansion joints in curbs:
1. Straight curbs - 30' maximum.
2. Curved curbs - 10' maximum.
G. Expansion joints in walks:
1. As indicated on Drawings.
2. 30' o.c. maximum.
3. Behind curb at abutment to sidewalk.
4. At curb returns.
H. Control joints in walks:
1. As indicated on Drawings.
2. 6' o.c. maximum.
I. Place clear styrene acrylate curing and sealing compound to the freshly placed concrete
after joint installation and brooming.
32 13 00 - CONCRETE WALKS, RAMPS, STEPS AND CURBING
PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
3.03 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency shall perform testing under provisions of Section 01 45 24 - Testing
Agency Services.
B. Testing Agency shall:
1. Sample concrete at point of placement.
2. Perform required tests.
3.04 DISPOSAL
A. All debris and waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by
this Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed.
END OF SECTION
32 92 19 - TOPSOILING AND SEEDING
PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08
SECTION 32 92 19: TOPSOILING AND SEEDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the
completion of all topsoiling and seeding work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
B. All lawn areas disturbed by construction operations shall be seeded, unless otherwise
noted on the Drawings.
C. This Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary soil preparation work prior to
seeding and sodding, and for all lawn establishment and maintenance work on newly
seeded areas until uniform stand of grass is acceptable to the Owner's representative,
or until the Date of Substantial Completion, whichever is later. Thereafter, the Owner
will assume all lawn maintenance responsibilities.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 31 11 00: Site Preparation
B. Section 31 23 00: Earthwork
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Natural, friable sandy loam topsoil, characteristic of representative soils in
the vicinity that produce heavy growths of crops, grass or other vegetation. Topsoil
shall be free from roots, stones and other materials that hinder grading, planting and
maintenance operations, and free from objectionable weed seeds and toxic substances.
Utilize topsoil stockpiled on the site as specified in Section 31 11 00. Furnish any
additional topsoil necessary to complete the work from approved sources off the site.
B. Fertilizer: FS-O-F-241c, 20N-5P-10K. Furnish in bags or other standard containers
with name, weight and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked thereon.
C. Seed:
32 92 19 - TOPSOILING AND SEEDING
PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08
1. Lawn Areas shall use seed mix Type U in accordance with INDOT Standard
Specification, Revision 2008.
2. Areas specified on the plans to receive native plantings shall be seed mix type
“swale” as provided by JFNew.
D. Landscape Stone: White marble chips, 4.76 mm to 19 mm in size.
E. Weed Barriers: Nonwoven geotextile fabric, Mirafi 140N or equal.
F. Edging: Rigid PVC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TOPSOILING
A. All lawn areas, which have been cut or filled, shall be topsoiled. Exercise special care
and maintain existing grades in areas around existing trees to remain.
B. When contract operations have been completed to a point where the areas will not be
disturbed, subgrade shall be cleaned of waste material and debris and scarified and
pulverized to a depth not less than 4", removing surface inequalities before covering
with topsoil.
C. Topsoil shall be uniformly distributed over all areas to be seeded, to a minimum depth
8" after compaction. Subgrade and topsoil shall be damp and free from frost.
D. Topsoiling for areas designated to recieve native plantings shall be per JFNew’s
recommendations. All other topsoiling shall be as specified above.
3.02 SOIL PREPARATION
A. Areas to be seeded shall be scarified and pulverized to a depth of 4" and raked free of
stones and debris over 1 in any dimension. Surface irregularities shall be leveled to
prevent depressions. Grade shall be adjusted to assure that planted grade will be 1"
below adjoining grade of any surfaced areas such as walks, drives, curbs and parking
areas.
B. Fertilizer shall be spread at a rate of 2 lbs. per thousand square feet of area.
Fertilizer shall be mixed into the soil to a depth of at least 2" by disking or harrowing.
32 92 19 - TOPSOILING AND SEEDING
PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08
C. Exercise special care in soil preparation to avoid damage to existing trees which are to
remain.
D. Water dry soil to a depth of 4", 48 hours before seeding.
E. Soil preparation for areas designated to receive native plantings shall be per JFNew’s
recommendations. All other areas shall be prepared as specified above.
3.03 GRASS SEED APPLICATION
A. Apply seed at the rate of five pounds per 1,000 square feet (220 pounds per acre).
B. Broadcast half of seed with mechanical seeder.
C. Broadcast remaining half of seed at right angles to first seeding pattern, using same
broadcast method.
D. Cover seed to depth of 1/4" by racking or harrowing.
E. Spread oat straw minimum 1" thickness over all seeded areas.
G. Place cheese cloth or burlap over seeded area sloped 1 in 2 and steeper. Anchor with
stakes four feet on center and at edges.
H. Water seeded areas to a depth of 4".
I. Seed application for areas designated to remove native plantings shall be per JFNew’s
recommendations. All other areas shall be seeded as specified above.
3.04 LAWN ESTABLISHMENT
A. Keep soil moist during seed germination period. Supplement rainfall to produce 1"
per week after germination, but sufficient to keep top 1/4" of soil moist during hot
weather.
B. When grass reaches 5" in height, mow to 3" in height.
C. Maintain grass between 5" and 3" in height. Do not cut off more than 40% of grass
leaf in a single mowing. Remove grass clippings.
D. Lawn establishment for areas designated to recieve native plantings shall be per
32 92 19 - TOPSOILING AND SEEDING
PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08
JFNew’s recommendations. All other areas shall be established as specified above.
3.05 MOWING EDGE
A. Provide a 6" bed of landscape stone over the specified weed barrier, and restrained
with the specified edging, at locations as shown on the Drawings.
3.06 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove trash and excess materials from project site. All debris and waste materials
shall be properly and legally disposed of off site by the Contractor. Burning on the site
will not be allowed.
B. Excess topsoil, if any, shall be removed to another on-site location by this Contractor,
as directed by the Owner.
C. Maintain paved areas in clean condition.
3.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. A representative from JFNew shall be on site to approve topsoiling and soil
preparation for areas to receive native plantings before any native seed application
may begin. Once the topsoiling and soil preparation has been approved a
representative from JFNew shall monitor seed application activities.
END OF SECTION
33 49 00 - DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, PIPES AND FITTINGS
PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
SECTION 33 49 00: DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, PIPES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the
completion of all drainage structures, pipe and fitting work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 31: Earthwork
B. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.03 SITE INSPECTION
A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing
conditions. Refer to Specification Section 00 21 00 - Instructions to Bidders for site
examination requirements and procedures.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and complete technical data on all products to be
furnished under this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT MATERIALS
A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): ASTM C-76, Class as indicated, with modified
tongue-and-groove compression gasket joints complying with ASTM C-443.
B. Concrete Pipe: ASTM C-14, Class 2, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP): ASTM C-700 standard strength, except where extra
strength indicated, with resilient gasket joints complying with ASTM C-425.
D. PVC: ASTM D-3033, Type PSP or ASTM D-3034, Type PSM.
33 49 00 - DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, PIPES AND FITTINGS
PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
2.02 CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Concrete Base: Precast or cast-in-place at contractor's option. Use concrete which
will attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi.
B. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C-478, sized as indicated.
2.03 METAL ACCESSORIES
A. Manhole Frame and Covers: Grey cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 30B. Comply with
requirements of FS RR-F-621 for type and style indicated. Furnish covers with cast-
in-legend "STORM" on roadway face. Neenah R-1647.
B. Manhole Steps: Gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 30B, integrally cast into manhole
sidewalls, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Inlet Frames and Gratings: Grey cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 30B. Type and style
shall be as shown in the plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT
A. General:
1. Install conduit in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction,
except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
2. Inspect conduit before installation and remove defective materials promptly
from site.
3. Lay conduit true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of
invert.
4. Place bell ends of clay conduit or grove end of concrete conduit facing upstream.
5. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of
lubricants, cements and other special installation requirements.
B. Vitrified Clay Pipe: Install in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C-12,
"Recommended Practice for Installing Clay Sewer Pipe", unless otherwise indicated.
C. Concrete Pipe: Install in accordance with applicable provisions of American Concrete
33 49 00 - DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, PIPES AND FITTINGS
PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
Pipe Association "Concrete Pipe Field Manual", unless otherwise indicated.
D. Place circular concrete pipe with elliptical reinforcing so that reference lines indicating
top of pipe are not more that 5° from vertical plane through longitudinal axis of pipe.
E. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions.
Use joint adhesives as recommended by manufacturer to suit basic pipe materials.
F. Cleaning Conduit: Clear dirt and other superfluous material from conduit interior as
work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is
completed.
G. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted conduit at end of day or whenever work stops.
H. Flush lines between manholes, if required, to remove collected debris.
I. Joint Adaptors: Make joints between cast iron pipe and other pipe types with standard
manufactured cast iron adaptors and fittings.
J. Grout joints between cast iron pipe and concrete pipes thoroughly with cement mortar
to make watertight joint.
K. Closing Abandoned Utilities: Close open ends of abandoned underground utilities
which are indicated to remain in place. Provide sufficiently strong closures to
withstand hydro-static or earth pressure which may result after ends of abandoned
utilities have been closed.
L. Interior Inspection: Inspect conduit to determine whether line displacement or other
damage has occurred.
3.02 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
A. Precast Concrete Manholes: Place precast concrete sections as shown on drawings.
Where manholes occur in pavements, set tops of frames and covers flush with finish
surface. Elsewhere, set tops 3" above finish surface unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use epoxy bonding compound where manhole steps are mortared into manhole walls.
C. Provide rubber joint gasket complying with ASTM C-443.
D. Catch Basins: Construct catch basins to the sizes and shapes indicated.
E. Use concrete which will attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less that 3000 psi.
33 49 00 - DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, PIPES AND FITTINGS
PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/09-08
F. Set cast iron frames and gratings to elevations indicated.
3.03 TAP CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to existing conduits and underground structures so that finished
work will conform as nearly as practicable to requirements specified for new work.
B. For branch connections from side into existing 24" or larger conduit or to underground
structures, cut opening into unit sufficiently large to allow 3" of concrete to be packed
around entering connection. Cut ends of connection passing through conduit or
structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise
indicated. On outside of conduit or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6" of
concrete for minimum length of 23' to provide additional support or collar from
connection to undisturbed ground.
C. Provide concrete which will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
psi, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Use an epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and
conduit materials.
E. While making tap connections, prevent concrete or debris from entering existing
conduit or structure. Remove debris, concrete, or other extraneous material which
may accumulate.
3.04 BACKFILLING
A. Conduct backfill operations of open-cut trenches closely following laying, jointing and
bedding of pipe and after initial inspection and testing are completed.
3.05 DISPOSAL
A. All debris and waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by
this Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed.
END OF SECTION